Maybach S-Class (2024) - Automotive Mercedes-Benz - Free user manual and instructions

Brand	Mercedes-Benz
Model	Maybach S-Class (2024)
Category	Automotive
Product Type	Luxury Sedan
Engine Options	V8, V12 (depending on variant)
Transmission	9-speed automatic
Drivetrain	All-wheel drive (4MATIC)
Length	Approx. 5,470 mm
Width	Approx. 1,920 mm
Height	Approx. 1,510 mm
Wheelbase	Approx. 3,396 mm
Seating Capacity	4 or 5 (executive seats available)
Fuel Type	Petrol (gasoline), mild hybrid
Fuel Tank Capacity	Approx. 76 L
Weight (kerb)	Approx. 2,300 kg
Safety Systems	Active Brake Assist, Lane Keeping Assist, Blind Spot Assist, PRE-SAFE
Infotainment System	MBUX with 12.8-inch OLED display, augmented reality navigation
Climate Control	Automatic 4-zone climate control with air purification
Seat Features	Heated, ventilated, massage (front & rear)
Maintenance Interval	Every 12 months or 25,000 km (whichever first)
Warranty	4 years / 80,000 km (standard)
Repairability	Spare parts available via authorized Mercedes-Benz dealers
Manual Pages	566
Manual Language	English (original)

Frequently Asked Questions - Maybach S-Class (2024) Mercedes-Benz

How do I download the user manual for the Maybach S-Class (2024)?

You can download the manual in PDF format for free from our website. Click the Download button on the manual page.

Is the manual available in other languages?

Yes, you can request a translation by selecting your language and providing your email. We will send you a specifically translated version.

How many pages does the manual have?

The user manual for the Maybach S-Class (2024) has 566 pages.

What engine options are available for the Maybach S-Class?

The Maybach S-Class (2024) offers V8 and V12 petrol engines, with mild hybrid technology. The exact specifications depend on the variant.

What safety features are included?

Key safety systems include Active Brake Assist, Lane Keeping Assist, Blind Spot Assist, and PRE-SAFE functions.

How do I maintain the vehicle's battery?

For hybrid components, refer to the manual for specific care instructions. The 48V battery is maintenance-free, but periodic checks by a dealer are recommended.

What is the recommended tire pressure?

Tire pressure recommendations vary by load and speed. Check the label on the driver's door pillar or consult the manual for exact values.

Can I ask questions about the device?

Yes, you can ask questions on the manual page. Your question will be visible to the community, and you will be notified of answers via email.

How often should I service the Maybach S-Class?

Mercedes-Benz recommends servicing every 12 months or 25,000 km, whichever occurs first.

Where can I find spare parts?

Spare parts are available through authorized Mercedes-Benz dealers. Use the part numbers listed in the manual for accurate ordering.

USER MANUAL Maybach S-Class (2024) Mercedes-Benz

Digital - in the vehicle vehicle document with

Encumbrile Auditor & Manuel

the multimedia system under

and discover the plus natural

lpo

int and it

This contains a physical core of

comprehensive improvement on ab

operating your article and about

1. 2017年4月31日 星期六、2017

IMEX

3046512

Order no: P223 0613 13 Part inc. 223 581 66 12

Editor: A-2024

Exterior view of a modern luxury sedan with a dark maroon body and gold accents, parked against a geometric architectural background (no visible text or symbols)

S-Class Maybach

Operator's Manual

Mercedes-Benz

Air bag warning sticker for USA and Canada

WARNING loss of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger air bag is unable. If the front passenger air bag is enabled, a child or the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger air bag in the event of an accident. NEVER use a reward-Hoisting of the redundant system on a seat with an Black Blue HIGH AIR SAC. This can result in the DeA H of or Serious Injury to the CHILD.

Observe the chapter Children in the sentence ^4 .

Publication details Internet Your information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Mercedes-Benz AG can be found on the following directions: https://www.mnbus.com/ [USA only] https://www.mercedes-Benz AG (Canada only) Documentation team "Mercedes-Benz AG: Not to be restricted, transferred or otherwise reproduced, in place or in part, official service commission from Mercedes-Benz AGs. Vehicle manufacturer Mercedes-Benz AG Mercedes-sselle 120 A/R/2 Stuttgart Germany

As at 29.09.22

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz

Before your first drive, please read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer service life of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Operator's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people.

Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disregard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited warranty.

The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the following factors:

• Model
  Order
• National version
• Availability

Your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations in individual cases.

Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas:

• Design
• Equipment
• Technical features

The following documents are components of the vehicle:

• Digital Operator's Manual
• Printed Operator's Manual
- Maintenance Booklet
• Supplementary manuals relating to specific equipment
• Supplementary documents

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times.

Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental.

Indicator and warning lamps (standard) ..... 8

Indicator and warning lamps (with driver

camera) 12

Overhead control panel 16

Door operating unit and seat adjustment ..... 18

Control settings in the rear passenger

compartment 20

Emergencies and breakdowns 22

Digital Operator's Manual 24

Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ..... 24

General notes 25

Protecting the environment 25

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts 25

Operator's Manual 26

Touch-sensitive controls 27

Mercedes me app 27

Service and vehicle operation 28

Operating safety 29

Notes on assembling the license plate on

the front license plate holder 31

National information for components rele-

vant to radio regulation 31

Diagnostics connection 32

Qualified specialist workshop 33

Correct use of the vehicle 33

Notes for persons with electronic medical

aids 34

Problems with your vehicle 34

Reporting safety defects 35

Limited Warranty 35

QR code for rescue card 35

Data storage 36

Copyright 40

Occupant safety 42

Brief overview of the most important

points 42

Information on the automatic functions of

the restraint system 50

Purpose and function of the restraint sys-

tem 54

Seat belts 60

Airbags 61

Children in the vehicle 64

Brief overview of most important points ..... 64

Important safety notes 65

Suitable child restraint systems for the

transport of children 71

Securing the child restraint system .... 71

Child safety locks 76

Occupant presence reminder 78

Opening and closing 79

SmartKey 79

Doors 83

Trunk 92

Side windows 99

Sliding sunroof 102

Roller sun blinds 107

Anti-theft protection 109

Seats and stowing 113

Notes on the correct driver's seat position .. 113

Notes on grab handles 113

Seats 114 Steering wheel 133
Easy entry and exit feature 134
Memory function 136
Memory function in the rear passenger compartment 137
Stowage areas 141
Cup holder 153
Sockets 154
Refrigerator box 154
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna .... 157
Installing and removing the floor mats ..... 159

Light and visibility 161

Exterior lighting 161

Interior lighting 171

Windshield wiper and windshield washer

system 173

Mirrors 175

Area permeable to radio waves on the

windshield 178

Infrared-reflective windshield function ..... 178

Climate control 179
Overview of climate control systems .... 179
Operating the climate control system ..... 181
Driving and parking 193
Driving 193
DYNAMIC SELECT 205
Automatic transmission 207
Function of 4MATIC 211
Refueling 211
Parking 214
Driving and driving safety systems 223
Vehicle towing instructions 289

Driver's display 290

Notes on the driver's display 290

Notes on the 3D driver display 290

Operating the driver's display 290

Driver display menus 291

Head-up Display 292

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical

system 296

Overview of status displays on the driver's

display 296

MBUX multimedia system 298
Overview and operation 298
System settings 318
AMG TRACK PACE 323
Navigation and traffic 328
Telephone 338
Mercedes me Apps 342
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ..... 349
Radio & media 352
Sound settings 358

Maintenance and care 359

ASSYST PLUS service interval display .... 359

Maintenance Management 360

Telediagnosis 360

Engine compartment 361

Cleaning and care 366

Breakdown assistance 375

Emergency 375

Flat tire 377

Battery (vehicle) 383

Tow starting or towing away 389

Electrical fuses 395

Contents

Wheels and tires 400

Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics 400

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires 400

Notes on snow chains .... 401 Activating or deactivating snow chain mode .... 401

Tire pressure 402 Loading the vehicle 407

Tire labeling .... 411 Definition of terms for tires and loading .... 416

Changing a wheel 418 Emergency spare wheel 428

Technical data 430

Notes on technical data 430

Vehicle electronics 430

Radio regulations .... 432 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview .... 432

Operating fluids 434

Vehicle data 441

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443 Display messages 443 Warning and indicator lamps 508

Index 528

In this Operator's Manual, you will find the following symbols:

WARNING Danger due to failure to observe the warning notices

Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

▶ Observe the warning notices.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe environmental notes

Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or environmentally responsible disposal.

▶ Observe environmental notes.

NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage

Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged.

▶ Observe notes on material damage.

These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you.

Instruction

(→ page) Further information on a topic

Display Display in the central display

Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia system

* Indicates a cause

At a glance - Cockpit

Left-hand drive vehicles

Light switch → 161
② Steering wheel paddle shifters → 209
3 Combination switch → 162
Driver's display → 290
5 DIRECT SELECT lever → 207
6 ENGINE START/stop button → 194
(A) ECO start/stop function → 202
7 Central display → 298
Glove box → 143
9 Storage compartment → 143
10 Switch panel for:
- dynamic SELECT button → 206
Active Parking Assist → 276
Quick vehicle access
Fingerprint sensor → 298

Switches the MBUX multimedia system → 298 on/off
Switches sound on/off 298
Adjusts the volume → 298

Hazard warning lamps → 163

12 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system → 305

13 Adjusts the steering wheel → 133

Switches the steering wheel heater → 134 on/off

14 Control panel: Driver's display → 290
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC → 234
15 Diagnostics connection → 32
16 Opens the hood → 361
17 (P) Electric parking brake → 219

At a glance - Indicator and warning lamps (standard)

Standard driver's display

① Turn signal lights → 162
② Suspension (red) → 521
Suspension (yellow) → 521
3 Electrical malfunction → 514
4 Power steering (red) → 512
Power steering (yellow) → 512
5 Restraint system → 510
6 Seat belt → 510
⑦ Distance warning → 521
8 ABS → 521
9 Tire pressure monitoring system → 526
10 Engine diagnosis → 514
ESP® OFF → 521
ESP ^® → 521
12 Drive system: reduced power → 512
13 | Gasoline engine: reduced power

Coolant temperature → 514
15 Coolant temperature display
16 (P) Electric parking brake (yellow) → 518
Electric parking brake (red) → 518
PARK USA only
Canada only
18 Brakes (red) → 518
BRAKE USA only
(1) Canada only
RBS Recuperative Brake System, USA only → 518
(1) Brakes (yellow), Canada only → 518
19 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location → 514
indicator
20 Fuel level
21 D High beam → 162
SD Low beam → 161
300≤ Standing lights → 161

10 At a glance - Indicator and warning lamps (standard)

22 📋 Rear fog light

162

23

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

→

526

12 At a glance - Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera)

Driver's display with driver camera

① Turn signal lights → 162
② Seat belt → 510
3 Distance warning → 521
4 Restraint system → 510
Drive system: reduced power 512
6 Tire pressure monitoring system → 526
⑦ ESP ^® OFF → 521
ESP ^® → 521
8 ABS → 521
9 Coolant temperature → 514
10 Coolant temperature display
11 (P) Electric parking brake (yellow) → 518
12 Electric parking brake (red) → 518
PARK USA only (D) Canada only Brakes (red) → 518

BRAKE USA only
(1) Canada only
RBS Recuperative Brake System, USA only → 518
(1) Brakes (yellow), Canada only → 518
Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator → 514
16 0‡ Rear fog light → 162
High beam → 162
Low beam → 161
Standing lights → 161
18 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system → 526
Electrical malfunction 514
20 Engine diagnosis → 514
21 Power steering (red) → 512
Power steering (yellow) → 512
Rear axle steering (red) → 512

15 Fuel level

14 At a glance - Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera)

	Rear axle steering (yellow)	→	512
	Suspension (red)	→	521
	Suspension (yellow)	→	521

At a glance - Overhead control panel

① Sun visors
② Switches the front interior lighting on/off → 171
3 Switches the rear interior lighting on/off → 171
4 me button → 342
5 Opens/closes the rear roller sunblind for → 102 the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
6 Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off → 171
7 SOS SOS button → 342
8 Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off → 171

9 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel → 102
Opens/closes the front roller sunblind → 102 for the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
10 Indicator lamps: PASSENGER AIR BAG → 47 REAR SEAT AIR BAG → 49
⑪ Inside rearview mirror → 176 ⑫ Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off → 171

At a glance - Door operating unit and seat adjustment

Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 84
② Adjusts the seats electrically → 114
3 Switches the seat heating on/off → 130
4 Switches the seat ventilation on/off → 132
Adjusts the front passenger seat from the driver's seat
6 M Operates the memory function → 137
7 Operates the outside mirrors 175
8 Opens/closes the right side window → 99
9 Opens/closes the rear right side window → 99

10 Opens/closes the trunk lid → 92
⑪ Rear window roller sunblind → 108
12 Child safety lock for the rear side windows → 78
13 Opens the door → 83
14 Opens/closes the rear left side window → 99
15 ☐ Opens/closes the left side window → 99
16 Adjusts the head restraints → 124
17 Seat adjustment using the multimedia system → 128

At a glance - Control settings in the rear passenger compartment

Vehicles with a reclining rear seat

① Climate control rear operating unit → 180
② Electronics compartment in the center console
3 Sets the fully reclined position → 119
4 Selects the front passenger seat → 117
5 Switches the rear seat ventilation on/off → 132
6 Switches the rear seat heating on/off → 130
⑦ Adjusts reclining rear seats electrically → 118
⑧ Resets the standard seat adjustment set- → 119 tings

9 M Memory function in the rear passenger → 138 compartment
10 Storage box in the seat backrest
Refrigerator box → 154
⑪ Storage compartment in the rear armrest
12 MBUX rear tablet bracket
13 Cup holder

At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns

B-pillar with: QR code for accessing the rescue card → 35
② Safety vests → 375
③ me button → 342
SOS SOS button → 342
④ To check and top up operating fluids → 434
Jump-starting → 387
⑤ Tow-starting or towing away → 390
6 Flat tire → 377

7 Hazard warning light system → 163
8 Fuel filler flap with:
information label on fuel type → 211
information label on tire pressure → 403
QR code for accessing the rescue card → 35
9 Tow-starting or towing away → 390
10 First-aid kit (soft sided) → 377
⑪ TREFIT kit → 379
12 Warning triangle → 376

Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual

Multimedia system:

Settings Info
Operator's Manual
▶ Open Digital Operator's Manual

The Digital Operator's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system.

Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Operator's Manual:
- Quick start: find the first steps towards adjusting your seat (driver's side).
- Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle.
- Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions.
- Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the driver's display.
- Language: select the language for the Digital Operator's Manual.

You can search for keywords using the search field Search, in order to find quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle.

① Menu
② Search
Back
① Contents section

Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed.

Additional methods of calling up the Digital Operator's Manual:

Driver's display: call up brief information as display messages in the driver's display

MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice control system

Global search: call up search results for contents of the Digital Operator's Manual in the home screen

For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated while driving.

Protecting the environment

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style

The pollutant emissions of the vehicle are directly related to the way you operate the vehicle.

Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the environment. Please observe the following recommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style.

Operating conditions:

Make sure that the tire pressure is correct.
Do not carry any unnecessary weight.
Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection.
Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine.
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary.
▶ Drive carefully and keep a suitable distance from the vehicle ahead.
▶ Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking.
Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to 23 of its maximum engine speed.
Switch off the engine in stationary traffic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function.
▶ Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Observe the ECO display for an economical driving style.

Environmental issues and recommendations: It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them.

The relevant environmental guidelines and regulations serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed.

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to not using recycled reconditioned components

Mercedes-Benz AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts.

Use recycled reconditioned components and parts from Mercedes-Benz AG.

NOTE Impairment of the operating efficiency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding

Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle:

• doors
• door pillars
  • sill
• seats
• cockpit
• driver's display
• center console
• lateral roof frame

Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas.
▶ Do not carry out repairs or welding.
▶ Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety that have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-critical systems (e.g. the brake system) may malfunction. Use only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Use only tires, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model.

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts should be used.

More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are available for Mercedes-Benz models.

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Centers maintain a supply of Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide for quick and reliable parts service.

Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) ( page 432) when ordering Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts.

Operator's Manual

This Operator's Manual and the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle describe the following models and the standard and special equipment for your vehicle:

• The models and the standard and special equipment available at the time of this Operator's Manual going to press.
• The models and the standard and special equipment only available in certain countries.
• The models and the standard and special equipment, which will only be available at a later date.

Note that your vehicle may not have all features described. This is also the case for systems relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of the equipment in your vehicle at the time of delivery.

Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

① Please bear in mind that all the speed values stated in this Operator's Manual are approximate and are subject to a certain tolerance.

The Operator's Manual, Supplement, further supplementary documents and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle.

Touch-sensitive controls

In addition to conventional switches and buttons, your vehicle is equipped with touch-sensitive controls.

These are located in the following areas of your vehicle:

• Roof and door control panel
- Climate control

• Steering wheel
  • MBUX multimedia system
  The controls have touch-sensitive user interface surfaces. You can control these interfaces by pressing or swiping to adjust settings or to trigger functions, for example.

The user interface on the touchscreen also provides haptic feedback in the form of pulses, vibrations and changes in the surface structure.

You will receive haptic feedback in the following situations, for example:

• When pressing a button on the user interface
• When scrolling in a list or table
• When reaching a new area on the user interface, e.g. a pop-up window

When using touch-sensitive user interfaces, note the following points to avoid problems:

• Do not affix stickers or similar objects to the surfaces

• Do not attach smartphone holders or other mounting to the surface of the central display

• Keep the surfaces protected from moisture and wet conditions

• Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt (→ page 372).

Some touch-sensitive controls have a symbol and integrated indicator lamps. Make sure to press on the symbol of the control when using it.

Mercedes me app

Notes about the on-demand feature

You can also activate various functions (on-demand feature) subsequently via Mercedes me after purchasing your vehicle.

Information is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center.

Activating on-demand feature using Mercedes me

Requirements

• The vehicle has a wireless connection.
- The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account.

Ordering and activating on-demand feature

Add the desired on-demand feature for the vehicle to the shopping basket in the Mercedes me Store.
Complete the order. The on-demand feature is activated when operating the vehicle.

Speeding up activation

▶ Switch the vehicle off and lock it.
Unlock the vehicle after about two minutes and switch on the vehicle. The on-demand feature has been activated. For some features, a notification also appears in the vehicle's multimedia system.

If the activation was not successful, repeat the process.

Service and vehicle operation

Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada

When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points:

• service points or replacement parts may not be available immediately.
• unleaded fuel may not be available for vehicles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter.
• the fuel may have an extremely low octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center, or write to one of the following addresses:

in the USA:

European Delivery Department

One Mercedes-Benz Drive

Sandy Springs, GA 30328

in Canada:

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

European Delivery Department

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Maintenance

Your customer advisor confirms the service in the service report.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada)

You can find further information in the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the

Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle document wallet.

Change of address or change of ownership

In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We can then reach you in a timely fashion, if necessary.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehicle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Possible danger due to substances hazardous to health

In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California:

WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle, pickup truck, van or off-road motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle

Operating safety

WARNING Risk of accident due to malfunctions or system failures

If you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs car-

ried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures.

▶ Always have the prescribed service and maintenance work or any required repairs carried out in a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts

Modification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked component parts or safety-relevant systems.

This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle.

▶ Never tamper with the wiring and electronic component parts or their software.
You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data".

WARNING Risk of fire caused by flammable material on hot exhaust system components

Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system.

When driving on an unpaved road or off-road, check the vehicle underside regularly.
In particular, remove trapped plant parts or other flammable material.
If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension components

In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle:

• The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road
• The vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot-hole
• A heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components

In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and the

underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system.

Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
or
If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system

DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain individual high-voltage components. These high-voltage components are under high voltage.

If you modify component parts of these high-voltage components or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted.

High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible.

▶ Never perform modifications to component parts of high-voltage components.
▶ Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage components.
▶ Never touch component parts of high-voltage components after an accident.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high-voltage components. These components are marked with a high-voltage label:

Example

All work on high-voltage components must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on assembling the license plate on the front license plate holder

NOTE Malfunctions and system failures due to incorrect mounting of the license plate on the front license plate holder

If the license plate is incorrectly mounted on the front license plate holder, sensors, cam-

eras or driving and safety systems may malfunction or fail.

Observe the following points when mounting the license plate on the front license plate holder:

Mount the license plate directly on the license plate holder without advertising media or other holders.
Mount the license plate so that it does not protrude above or to the side of the license plate adapter.

National information for components relevant to radio regulation

Information on crossing national borders You must observe the radio regulations for the country in which you are currently operating your vehicle.

USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment."

Diagnostics connection

The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for example, during repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data in a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected in a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics connection

If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired.

For safety reasons, we recommend that you use and connect only products approved by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center.

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
▶ Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection

Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery.

▶ Check the charge level of the battery.

If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.

Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter ( page 197).

Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects:

- Malfunctions in the vehicle system - Permanent damage to vehicle components

Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter.

Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshop

An authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant work.

Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a qualified specialist workshop:

• Safety-relevant work
  • Service and maintenance work
• Repair work
• Modifications as well as installations and conversions
  • Work on electronic components
• Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: work on the high-voltage component of the 48 V on-board electrical system

Mercedes-Benz recommends a Mercedes-Benz Service Center.

Correct use of the vehicle

If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.

Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle:

• the safety notes in this Operator's Manual, vehicle-specific supplements and further supplementary documents
  • technical data for the vehicle
• traffic laws and regulations of the country you are currently driving in
• laws pertaining to motor vehicles and safety standards of the country you are currently driving in
  • radio regulatory requirements of the country you are currently driving in

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids

Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers.

In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be

found, for example, in the area around the multi-media and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment.

For this reason, the following can occur in isolated cases, depending on the aids used:

• Medical aids malfunctioning
- Adverse health effects

Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components.

Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop:

• Vehicle components carrying live voltage
• Transmission antenna
• Multimedia system and sound system

If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if necessary, contact us at one of the following addresses:

In the USA:

Customer Assistance Center

One Mercedes-Benz Drive

Sandy Springs, GA 30328

In Canada:

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

Customer Relations Department

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects

USA only:

The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to https://www.safe-rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590, USA.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from https://www.safercar.gov.

Canada only:

The following text is published as required of manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.

If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.

To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll-free in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328 in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally;

may also go to the following websites for more information:

• English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls
• French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels

Limited Warranty

NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions.

Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions.

This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New- or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

▶ Follow the instructions in these operating instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle damage.

QR code for rescue card

QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of

an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the routing of the electric lines) in compact form.

Further information can be obtained at https://www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code

Data storage

Data processing in the vehicle

Electronic control units

Your vehicle is installed with electronic control units. Control units process data that they e.g. receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange among themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving (e.g. driver assistance systems), while others enable convenience or infotainment functions.

In the following, you will find general information about data processing in the vehicle. Additional information on what specific data is collected, stored and transmitted to third parties for what purpose in your vehicle can be found in the notes on the functional features in question in the respective operating instructions. These are also available online and, depending on the equipment, digitally in the vehicle.

Personal data

Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identification number can be used by, for example, government authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities for using data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver (e.g. the license plate number).

The data generated or processed by control units may therefore be personal or, under certain conditions, become personal. Depending on what vehicle data is available, it may be possible to make inferences about e.g. your driving behavior, location, route or use patterns.

Legal requirements for the disclosure of data

If legal regulations exist, manufacturers are generally obligated to release data stored by the manufacturer to the necessary extent in individual cases at the request of state authorities. This may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offense, for example.

Within the framework of applicable law, state authorities are also authorized to read out data from vehicles themselves in specific cases. In the event of an accident, for example, information can be read from the air bag control unit that can help to establish what happened.

Operating data in the vehicle

Control units process data to operate the vehicle. This includes the following data:

• Vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display
• Ambient conditions such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor

As a rule, this data is volatile, is not stored beyond the operating time and is processed only in the vehicle itself. Control units (e.g. the vehicle key) often contain data memories. These are used to

temporarily or permanently document information on the vehicle condition, component stress, maintenance requirements or technical events and malfunctions.

Depending on the technical equipment, the following data is stored:

• Operating status of system components (e.g. fill levels, tire pressure, battery status)
• Malfunctions or faults in important system components (e.g. lights, brakes)
• System reactions in special driving situations (e.g. air bag deployment, the intervention of stability control systems)
  • information on events leading to vehicle damage

In special cases, it may be necessary to store data that would otherwise only be volatile. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example.

If you use services such as repair services or maintenance work, stored operational data can be read out and used together with the vehicle identification number, where necessary. It can be read out by service network employees (e.g. workshops and manufacturers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services). The same applies to warranty cases and quality assurance measures.

The data is usually read out via the diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is required by law. The operating data that is read out documents technical conditions of the vehicle or individual components and helps to diagnose malfunctions, meet warranty obligations and improve quality. This data, in particular information on component stress, technical events, operating errors and other malfunctions, is transmitted to the manufacturer for this purpose together with the vehicle identification number if necessary. In addition, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason, the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle for e.g. recalls. This data can also be used to check customer claims for warranty and guarantee.

Malfunction memories in the vehicle can be reset during repair or service work or, at your request, by a service company.

Comfort and infotainment functions

You can save comfort settings and customizations in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings:

• Seat positions and steering wheel positions
• Suspension tuning and climate control settings
• Personalized settings (e.g. interior lighting)

You can incorporate data into the vehicle's infotainment functions yourself as part of the selected equipment.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data:

• Multimedia data (e.g. music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system)
• Address book data for use in conjunction with an integrated hands-free system or integrated navigation system
• Navigation destinations that have been entered

• Data about using Internet services

This data for comfort and infotainment functions can be saved locally in the vehicle or is stored on a device that you have connected to the vehicle (e.g. smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player). If you have entered data yourself, you can delete it at any time.

The transfer of this data out of the vehicle takes place exclusively at your request. This applies in particular when you are using online services according to the settings you have selected.

Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®)

If your vehicle is equipped appropriately, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them using the controls integrated in the vehicle. The smartphone's picture and sound can be output via the multimedia system. Specific items of information are also sent to your smartphone.

Depending on the type of integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. Please refer to the vehi-

cle Operator's Manual / infotainment system operating instructions for further information.

This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps (e.g. navigation apps, music player apps). No additional interaction - in particular active access to vehicle data - takes place between the smartphone and vehicle. The type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app being used. Whether you can configure settings for it and, if so, which ones, depend on the app and your smartphone's operating system.

Online services

Wireless network connection

If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps

provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's services

Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data is exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which is collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given.

You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.

Third-party services

If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged.

For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data.

Data protection rights

Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufacturer and its data protection officers.

At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.

MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect

If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me connect, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled by the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me connect.

For additional information, please refer to the "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions.

Event data recorder

USA only:

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
  • How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with

the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.

MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law.

Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems.

State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of Dec 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Copyright

Free and open source software

Information on licenses for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website:

https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Registered trademarks

• Bluetooth ^® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
• DTS ^TM is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
• Dolby ^ and MLP ^TM are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories.
• ESP ^ and PRE-SAFE ^ are registered trademarks of Mercedes-Benz Group AG.
• HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.
• iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
• Burmester ^ is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH.
• Microsoft ^ and Windows Media ^ are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• SIRIUS ^ is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc.

• HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation.

• Gracenote ^ is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc.

• ZAGAT Survey ^30 and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

Brief overview of the most important points

Basic information

Make sure that the following prerequisites in particular have been met so that the components of the restraint system are able to provide the intended level of protection:

• Sit correctly (→ page 43).
• Fasten the seat belt correctly (→ page 44).
  Function of the seat belt warning lamp (→ page 46).
• Function of the rear seat belt status display ( page 46).
• The restraint system warning lamp is not lit up after the self-test (→ page 45).
• The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the front passenger air bag (→ page 47).
• The REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the rear air bags (→ page 49).

For clear understanding

The chapter "Occupant safety" includes information on equipment, functions and behaviors that contribute directly to safety of vehicle occupants.

The information is structured as follows:

• The most important information in brief: in this chapter, you are provided with an overview of the relationship between the restraint system and the correct behavior of all vehicle occupants.
• Specific information: in further sections of the chapter "Occupant safety", you can find specific information on the equipment and functions of the restraint system.
• Keyword directory: you can also find certain subjects in this Operator's Manual using the keyword directory.

Information on the following subjects, among others, are not provided in the chapter "Occupant safety":

• Children in the vehicle (→ page 64)

- Driving and driving safety systems (→ page 223)

• Stowage areas ( page 141)

Defining generic terms clearly

In this Operator's Manual, the following generic terms are used:

• Occupant safety: comprises the components and system functions which help to minimize, as much as possible, the stresses on and consequences for vehicle occupants during an accident.
• Restraint system: comprises those components which, along with the vehicle structure, help prevent vehicle occupants from potentially coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. The seat belts and air bags, for example, are components of the restraint system.
• Child restraint system: you can find all information on this subject in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 64).

Be diligent

For the components of the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, it is

essential that the sitting posture is correct and that the seat belt is correctly fastened.

Note that negligence when adjusting your sitting posture and fastening the seat belt may have serious consequences. Be diligent and make sure that all vehicle occupants are sitting correctly and have fastened their seat belts properly before starting every journey.

Information on the correct seat position

The seat position must be correct in order for the components of the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection.

The seat position influences both the protection provided by the seat belt and the additional protection provided by the air bag.

The correct seat position with an almost upright posture and a correctly fastened seat belt also reduce the risk posed by the air bag when it is deployed.

When choosing the seat, take note of the available space. When you are sitting with the right posture

in a nearly upright position, your head should not touch the roof.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

If you deviate from the correct seat position, the air bag cannot provide its intended protective function.

Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following.

▶ Put the seat in the correct position.
▶ Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen.
▶ Observe the following information.

In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, observe the following information:

- Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly (→ page 113).

When doing so, make sure you are able to fasten your seat belt correctly. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet over the center of your shoulder.

• Keep your distance from the air bags, especially the front air bags. Set the driver's seat and front passenger seat as far back as possible while making sure the seat belt is fastened correctly.
• If persons are sitting on the rear seats, vehicle occupants should maintain a sufficient distance to the parts of the vehicle interior in front of them.
• Make sure there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag.
• If you are the driver, observe the following information on the correct position of the driver's seat ( page 113).

Hold the steering wheel only by the steering wheel rim. This allows the driver's air bag to fully deploy.

• Assume a nearly upright position, with your buttocks as far back as possible in the gap between the seat cushion and seat backrest. This ensures that your back lies as flat and firmly as possible against the seat backrest.
• While driving, do not lean forward and do not lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bags.
• Sit with your feet resting on the floor, if possible. Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion
  Do not put your feet up on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bag.
• Fasten the seat belt correctly.

Notes on wearing the seat belt correctly

Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can provide the best level of protection only if it is worn correctly.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.

WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature

Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system.

Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint system.

Each vehicle occupant must observe the following notes in particular:

• The seat belt must not be twisted:
- The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet over the center of your shoulder.
- The shoulder belt strap should neither touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back.
- The lap belt must be routed as low down across the hips as possible. In addition, push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoulder belt strap. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen.
Pregnant women must also take particular care with this.
- The shoulder belt strap and lap belt must fit snugly against the body after being tightened.
- Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat.
- Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects.

• Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.
• Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants.

Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat.

Fastening and adjusting seat belts

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further.

Vehicles with illuminated design seat belt buckles: the illumination on the seat belt buckle does not indicate that the seat belt buckle is functioning correctly.

Always engage seat belt tongue ① of the seat belt into seat belt buckle ② of the corresponding seat.
To adjust the seat belt height: press button on the seat belt outlet and slide the seat belt outlet to the desired position.
To engage the seat belt outlet: release button and ensure that the seat belt outlet engages.

NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled

When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the Emergency Tensioning Device.

▶ Only buckle the seat belts as intended.

① Observe the information on child seat safety feature of the seat belt ( page 73).

Function of the restraint system warning lamp

When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.

A malfunction has occurred in the restraint system if:

• the restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on
• the restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey

If components of the restraint system have been deployed, the restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously.

WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system

Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop.

Function of the seat belt warning lamp

The 📁 seat belt warning lamp in the driver's display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.

The seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound.

When the driver's and front passengers doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out.

In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if:

- The driver or front passenger is not wearing a seat belt and the following criteria apply:

The vehicle travels faster than 5 mph (9 km/h) for more than 20 seconds. The vehicle travels faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) once.

- The driver or front passenger unfastens their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.

Function of the rear seat belt status display

The rear seat belt status display in the driver's display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.

In addition, a warning tone may sound.

If a person unfastens a seat belt in the rear passenger compartment while the vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt status display appears again.

Display in the driver's display

Every time the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs you for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fastened.

You can determine the status of the rear seat belt by the color of the seat symbol in the driver's display as follows:

• Gray: the rear seat belt is not fastened.
• Green: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the displayed seat.
• Red: the person in the rear seat has unfastened their seatbelt.

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (front passenger air bag)

The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger air bag. If the front passenger seat is occupied or a child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat, you must make sure, both before and during a journey, that the status of the front

passenger air bag is correct for the current situation.

WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat

Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff or damage the system.

Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.
When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat.

Self-test: when the vehicle is switched on, both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously for several seconds. After the self-test, you can determine the status of the front passenger air bag as follows:

- Front passenger air bag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously.

The front passenger air bag will not be deployed in the event of an accident. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front passenger seat.

If a rearward-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously.

- Front passenger air bag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps do not light up.

The front passenger air bag may be deployed during an accident. If the front passenger air bag has this status, no rearward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat.

If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the information in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 64)

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag

The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit.

A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that:

• The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat.
• The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible.
  • The person is seated correctly.
  Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

Malfunction of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the restraint system indicator lamp 🙏 light up simultaneously.

In this case, no one may use the front passenger seat and no child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat.

Have the automatic front passenger air bag shut-off checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

- Child restraint system on the front passenger seat ( page 68)

Disabling or enabling the front passenger air bag

The automatic front passenger air bag shutoff can activate or deactivate the front passenger air bag according to the situation.

This happens automatically as a result of the classification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

You cannot manually disable or enable the front passenger air bag.

Also observe the following information:

• The status of the front passenger air bag: see "Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps" (→ page 47)
• Notes on using the front passenger seat: see "Information on automatic front passenger air bag shutoff" (→ page 50)
• If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 64)

Function of the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps

L Left rear seat
R Right rear seat

You can disable or enable the rear air bags individually via the multimedia system ( page 50).

Self-test: when the vehicle is switched on, both the REAR SEAT AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously for several seconds.

After the self-test, you can determine the status of the rear air bag as follows:

• Rear air bag disabled: REAR SEAT AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously.
  The rear air bag will not be deployed in the event of an accident.
• Rear air bag enabled: REAR SEAT AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or until both the REAR SEAT AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps go out.
  The rear air bag may be deployed during an accident.

Information on the rear air bag in the seat back-rest of the front seat

Before beginning the journey, observe the information on the rear air bag ( page 62). Make sure the status of each rear air bag is correct for the situation.

Enabling/disabling the rear airbag via the multi-media system

Multimedia system:

Settings

Vehicle

Occupant Protection

Enable or disable the desired rear airbag under Rear Airbags.

Information on the child restraint system

When installing a child restraint system, observe the notes in "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 64).

Notes on the child restraint system on the front passenger seat

WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries if the front passenger air bag is enabled

If the front passenger air bag is enabled, a child on the front passenger seat may be struck by the front passenger air bag in the event of an accident.

▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIR BAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD.

Also pay particular attention to the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 68).

Notes for vehicles with rear air bag

If you install a child restraint system on the left or right rear seat, pay particular attention to the notes for vehicles with rear air bag: (→ page 70).

Notes for vehicles with belt air bag

If you install a child restraint system on the left or right rear seat, pay particular attention to the information on the belt air bag in the rear seat belt: (→ page 60).

Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system

Function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff

A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information:

• Sit correctly (→ page 43).
• Fasten the seat belt correctly (→ page 44).

The automatic front passenger air bag shutoff can activate or deactivate the front passenger air bag according to the situation.

Make sure you observe the following information:

• Status of the front passenger air bag: see "Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps" (→ page 47).
• When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 68).

Status of the front passenger air bag in relation to the stature of the person:

- Front passenger air bag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously.

The front passenger air bag will not be deployed in the event of an accident. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front passenger seat.

- Front passenger air bag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps go out.

The front passenger air bag may be deployed during an accident. Observe the following information on the correct seat position ( page 43).

Vehicles with rear seats: a person of smaller stature should use a rear seat.

System limits

The front passenger air bag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the following situation:

- The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.

- The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat surface.

NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied

In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if:

• There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat.
• The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied.

▶ Store objects in a suitable place.

▶ Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time.

Depending on the detected accident situation, the window air bag on the front passenger side may deploy. The air bag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.

Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection)

PRE-SAFE ^65 is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.

PRE-SAFE ^® can implement the following measures independently of each other:

• Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
• Closing the side windows.
• Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the sliding sunroof.
• Vehicles with memory function: moving the front passenger seat to a more favorable seat position.

52 Occupant safety – Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system

• Vehicles with memory function in the rear passenger compartment: moving the outer rear seats to a more favorable seat position.
- Vehicles with multicontour seat: increasing the lateral support by inflating the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest.
- PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multimedia system is switched on, generating a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mechanism of a person's hearing.

NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat

The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to the seat and/or the object.

▶ Stow objects in a suitable place.

Reversing the PRE-SAFE ^® system measures

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken will be reversed. You will need to perform certain settings yourself.

If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism will release.

Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take preemptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other:

• Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat.
• Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is canceled automatically when the vehicle pulls away.

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.

System limits

The system will not initiate any action in the following situations:

- When backing up

The system will not initiate any braking application in the following situations:

• Whilst driving or
• When entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist

Function of PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side

If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the center of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant.

Vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: the body can also be raised slightly.

If PRE-SAFE ^60 Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, a display message reading PRE-SAFE Pulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual(→ page 444) will appear.

Seat belt adjustment function

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: after you have fastened the seat belt of the front seat, it may adjust itself against your body by pulling at the shoulder until somewhat tight. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting.

This function is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly.

You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system ( page 53).

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle

▶ Occupant Protection

▶ Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.

Function of the rear seat belt feeder

The seat belt feeder for the rear seat helps you fasten your seat belt.

When the door is closed, the seat belt feeder extends.

If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the seat belt feeder can extend when you reach for the seat belt tongue.

The seat belt feeder retracts again in the following cases:

• the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle
• the seat belt tongue is not engaged in the seat belt buckle within a certain time
  • the respective door is opened

• a certain speed is exceeded after pulling away

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an extended seat belt extender while the vehicle is in motion

If the seat belt does not sit correctly on the body, it cannot perform its intended protective function.

Always ensure that the seat belt extender is retracted while the vehicle is in motion.

If the seat belt feeder does not automatically retract, you must push it back by hand against the resistance all the way to the stop before starting the vehicle.

You can deactivate the seat belt feeder. Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows ( page 78).

When installing a child restraint system on the rear seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 64).

Overview of the automatic measures after an accident

Depending on the type and severity of the accident, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, forexample:

• automatic braking (post-collision brake)
• activating the hazard warning lights
- triggering an automatic emergency call (→ page 349)
- Switching off the engine
To start the vehicle again, switch the vehicle off and on once more ( page 194). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, you may no longer be able to start the vehicle.
• switching off the fuel supply
- unlocking the vehicle doors
- lowering the side windows
• displaying the emergency guide in the central display
• switching on the interior lighting

Function of the post-collision brake after an accident

Depending on the accident situation, the post-collision brake can minimise the severity of a further collision or even avoid it.

If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can initiate automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied.

The driver can cancel automatic braking by taking the following actions:

- Braking more strongly than automatic braking

- Fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force

Purpose and function of the restraint system

Overview of deployment situations (restraint system)

Make sure that the following prerequisites in particular have been met so that the components of the restraint system are able to provide the intended level of protection:

• Sit correctly (→ page 43).
• Fasten the seat belt correctly (→ page 44).
• Function of the seat belt warning lamp ( page 46).
• Function of the rear seat belt status display ( page 46).
• The restraint system warning lamp is not lit up after the self-test (→ page 45).
• The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the front passenger air bag ( page 47).
• The REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the rear air bags ( page 49).

Depending on the detected deployment situation, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other:

• Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover
- Driver's air bag, front passenger air bag: frontal impact
- Knee bag: frontal impact
- Side impact air bag: side impact
- Center air bag in the driver's seat backrest: side impact, rollover
- Window curtain air bag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact
- Rear air bag in the seat backrest of the front seat: frontal impact
- Belt air bag in the rear seat belt: frontal impact
- Cushion air bag in the reclining rear seat: frontal impact
- PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact

The installation location of an air bag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol ( page 61).

Observe the information on the function of the restraint system ( page 55).

Information on how the restraint system works

How the restraint system functions depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident.

For more information about types of accidents, see "Overview of deployment situations" ( page 54).

The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the collision.

Factors that can be seen and measured only after a collision has occurred cannot play a decisive role in air bag deployment. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment.

The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an air bag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle deceleration.

Depending on the apparent type of accident and the detected deployment situation, Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or air bags can supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt.

When enabled, an air bag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant.

Potential protection provided by each air bag:

• Knee air bag: thigh, knee and lower leg
• Driver's air bag, front passenger air bag; head and ribcage
• Window air bag: head
• Side air bag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants

• Center air bag: head and ribcage
- Rear air bag: head
However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and air bag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the air bag deploying.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered or an air bag deployed.

If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered or an air bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released:

• The bang will not generally affect your hearing.
- In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions.

Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.

Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental protection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see the https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will find information on perchlorate, for example.

Information on the limited protection provided by the restraint system

Risk due to the incorrect behavior of vehicle occupants

All vehicle occupants must make sure of the following in particular:

• They observe the information on the correct seat position ( page 43).
• There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of their clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position.

In particular, you could slip beneath the seat-belt and become injured.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

Risk due to objects in the vehicle interior

All vehicle occupants must make sure of the following in particular:

• They observe the information on the correct seat position ( page 43).
• There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar).
• There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.

- There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of their clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt anchorage

Objects next to the front seat that block the seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt anchorage on the front seat impair the function of the Emergency Tensioning Devices.

Before starting the journey, make sure that there are no objects around the seat belt buckle or between the front seat and door.

WARNING Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag

Objects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the airbag.

The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even cause additional inju-

ries to the vehicle occupants by deploying. This may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat.

Always slow and secure objects correctly.
Before commencing your journey, make sure that no objects are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag.

The installation location of an air bag is identified by the AIRBAG ( page 61) symbol.

Observe the following information:

• Notes on loading the vehicle (→ page 141)
• Information on the center air bag in the driver's seat backrest ( page 61)
• Information on the rear air bag in the seat backrest of the front seat ( page 62)

Risk due to installing accessories

Do not attach accessories such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim.

In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps may be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsuitable protective covers

Unsuitable protective covers mean that air bags can no longer protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do.

▶ Use only protective covers approved by Mercedes-Benz for the seat in question.

In addition, the function of the automatic passenger air bag deactivation may be restricted by an unsuitable protective cover. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the front passenger air bag ( page 47).

Risk due to pets in the vehicle interior

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unattended in the vehicle

If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could possibly press buttons or switches.

An animal may:

• Activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example
• Switch systems on or off and endanger other road users

Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process.

▶ Never leave animals in the vehicle unattended.
▶ Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal carrier.

Risk due to modification, damage or wear to the components of the restraint system

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system

Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system.

▶ Never alter the parts of the restraint system.
▶ Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software.

If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts

Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations:

• The seat belt is damaged, has been modified, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
• The seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty
• Modifications have been made to the Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.

Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example.

Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended.

▶ Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor.

Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean.
Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop.

Use only seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the cover of an airbag

If you change the cover of an airbag or attach objects, e.g. even stickers, to it, the airbag may no longer function as intended.

▶ Never modify the cover of an airbag.
Do not attach any objects to the cover.

The installation location of an air bag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol ( page 61).

WARNING Risk of injury due to a damaged rear airbag cover

If a rear airbag cover is damaged, the rear airbag can no longer function correctly and can even cause additional injuries when deployed.

Before starting a journey, make sure the covers for the rear airbags are not damaged. If a rear airbag cover is damaged, disable the rear airbag. Have a damaged rear airbag cover replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

You can disable or enable the rear air bag via the multimedia system ( page 50).

Observe the information on the rear air bag in the seat backrest of the front seat ( page 62)

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door

The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged.

▶ Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Risk due to components of the restraint system that have already been deployed

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident.

WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components

The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed.

Do not touch the air bag parts.
Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag

A deployed airbag no longer offers any protection.

▶ Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced.

Have deployed air bags replaced immediately.

WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices

Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function.

Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Seat belts

Information on the belt air bag in the rear seat belt

The BELTBAG identification indicates that a rear seat belt is equipped with a belt air bag.

When activated, the belt air bag increases the protected area of the vehicle occupant's ribcage. When securing a child in a child restraint system on an outer rear seat with a belt air bag, it is essential to observe the instructions in the section "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 71).

Straightening out a twisted rear seat belt with a belt air bag

If the rear seat belt with a belt air bag is twisted, you must straighten it out before fastening the seat belt tongue.

Slide the seat belt tongue upward to the seat belt outlet and hold it.
Pull out the seat belt completely and hold it. The seat belt tongue is now at the more narrow part of the seat belt strap.

▶ Turn the seat belt strap in the seat belt tongue slit until it is in the correct position.
Slide the seat belt tongue downward and allow the seat belt to retract completely.

Releasing seat belts

Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue.

NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt

If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.

▶ Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted.

Airbags

Overview of air bags

Driver's/front passenger seat:

① Knee air bag
Driver's air bag
3 Front passenger air bag
4 Window air bag
5 Side air bag
6 Center air bag

Rear seats:

Window air bag
⑦ Side air bag
8 Rear air bag

The installation location of an air bag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. An additional arrow symbol ▶ indicates the installation location for certain air bags.

Observe the information under "Overview of deployment situations" (→ page 54).

Information on the center air bag in the driver's seat backrest

When triggered, the center air bag deploys between the front seats. Do not slow any objects in the deployment area of the center air bag. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 141).

Information on the cushionbag in the reclining rear seat

The cushionbag offers additional occupant protection in the event of frontal impacts. When triggered, the cushionbag deploys under the seat cushion. This helps prevent the vehicle occupant from slipping off the seat cushion.

If you install a child restraint system on the reclining rear seat, always observe the additional notes ( page 64).

Information on the rear air bag in the seat back-rest of the front seat

The rear air bag offers the occupants on the outer rear seats additional occupant protection in the event of certain types of frontal impacts. When triggered, the rear air bag deploys between the rear passenger and the front seat. The rear air bag can help prevent the rear passenger from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident.

However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the rear air bag deploying.

Always observe the legal requirements for the relevant country. If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, you can disable the rear air bag according to the legal requirements.

Observe the following information:

- Inform persons in the rear seats about the rear air bag in the seat backrest of the front seat.

• A person in the rear seat must adopt the correct seating position:
• Make sure that the covers for the rear air bags are not damaged.

WARNING Risk of injury due to a damaged rear airbag cover

If a rear airbag cover is damaged, the rear airbag can no longer function correctly and can even cause additional injuries when deployed.

Before starting a journey, make sure the covers for the rear airbags are not damaged. If a rear airbag cover is damaged, disable the rear airbag. Have a damaged rear airbag cover replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.

To avoid risks resulting from the deployment of a rear air bag, observe the following information on the correct seating position:

- The occupants must always keep their feet on the floor. Otherwise, feet and legs of occupants may be in the deployment area of the rear air bag.

If an occupant's feet cannot reach the floor, they must adopt the correct seating position and their legs must hang down the front of the seat.

- The feet or legs of the person in the rear seat must not rest against the seat backrest of the front seat, for example. Otherwise, their feet and legs will be in the deployment area of the rear air bag. This should be taken into consideration especially if you are traveling with a child in the rear seat.

If you are traveling with a child in the left or right rear seat, observe the information on the child restraint systems ( page 70).

Objects behind the front seat

Objects in the deployment area of the rear air bags may prevent the rear air bags from functioning correctly.

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects placed in front of the rear airbag cover

Objects in front of the rear airbag cover can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of

the rear airbag which is integrated into the front seat.

The rear airbag can potentially deploy in an uncontrolled manner and can cause additional injury to the person on the front seat.

Always stow and secure objects correctly.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 141).

Disabling the rear air bag

You can disable or enable the rear air bags individually via the multimedia system ( page 50). You can determine the status of the rear air bag via the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamp in the overhead control panel ( page 49).

The rear airbags should be disabled, in particular in the following situations:

• A child restraint system is secured on the left or right rear seat.
• The person in the rear seat (i.e. a child) is unable to sit in a proper seating position. Their

feet and legs are potentially positioned in the deployment area of the rear airbag.

• An occupant's legs are in the deployment area of the rear airbag due to the rearward position of the front seats.
• Objects are stored behind the front seats, and in the deployment area of the rear airbags.

Brief overview of most important points Safely transporting children in the vehicle

Always observe the following when transporting children:

- Never leave children unattended in the vehicle ( page 66).

• Secure children up to a height of 5 ft (1.50 m) on the respective seat (see illustration above) properly with a suitable and approved child restraint system, and secure small children in a rearward-facing child restraint system.
• Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Left/right rear seat (preferred seats)

Preferred securing system:

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings

and

Also secure Top Tether if present ( page 75).

Alternative securing system:

# Vehicle seat belt (→ page 76)

Additionally attach Top Tether if recommended by the manufacturer of the child restraint system ( page 75).

Be sure to observe:

- If the rear seat is occupied, ensure that the status of the rear air bag is correct for the cur-

rent situation before commencing a journey ( page 49).

Front passenger seat

Securing system:

Vehicle seat belt ( page 76)

Be sure to observe:

- If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the status of the front passenger air bag is correct for the current situation ( page 47).

(*) rearward-facing child restraint system only in combination with automatic air bag shutoff

Center rear seat

Securing system:

Vehicle seat belt ( page 76)

Additionally attach Top Tether if recommended by the manufacturer of the child restraint system ( page 75).

Important safety notes

Basic information

Be diligent

Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey.

Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant.

To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information:

• Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
- The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child.
- The vehicle seat must be suitable for the child restraint system to be installed;

Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason,

Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat.

The generic term "child restraint system"

The generic term "child restraint system" is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example:

• a baby car seat
  • a rearward-facing child seat
  • a forward-facing child seat
• a child booster seat - Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a back-rest and seat belt guide.

Observe laws and legal requirements

Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle.

Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle

Use only the following securing systems for child restraint systems:

• the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings

• the vehicle's seat belt system

• the Top Tether anchorages

Simply attaching to the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly.

When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system ( page 74).

A child booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a height at which they can wear a three-point seat belt properly without a child booster seat.

Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide.

Observe standards for child restraint systems

All child restraint systems must meet the following standards:

• U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
• Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213

Confirmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system.

Important warning notices

Always secure a child restraint system correctly

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system

The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.

Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.
▶ Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat.

▶ Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
▶ Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them.
Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers.

• Always observe the vehicle-specific information.

Installing an ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint system on the right and left rear seats ( page 74).

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt ( page 76).

- Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle

If the child restraint system is incorrectly mounted or unsecured, it may come loose.

The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended.

Unused child restraint systems could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants.

Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use.

▶ Always fit child restraint systems correctly, even if they are transported in the vehicle unused.

Do not modify the child restraint system

WARNING Risk of injury due to modifications to the child restraint system

The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury.

▶ Never modify a child restraint system.
Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.

Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition

WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems

Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function.

It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained.

▶ Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or involved in an accident.
Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.

Avoid direct sunlight

WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight

If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up excessively.

Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly the metallic parts of the child restraint system.

▶ Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
▶ Cover the child restraint system with a blanket, for example.
If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Observe when stopping or parking

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
• operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example:

• releasing the parking brake.
• changing the gearbox position.
- starting the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

Warning sticker in the rear passenger compartment

Rear air bag (visible when the left or right rear door is open) ( page 70)

Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.

The child could be struck by the airbag.

Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Observe the specific instructions for the rear-ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems ( page 71).

If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following notes:

• When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger air bag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (→ page 47).
• The front passenger air bag is enabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit. The front passenger air bag may be deployed during an accident. In that case, do not use rearward-facing child restraint systems.

Information on automatic front passenger air bag shutoff

If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger air bag is correct for the current situation.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system

Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system can interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff.

Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system.
▶ Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion of the front passenger seat.
The backrest of a forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting against the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.
▶ Always comply with the installation instructions from the child restraint system manufacturer.

When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( page 68).

Rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat If a rearward-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger air bag must be disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be continuously lit ( page 47).

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver airbag is enabled

If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.

The child could be struck by the airbag.

Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENA-

BLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the front passenger air bag will be enabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will not light up. The front passenger air bag may be deployed during an accident. If the front passenger air bag has this status, no rearward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat.

Forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat

If a forward-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger air bag may be automatically enabled or disabled. The status of the front passenger air bag depends on the child restraint system and the stature of the child.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp will either light up continuously or not light up

(→ page 47). Always observe the following information.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the child restraint system

If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and you position the co-driver seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could:

• come into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example
• be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

Always move the co-driver seat as far back as possible. In doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet.

If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the co-driver seat accordingly.

▶ Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

- Function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff ( page 47)

Notes for vehicles with rear air bag

If you are securing a child in a child restraint system on the left or right rear seat, you should switch off the rear air bag ( page 62).

You can disable or enable the rear air bags individually via the multimedia system ( page 50). You can determine the status of the rear air bag via the REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamp in the overhead control panel ( page 49).

Notes for vehicles with belt air bags

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to use of an unsuitable child restraint system

If you attach a child restraint system using a seat belt equipped with a belt air bag, the belt air bag may damage the child restraint system in the event of an accident or the belt air bag itself can be damaged.

Always secure a child restraint system with an integrated harness system with ISOFIX.
▶ Also secure Top Tether if present.
▶ Never secure a child restraint system with a seat belt equipped with a belt air bag.
Instead, mount the child restraint system e.g. on the front passenger seat.

If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the status of the front passenger air bag is correct for the current situation ( page 47).

Observe the information on the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shut off ( page 50).

Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children

Information on the benefit of a rearward-facing child restraint system

Transport a baby in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system only. It is also preferable to transport a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards.

Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.

Securing the child restraint system

Adjusting the seat correctly

When installing a child restraint system on the left or right rear seat, always observe the following:

Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

If the head restraint of the child restraint system cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for certain child restraint systems. Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

When installing an ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint system, also observe the following:

When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system.

72 Children in the vehicle - Securing the child restraint system

When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that it does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust it correctly.
The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.
Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint.

When installing a belt-secured child restraint system, also observe the following: When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so

that it does not touch the child restraint system.
Also secure Top Tether if present ( page 75).
When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that it does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust it correctly.
The backrest of a forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting against the seat backrest of the rear seat.
The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly.

Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint.
Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, always observe the following when installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat:

Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( page 68).
When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated child seat belt: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, immediately replace the head restraint and adjust correctly.
The backrest of a forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat.

The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction.
Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint.
▶ Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system.
Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt outlet and, where possible, downwards to the child restraint system.
Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment.
Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest

position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position.
Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.
Activating or deactivating the special seat belt retractor of the seat belt

WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion

If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the special seat belt retractor is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and cannot be immediately closed again.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.

▶ Activate the special seat belt retractor again and correctly secure the child restraint system.

When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured.

The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a child seat safety feature:

• Front passenger seat
• Rear seats

Installing a child restraint system

When installing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions as well as the information in this Operator's Manual.
▶ Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet.
▶ Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:

▶ Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. When the special seat belt retractor is activated, you should hear a ratcheting sound.

74 Children in the vehicle - Securing the child restraint system

Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly.

Deactivating the special seat belt retractor:

Press the release button of the seat belt buckle.

Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to the seat belt outlet.

Installing an ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint system

A WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is exceeded.

Too much load may be placed on the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) or iSize child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example.

If the child is secured in a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with integrated seat belt, the total mass of the child and child restraint system must not exceed 73 lb (33 kg).

Always comply with the information about the mass of the child:

- in the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used

- on a label on the child restraint system, if available

Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with.

When you install a child restraint system, observe the following:

√ Always observe the correct use and suitability of the seats for attaching a child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings

Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint system has engaged both securing rings in the vehicle correctly.

NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat during installation of the child restraint system

▶ Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped.

▶ Vehicles with reclining rear seat: tilt the back-rest of the reclining rear seat back slightly before the ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint system is installed.
▶ Fold upholstered lining ① up.
▶ Pull the tab on upholstered lining ① upwards and position it on the support surface. Upholstered lining ① remains folded up.
Attach the ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint system to both securing rings ② in the vehicle.
To close, fold upholstered lining ① upwards.
Lift the tab from the support surface and slide it back into the upholstery slot between the seat backrest and seat cushion. Close the upholstery flap.
▶ Vehicles with a reclining rear seat: return the reclining rear seat backrest to an upright position. The backrest of the reclining rear seat must be in contact with the child restraint system.

Fastening a Top Tether

WARNING Risk of injury or death from adjusting the seat after installing a child restraint system

Vehicles with electrically adjustable rear bench seats:

The following may occur:

• The Top Tether belt may sit either too loose or too tight
• The child restraint system may be loose, incorrectly positioned or damaged and then not perform its intended protective function.
  ▶ Never adjust the seat after the child restraint system has been installed.

If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX (left

and right rear seats) or the seat belt (all rear seats) and the vehicle.

① Canada: Only the two outer Top Tether anchorages are available.

Remove cover ② of Top Tether anchorage ③.
Install the ISOFIX/LATCH or belt-secured child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so,

comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Guide Top Tether belt ④ under head restraint ① between the two head restraint bars.
Hook Top Tether hook ⑤ of Top Tether belt ④ into Top Tether anchorage ③ without twisting.
Tension Top Tether belt ④. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt

The seat belts on the following seats are equipped with a special seat belt retractor:

• Front passenger seat
• Rear seats

When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured.

For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat.
Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the seat.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of

the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system.

The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt outlet and, where possible, downwards to the child restraint system.

When installing on the rear seat: also secure Top Tether if present.
When installing on the front passenger seat: if necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.

Child safety locks

Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

- open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.

• get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
• operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example:

• releasing the parking brake.

• changing the gearbox position.

- starting the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users
  • Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic
• Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example

▶ Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are traveling in the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.

There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the side windows in the rear passenger compartment.

The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.

Press the lever in direction ① (activate) or ② (deactivate).
Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly.

Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows

To activate/deactivate: press button 2. The rear side window can be opened or closed as follows:

- Indicator lamp ① is lit: via the switch on the driver's door

- Indicator lamp ① is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door

When the child safety lock is activated, the controls in the rear passenger compartment are disabled for:

• the rear side windows
- the adjustment of the front passenger seat from the rear passenger compartment
• the rear seat belt extender
• the roller sunblinds:
of the rear side windows
of the rear window
- in the roof

Occupant presence reminder

Function of the occupant presence reminder

The occupant presence reminder can help to remind you about a child who may have been forgotten in the rear passenger compartment of the vehicle. It activates and deactivates automatically when the rear door is open for an extended period

of time and a child, which the system presumes to be present, could enter or exit the vehicle.

When the vehicle is switched off, the Do Not Leave People or Animals in the Vehicle message will appear on the driver's display if the system has previously activated automatically.

You can permanently deactivate the function in the multimedia system ( page 78). When the system is deactivated, the indicator lamp in the driver's display lights up.

Activating or deactivating the occupant presence reminder in the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Vehicle

▶ Occupant Protection

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

SmartKey

Overview of key functions

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example:

• releasing the parking brake.
• changing the gearbox position.
• starting the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic fields

Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields.

Vehicle key with panic alarm

① Opens/closes the trunk lid
② Unlocks (with embossed surface)
3 Locking

Indicator lamp
5 Panic alarm
If indicator lamp ④ does not light up after pressing the 🔒 or 🔒 button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible.
Replace the key battery ( page 81).
The key locks and unlocks the following components:

- Doors

- Fuel filler flap

- Trunk lid

If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti-theft protection is armed again.

Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the key's functionality.

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal

Multimedia system:

Settings

Vehicle

pen/Close

tivate or deactivate the Acoustic Lock.

Activating/deactivating the panic alarm

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched off.

Close-up of a black computer mouse with a circular button labeled '1' pointing to the interior (no text or symbols on the mouse itself)

To activate: press button ⏻ for approximately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered.
To deactivate: briefly press button ① again.

or

Press the start/stop button.

A key belonging to the vehicle must be detected in the vehicle.

Changing the unlocking settings

Possible unlocking functions of the key:

• Central unlocking
• Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap
  To switch between settings: press the 🔒 and 🔒 buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice.

Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected:

- To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the button twice.

- Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked.

Deactivating the function of the SmartKey

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the SmartKey, the KEYLESS-GO functions will also be deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO will then no longer be possible with that particular SmartKey. Activate the function of the SmartKey so that all its functions will again be available.

You can also deactivate the function of the SmartKey to reduce the energy consumption of the SmartKey if you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time.

Press and hold the 🔊 button on the Smart-Key.
With the button pressed, immediately press the SmartKey button twice in quick succession. The indicator lamp on the SmartKey will light up once briefly and once for a long time.

The following options for re-activating the SmartKey are available:

• Press any button on the SmartKey.
• Start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space in the center console (→ page 194).

Removing/inserting the mechanical key
Removing the mechanical key

Press release button ①. Emergency key ② is pushed out slightly.

Fully remove mechanical key ②.

Inserting the mechanical key

Insert mechanical key ② at marking ③ until it engages.
① You can use mechanical key ② to attach the key to a key ring.

Replacing the key battery

⚠️ DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed or otherwise

enter the body, severe internal burns can occur within two hours.

There is a risk of fatal injury.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children.

If the battery compartment cover and/or lid do not close securely, stop using the key and keep it away from children.

If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, seek immediate medical attention.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal pose of them with the household rub-

Opening and closing

Dispose of batteries in an

environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

Requirements

• You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Remove the emergency key ( page 81).

Press emergency key ② into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until cover ① opens. When doing so, do not hold cover ① closed.

Insert emergency key ② into the opening and lift up covering ③ and remove it.
Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery ④ falls out of the key.
Insert the new battery with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other impurities.
Insert the front tabs of covering ③ into the housing and then press on both sides to close it.
Make sure that covering ③ is completely closed.
Insert the front tabs of cover ① into the housing and then press until it is completely closed.
Insert the emergency key again ( page 81).

Problems with the key, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle. Possible causes are:

• The key battery is weak or discharged.
Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 79).
Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 81).
▶ Use the replacement key.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock ( page 91).
Have key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source

Possible causes if the function of the key is impaired:

• high voltage power lines
• mobile phones
  • electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)

• shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers
Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.

You have lost a key

Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well.

Doors

Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle ①.
To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door handle.
To open a rear door: pull the rear door handle again.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

To unlock: press 1 button.
To lock: press button ②. The red indicator lamp on button ② lights up once the vehicle is locked.
① The buttons are also on the front passenger and rear doors.

This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. The vehicle is not unlocked:

• if you have locked the vehicle using the key
- if you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Recessed door handles extend or retract

The door handles extend automatically:

• when you unlock the vehicle with the key
• when you touch one of the two outer sensor surfaces on the door handle (when the vehicle is unlocked)

The door handles retract automatically:

• when you lock the vehicle with the key
• when pulling away
  • after waiting for a time

To extend the door handle: touch outer sensor surface ① or ②.
If the vehicle has been locked automatically and another person wishes to get in: press the button on the driver's door to unlock the vehicle (→ page 84). The door handles will extend.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO

Requirements

• The key is outside the vehicle.

• The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m).
• The driver's door and the door on which the door handle is used are closed.

The door handles extend automatically:

• when a vehicle key is detected (the vehicle is then not yet unlocked)
• when you unlock the vehicle with the key
• when you touch one of the two outer sensor surfaces on the door handle (when the vehicle is unlocked)

The door handles retract automatically:

• when you lock the vehicle with the key
• when you touch one of the two outer sensor surfaces on the door handle to lock the vehicle
  • after convenience closing ( page 101)
• when pulling away

• after waiting for a time

NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid or a door

• When using an automatic car wash
• When using a high pressure cleaner
  ▶ Deactivate the function of the SmartKey in these situations.
  or
  Make sure that the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) (power washer) or 20 ft (6 m) (automatic car wash) away from the vehicle.

Observe the notes:

• on washing the vehicle in a car wash ( page 366)
• on using a power washer (→ page 368)

Unlocking the vehicle: With the door handle extended, touch the inside surface ① of the door handle.

When the vehicle is unlocked: To extend the door handle, touch sensor surface ② or ③.
When the vehicle is locked: To unlock, touch sensor surface ② or ③.
To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface ② or ③.
▶ Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor surface ③ for an extended period.

(i) Further information on convenience closing ( page.101).

Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting

You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Possible causes:

• The function of the SmartKey has been deactivated.
  • The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged.

Activate the function of the SmartKey ( page 80).

▶ Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 79).

Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary ( page 81).

▶ Use the replacement SmartKey.

Use the emergency key to lock or unlock ( page 91).

Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

There is interference from a powerful radio signal source

Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired:

• High voltage power lines
- Mobile phones
• Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
- Shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers

Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference.

Activating or deactivating the automatic locking feature

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle

▶ Open/Close

The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace.

▶ Activate or deactivate Automatic Door Lock. In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated:
• The vehicle is being towed or pushed.
- If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer.

Opening and closing the convenience doors in the rear

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when automatically closing the rear doors

Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the closing area.

Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area.
Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:
- Press the ☑ or ⏻ button on the key.
- Pull or press the pushbutton switch in the headliner.

• Push against the door or pull the door.
• Select the "Cancel process" display on the Comfort menu in the multimedia system.

NOTE Risk of accident during automatic opening and closing of the convenience doors in the rear

The visibility of your surroundings may be impaired.

▶ Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the range of movement of the convenience doors when they are opening and closing.
When opening the convenience doors, look out for low-lying objects and obstacles in their range of movement in particular.
When opening the convenience doors, look out for objects and obstacles in the side window areas in particular.

Opening or closing the convenience doors in the rear

The following functions are required to automatically open and close the convenience doors in the rear passenger compartment:

• KEYLESS-GO ( page 85)

• Power closing function ( page 90)
• Active Blind Spot Assist (→ page 255)

The convenience doors can then be opened and closed automatically.

If Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated or unavailable, the function of the convenience doors is still available.

The following options are available for opening or closing the convenience doors in the rear passenger compartment:

• The key (to open and close)
- The pushbutton switch in the headliner (to open and close)
- The outer door handles in the rear passenger compartment (only to close)

• Gesture mode (to close the rear doors from inside) (→ page 307)
  • The multimedia system (→ page 90)
  ① You cannot open a rear door from inside the vehicle if it is secured by the child safety lock. Further information on the child safety lock for the rear doors (→ page 76).

Special features of the convenience doors in the rear passenger compartment:

• If, when closing, the rear door has reached the first detent position, the power closing function ( page 90) will automatically draw the rear door into the lock.
• If the rear doors are closed using the convenience function, they are not automatically locked.

To open with the key: press and hold the button on the key.

In the multimedia system you can set whether the left rear door, the right rear door or no rear door opens when you press the button on the key (→ page 90).

If no rear door opens, the convenience opening function is carried out when the button is pressed. The convenience opening function opens, forexample, the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof. Further information on convenience opening ( page 100).

To close with the key: Press and hold the key button 🙏 until the door starts to close. All open rear doors close.
▶ Convenience closing with the key: Press and hold the key button [💡]. All open rear doors, side windows, and the panoramic sliding sunroof close.
i Press the 🔊 button on the key again to lock the vehicle.

To open with the pushbutton switch in the headliner: press button ①. The vehicle is unlocked.
Press and hold button ① again. The door will open.
To manually close with the pushbutton switch in the headliner: pull button ① to the pressure point.

To automatically close with the pushbutton switch in the headliner: pull button ① past the pressure point.

Side view of a car with a highlighted door panel and a numbered inset showing the door handle (no text or symbols present)

To close from outside with the door handle: touch recessed sensor surface Ⓞ on the door handle.

Blockage detection when the rear doors are opened

If an obstacle obstructs a rear door during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the rear door. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

When you open the rear doors from the inside: the exit warning of Active Blind Spot Assist is used as an additional safeguard. If an obstacle is detected, the convenience function is deactivated and the moving rear door will be stopped.

Manually open a rear door stopped in an intermediate position.

WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning

The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.

▶ Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors

and make sure there is sufficient clearance.

The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants.

① Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ( page 255).

Automatic reversing function when you close the rear doors

The rear doors are equipped with automatic block-age detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle stops a rear door during the automatic closing procedure, it will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

The reversing feature does not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
• at the end of the closing process

In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped.

Make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped, use one of the following options:

• Press the ☐ or ⏻ button on the key.
• Pull or press the pushbutton switch in the headliner.
• Push against the door or pull the door.
• Select the "Cancel process" display on the Comfort menu in the multimedia system.

Setting Comfort Doors

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Vehicle ▶ Comfort

▶ Activate or deactivate Comfort Doors.

Operating Comfort Doors

Select
▶ Select Open door control. The menu for operating the doors will open. You can open and close the doors by moving the controls on the central display.
Select Cancel Process. The procedure will be interrupted and the door will remain in the position it has reached.
Press and hold Close All. All doors will close simultaneously.
The Comfort Doors can also be closed using the MBUX Interior Assistant. Further information on operating the Comfort Doors.
The Comfort Doors can also be opened and closed via the Rear Seat Entertainment System.

Further information on operating the Comfort Doors via the Rear Seat Entertainment System: .

Setting the SmartKey function for the Comfort Doors

Select
Select Key assignment. Convenience Opening for Windows, opening the Right Rear Door and opening the Left Rear Door can be set separately for operation with the SmartKey.

Power closing function

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically

Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries.

▶ Ensure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area.

▶ Automatic closing of the doors can be canceled by pulling the outer or inner door handle.

If you push the door into the lock to the first detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock.

Automatic closing of the doors may be triggered if the vehicle is locked from the outside, or during pulling away.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emergency key

Unlocking a left-hand vehicle door with the mechanical key

If you unlock and open the driver's door with the emergency key, this triggers the burglar alarm system.

① If you unlock the driver's door with the emergency key, the trunk lid will not be unlocked.

Remove the emergency key ( page 81).

If the door handle is retracted:

Insert a flat, non-metallic object behind door handle ① from above and pry it slightly outward.
Reach behind door handle ① from below, pull it outward to the pressure point and hold it there.

If the door handle is extended:

Pull door handle ① outward to the pressure point and hold it there.
Insert the emergency key into the lock cylinder.
Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise to position 1.

Opening and closing

Forcefully pull door handle ① outward past the pressure point.
Turn the emergency key back to its starting position.
Remove the emergency key and release the door handle.

Locking the doors

Technical line drawing of a car interior with a highlighted component and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening Ⓞ on the door lock.
To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go.
To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key counter-clockwise as far as it will go.

If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside.

Trunk

Opening the trunk lid

DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

▶ Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid.

▶ Never drive with the trunk lid open.

NOTE Damage to the trunk lid by obstacles above the vehicle

The trunk lid swings upwards when it is opened.

Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

▶ Pull the trunk lid handle.

▶ Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper ( page 96).

Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing

Pull remote operating switch ① until the trunk lid opens.

or

Press and hold the 50 button on the key. If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open.

With the trunk lid opening height restriction activated, manually pull the stopped trunk lid upwards.

If an obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the trunk lid. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

Closing the trunk lid

WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.

Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

Notes on closing the trunk lid: your vehicle is equipped with automatic SmartKey Recognition. If a key belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle, the trunk lid will not be locked and will pop open again.

Note that the trunk lid will not be locked if the following situation occurs:

- You have locked the vehicle and close the trunk lid while a key belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle. and

- A second key belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehicle.

Automatic SmartKey Recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

Before locking, ensure that at least one key belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle.

To close the trunk lid: pull the trunk lid downwards using the handle recess and push it closed.
① Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing: if you lightly push the trunk lid closed, the power closing function will automatically pull the trunk lid into the lock.

Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid

Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the closing area.

Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area.
▶ Use one of the following options to stop the closing process:
- Press the 📄 button on the Smart-Key.
- Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
- Press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid.

- Pull the trunk lid handle.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper.

Pull the trunk lid handle. Release it as soon as it begins to close.
If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate position, push it downwards.
The trunk lid will continue to close.

Push remote operating switch ① until the trunk lid is fully closed.

Press closing button Ⓤ on the trunk lid.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

Press locking button ② on the trunk lid. If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the trunk lid will close and the vehicle will be locked.

With the trunk lid completely open, press and hold the ⚪ button on the key. The key must be in the vicinity of the vehicle.

Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS

With the trunk lid completely open, make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper ( page 96).

Trunk lid automatic reversing function

The trunk lid is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the automatic closing process, it will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

The reversing function will not react:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
• towards the end of the closing procedure

In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped.

▶ Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped, use one of the following options:
- Press the 📄 button on the Smart-Key.
- Press the remote operating switch on the driver's door.
- Press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid.
• Pull the trunk lid handle.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS function

Illustration of a person pushing a car with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or interrupt trunk lid movement by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper.

The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately.

Observe the notes when opening ( page 92) and closing ( page 93) the trunk lid.

i A warning tone sounds while the trunk lid is opening or closing.

WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system

The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system.

Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid or a door

• When using an automatic car wash
• When using a high pressure cleaner
  ▶ Deactivate the function of the SmartKey in these situations.
  or
  Make sure that the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) (power

washer) or 20 ft (6 m) (automatic car wash) away from the vehicle.

When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.

Observe the following notes:

• The key is behind the vehicle.
- Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the vehicle while performing the kicking movement.
- Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement.
- Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly.
- The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again.

Front view of a car with a circular logo and a blue arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols present)

① Detection range of the sensors

If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases:

• The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow.
• The kicking movement is made using a prosthetic leg.

The trunk lid could be opened or closed unintentionally, in the following situations:

• A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects.
• Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. the hose of a fuel dispenser, a charging cable or luggage
• Clamping straps, tarp or other coverings are pulled over the bumper.
• A protective mat with a length reaching over the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used.
  • The protective mat is not secured correctly.

Deactivate the function of the key ( page 80) or do not carry the key about your person in such situations.

Switching separate trunk locking on and off

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Vehicle

Locking Function

Switching separate trunk locking on

▶ Select Block Trunk Access.
Create a PIN.
▶ Confirm the PIN with OK.
Enter the PIN again and confirm it. The trunk will remain locked if you unlock the vehicle centrally.
If an accident has been detected, the trunk will unlock even if separate locking is switched on.

Switching separate trunk locking off

▶ Select Block Trunk Access.
Enter the PIN. If the PIN is correct, separate trunk locking will be switched off and the PIN deleted.

Resetting the PIN

If you have forgotten the PIN, you can switch off separate trunk locking with the emergency key.

▶ Select Block Trunk Access.

Confirm Forget PIN?

Unlock the trunk within three minutes with the emergency key. Separate trunk locking will be switched off and the PIN deleted.

Unlocking and opening the trunk from inside with the emergency release

Requirements

- The 12 V vehicle battery is connected and charged.

Press emergency release button ⓘ briefly.

Unlocking the trunk lid with the emergency key

Take the emergency key out of the SmartKey ( page 81).

Insert the emergency key into the trunk lock as far as it will go.

Line drawing of a car rear view with a highlighted section showing a circular component labeled 1 and 2 (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Turn the emergency key counter-clockwise from position 1 to position 2.

Turn the emergency key back to position 1 and remove it.

If you use the emergency key to unlock and open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered.

Activating/deactivating the trunk lid opening height restriction

Multimedia system:

Settings

ehicle

Other Functions

Activate or deactivate Opening Height Limter.

This function prevents the trunk lid from hitting a low garage ceiling, for example.

Side windows

Opening and closing the side windows

WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.

When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.

If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window

When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process.

When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows

Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended.

▶ Activate the child safety lock for the rear passenger compartment side windows.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Requirements

- The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on.

Closing
② Opening

The buttons on the driver's door take precedence.

To start automatic operation: press the button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it.
To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the ☐ button again.

When the vehicle is switched off, you can continue to operate the side windows.

This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened.

① Vehicles with electric sunblinds on the left and right rear doors: the buttons for the rear side windows also open and close the roller sunblinds ( page 107).

Automatic reversing function of the side windows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window
The reversing function does not react:
• To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.

- During resetting.

The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone becomes trapped, press the button to open the side window again.

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)

⚠ WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window

When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame.
When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window.

Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

Requirements

- The SmartKey is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.

Press and hold the 🔒 button on the Smart-Key.

The following functions will be performed:

• The vehicle will be unlocked.
- The side windows will be opened.
- The panoramic sliding sunroof will be opened.
- The driver's seat ventilation will be switched on

If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic sliding sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds will be opened first.
If the roller sunblinds of the rear doors are closed, the roller sunblinds will be opened first.

To interrupt convenience opening: release the button.
To continue convenience opening: press and hold the ☑ button again.

Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)

A WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing

When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof.

When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

Requirements

- The SmartKey is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.

Press and hold the Ⓐ button on the Smart-Key.
The following functions will be performed:
• The vehicle will be locked.
- The side windows will be closed.
- The panoramic sliding sunroof will be closed.
To interrupt convenience closing: release the button.
To continue convenience closing: press and hold the Ⓐ button again.
① Convenience closing also functions with KEY-LESS-GO ( page 85).

Resolving problems with the side windows

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated

If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The

reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped.

▶ Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window.

A side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide.
Adjust the side windows.

Adjusting the side windows

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately:

Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately:

Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening feature.

Possible causes are:

• The key battery is weak or discharged.
Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 79).
Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 81).

Sliding sunroof

Opening and closing the sliding sunroof

① The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.

A WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement.

During the opening and closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the sliding sunroof.
If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately.
or ▶ Touch the control panel during automatic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped.
WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by children

Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed

Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof.

During the opening or closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement.
If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately.

or

▶ Touch the control panel during automatic operation.
The opening/closing process will be stopped.

NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice
Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction.
Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice.

NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects

Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals.

Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof.

The sliding sunroof and the front roller sunblind are operated using control panel ①.

The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open.

To open: swipe backwards across control panel ① and hold it.

Opening and closing

To close: swipe forwards across control panel and hold it.
To raise or lower: press control panel briefly.
To start automatic operation: swipe forwards or backwards across control panel ①.
To cancel automatic operation: press control panel ① again. The opening/closing process will be stopped.

Operating the rear roller sunblind from the front

To open or close: press button ①.
To stop: press button ① again.

If you stop the opening or closing process, the roller sunblind will first be closed again when the process is resumed.

Operating the rear roller sunblind from the rear passenger compartment

To open/close manually: push or pull button to the point of resistance and hold it until the roller sunblind has reached the desired position.
To open/close fully: push or pull button ① beyond the point of resistance and release it.

Automatic reversing function of the sliding sun-roof

If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

The reversing function will not react:

• To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
• Towards the end of the closing procedure.
- During resetting.
During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately.

or

▶ Touch the control panel during automatic closing.

The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic reversing function of the roller sun-blinds

If an obstacle obstructs a roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness.

When closing the roller sunblinds, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers.
When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement.

If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately.
or
▶ Touch the control panel during automatic closing.

The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof

① The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.

Rain closing function when driving

Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: if it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion.

Automatic lowering function

Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: if the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof

At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear.

Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion.
If someone becomes trapped, touch the control panel.

Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again

If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof will close with increased or maximum force.

There is a risk of becoming trapped or even of fatal injuries!

Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately.

or

▶ Touch the control panel during automatic closing.

The closing process will be stopped.

The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

① The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly:

Immediately after automatic reversing, swipe forwards across the control panel ( page 102) and hold it until the sliding sun-roof is closed.

The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly:

▶ Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force.

The sliding sunroof or the front roller sunblind is not operating smoothly.

Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun blind.

Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-blind

Swipe forwards across the control panel ( page 102) and hold it repeatedly until the sliding sunroof is completely closed.
Swipe across the control panel and hold it for another second.
Swipe across and hold the control panel until the front roller sunblind is fully closed.
Swipe across the control panel and hold it for another second.
Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.

The rear roller sunblind is not operating smoothly.

Reset the rear roller sunblind.

Resetting the rear roller sunblind

Pull and hold button ① repeatedly until the rear roller sunblind is fully closed.
▶ Pull button ① for another second.

Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the rear roller sunblind.

Roller sun blinds

Extending or retracting the roller sunblinds on the rear side windows

⚠ WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind

Body parts could become trapped in the sweep of the roller sunblind when it is being extended or retracted.

Make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sunblind when it is being extended or retracted.

If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button in the opposite direction.

The opening or closing process will briefly be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position.

NOTE Damage caused by objects

Objects can cause the roller sunblind to malfunction.

▶ Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely.

The roller sunblinds for the rear side windows can be operated with the buttons for the side windows.

① Rear left side window/roller sunblind
② Rear right side window/roller sunblind
To close fully: pull the corresponding button when the side window is closed or is in the process of closing.
To open fully: press the corresponding button.

Extending or retracting the rear window roller sun-blind

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind

Body parts may become trapped in the roller sunblind's range of movement.

▶ Ensure there are no body parts in the range of movement.
If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button again.

The opening or closing process will briefly be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position.

Extending or retracting from the driver's seat

NOTE Damage caused by objects

Objects can cause the roller sunblind to malfunction.
Do not place any objects on the rear shelf.

▶ Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely.

Press button 1.

Extending or retracting from the rear passenger compartment

NOTE Damage caused by objects

Objects can cause the roller sunblind to malfunction.

Do not place any objects on the rear shelf.
▶ Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely.

To extend: pull switch ①.
To retract: press switch ①.

When the child safety lock for the rear side windows is activated, switch ① cannot be operated.

Anti-theft protection

Function of the immobilizer

The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key.

The immobilizer is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched off and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the vehicle if a valid key has been left inside the vehicle.

In the event the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz service center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

110 Opening and closing

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

Function of the ATA system

If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations:

• When a door is opened
• When the trunk lid is opened
• When the hood is opened
• When interior protection is triggered (→ page 111)
• When the tow-away alarm is triggered (→ page 110)

The ATA system is armed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situations:

• after locking the vehicle with the key
• after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Indicator lamp ① flashes when the ATA system is armed.

The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations:

• After you unlock the vehicle with the key
• After you unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

• After you press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (→ page 194)

Deactivating the ATA

Press the ☑, ⏻ or ⚪ button on the key.

or

Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 194)

Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO

With the key outside the vehicle, touch the inner surface of the door handle.

Function of the tow-away alarm

① This function may not be available in all countries.

An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while the tow-away alarm is armed.

The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after approximately 60 seconds:

• after locking the vehicle with the key
• after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

The tow-away alarm is armed only when the following components are closed:

• Doors
• Trunk lid

The tow-away alarm is automatically deactivated:

• after pressing the ☑ or ☑ button on the key
• after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( page 194)
  • after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
• when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle ( page 221).

Arming/deactivating tow-away alarm

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle
▶ Opening/closing ▶ Vehicle Protection

Arm or deactivate Tow-away Protection.

Tow-away alarm is armed again in the following cases:

• The vehicle is unlocked again.
• A door is opened.
• The vehicle is locked again.

Function of interior protection

(i) This function may not be available in all countries.

When interior protection is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior.

Interior protection is armed automatically after approximately ten seconds:

• after locking the vehicle with the key
• after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Interior protection is armed only when the following components are closed:

• Doors
• Trunk lid

Interior protection is automatically deactivated:

• after pressing the ☑ or ☑ button on the key
• after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment (→ page 194)
  • after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
• when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

The following situations can lead to a false alarm:

• when there are moving objects such as mascots in the vehicle interior
• if a side window is open
• if the panoramic sunroof is open

112 Opening and closing

Arming/deactivating interior protection

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Vehicle
▶ Opening/closing ▶ Vehicle Protection

Arm or deactivate Interior Motion Sensor.

Interior protection is armed again in the following cases:

• The vehicle is unlocked again.
- A door is opened.
• The vehicle is locked again.

Notes on the correct driver's seat position

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

Ensure the following when adjusting steering wheel ①, seat belt ② and driver's seat ③:

• You are sitting as far away from the driver's air bag as possible, taking the following points into consideration:
  • You are sitting in an upright position
• Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion
• Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly

• The back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint

• You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent
  • You can move your legs freely

• You can see all the displays on the driver's display clearly
• You have a good overview of the traffic conditions
• Observe the notes on correctly fastening the seat belt (→ page 44).

Notes on grab handles

WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles

If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries.

Use the grab handles only to stabilize the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.

Seats

Adjusting the front seat electrically

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children

Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched off.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat

When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail.

When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" and "Children in the vehicle".

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion

Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly

If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured.

Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped.

While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints

If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Adjust the head restraint position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat-belt and become injured.

Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey.
Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder.

WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles

If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries.

▶ Use the grab handles only to stabilize the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.

WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat

Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff or damage the system.

Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.
When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat.

! NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back

The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back.

When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.

The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feedback on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat.

116 Seats and stowing

graph TD
    A["①"] --> B["②"]
    B --> C["③"]
    C --> D["④"]
    D --> E["⑤"]
    E --> F["⑥"]
    F --> G["⑦"]
    G --> H["⑧"]
    H --> I["⑨"]
    I --> J["⑩"]

Head restraint fore-and-aft position (vehicles with an EASY ADJUST luxury head restraint)
2 Head restraint height
3 Seat height
4 Seat cushion inclination
⑤ Seat cushion length
6 Seat fore-and-aft position
7 Seat backrest inclination

Save the settings with the memory function ( page 137).
The head restraint height will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-aft position.
① Vehicles with EASY ADJUST luxury head restraints: The fore-and-aft position of the head restraint will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the backrest angle.

Adjusting the front passenger seat electrically from the driver's seat

You can call up the following functions for the front passenger seat:

• Seat adjustment
• Seat heating
• Seat ventilation
• Memory function

To select the front passenger seat: press button 1.
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.
Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the driver's side door operating unit.

Adjusting the front passenger seat electrically from the rear passenger compartment

① Selects the front passenger seat
2 Head restraint fore-and-aft position
3 Head restraint height
④ Seat backrest inclination
5 Seat height

6 Front passenger seat footrest
⑦ Seat fore-and-aft position

The footrest can be adjusted only when one of the following conditions has been fulfilled:

• The front passenger seat has moved to the front range.
• The front passenger seat is in the position for chauffeur mode.

Adjust the reclining rear seat ( page 118).

To select the front passenger seat: press button ①.
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.

Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door operating unit in the rear passenger compartment.

① You can use the rear passenger compartment child safety lock to disable this function ( page 78).

118 Seats and stowing

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

1 Higher
② Softer
② Lower
④ Firmer
Use buttons ① to ④ to adjust the contour of the backrest.

Adjusting reclining rear seats electrically

The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feedback on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat. The reclining rear seats are on the driver's and front passenger sides.

① Fore-and-aft position of the head restraint (vehicles with active multicontour seat)
2 Head restraint height
3 Seat backrest inclination
Combined seat cushion inclination and length
5 Fore-and-aft position of the leg rest
6 Angle of the leg rest

Save the settings with the memory function ( page 138).
① The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If this is the case, fold up the leg rest and engage it.
The vehicle also has a footrest. This is located on the lower part of the front passenger seat backrest ( page 122).

Setting the fully reclined position

Interior view of a car with a digital display showing a numbered icon (no text or symbols on the main subject)

To set the fully reclined position: press button 1.

• The rear seat will move into the fully reclined position.

• The front passenger seat will move into the position for chauffeur mode.

• The footrest will move out from under the front passenger seat.
  • If available, the leg rest will rise.

Interior view of a car with a digital display showing a numbered callout (no text or symbols on the device)

To restore the standard seat settings: press button ⓘ.
① You can use the rear passenger compartment child safety lock to disable this function ( page 78).

The leg rest will fold down if overloaded. If this is the case, fold up the leg rest and engage it.

Chauffeur mode

Information on chauffeur mode

WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints

If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

A WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat

Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff or damage the system.

Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat.

When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat.

NOTE Damage to objects in the luggage net of the front passenger footwell when adjusting the front passenger seat to the chauffeur position

Objects in the luggage net in the front passenger footwell can become damaged when the front passenger seat is adjusted to the chauffeur position.

Remove the objects from the luggage net.

NOTE Damage to the seats when moving the seats back

The seats may be damaged by objects when moving the seats back.

When moving the seats back, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats.

The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feedback on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat.

Observe the following:

- Adjust the front passenger seat for chauffeur mode before the journey

For chauffeur mode, the following settings are made for the front passenger seat:

• The seat is moved forwards

• The backrest is tilted forwards

• The head restraint is folded forwards

The front passenger seat will automatically move from the chauffeur position back into the normal position in the following situations:

• The front passenger seat is adjusted using the buttons in the door operating unit on the front passenger side
  • The front passenger seat belt is fastened
• An occupant is detected on the front passenger seat
• The front passenger seat backrest is adjusted rearwards.
• The front passenger seat is moved in the fore-and-aft direction out of the chauffeur area

Positioning the front passenger seat for chauffeur mode

Requirements

• The front passenger seat is not occupied.
- The front passenger seat belt is not inserted in the buckle.

① Selects the front passenger seat
② Adjusts the seat fore-and-aft position
To select the front passenger seat: press button ①. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.

122 Seats and stowing

Setting the chauffeur position

Push button 2 forwards and hold it in this position. The front passenger seat will move forward and stop at the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode.
Release button 2.
Push button ② forward and hold it again until the front passenger seat is in the position for chauffeur mode. The front passenger seat head restraint will fold forwards. The front passenger seat will move forward.
If the front passenger seat is already at the threshold to the area for chauffeur mode, the position for chauffeur mode will be set immediately.
Save the settings with the memory function ( page 138).
① You can use the rear passenger compartment child safety lock to disable this function ( page 78).

Using the footrest on the front passenger seat

Requirements:

• The front passenger seat has moved to the front range.
• The front passenger seat is in the position for chauffeur mode.

Using the footrest

The footrest is located on the lower part of the front passenger seat backrest.

Push button ① towards the rear.
The footrest will move out from under the front passenger seat.
▶ Push the extended footrest upwards with your foot until it releases.
Allow the footrest to lower. The footrest will position itself on the floor.

Storing the footrest

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a blue arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

▶ Push the footrest upwards with your foot until it engages.
Push button forwards. The footrest will retract underneath the front passenger seat.

■ Moving the front passenger seat into the normal position (chauffeur mode)

To select the front passenger seat: press button ①.
When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.

Setting the normal position

Push button ③ towards the rear and hold it in this position.
The front passenger seat will move to the
threshold of the area for chauffeur mode. The

124 Seats and stowing

head restraint on the front passenger side will be moved into the upright position.

The front passenger seat will then move further towards the rear.

or

Briefly push button ② towards the rear. The front passenger seat will move automatically to the threshold of the area for chauffeur mode. The head restraint on the front passenger side will be moved into the upright position.
(i) You can also set the normal position from the front passenger seat. To do so, press any button on the door operating unit on the front passenger side.
▶ Call up the settings with the memory function ( page 138).
① You can use the rear passenger compartment child safety lock to disable this function ( page 78).

Head restraints

Adjusting the front seat luxury head restraints manually

A WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints

If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards.
To move backwards: press release knob and push the head restraint backwards.
■ Attaching and removing the additional cushion of the front-seat luxury head restraint

Position head restraint ② as far forwards as possible.

To attach the additional cushion: open Velcro strip 4 on the rear of additional cushion 1.
Guide Velcro strip ④ between head restraint ② and strip ③.
Close Velcro strip 4.
To change the position of the additional cushion: move additional cushion ① up or down.
To remove the additional cushion: open Velcro strip ④ of additional cushion ①.
Remove additional cushion ①.

Lowering and positioning the rear seat head restraints electrically from the front compartment Multimedia system:

Tap on 📊. The outer head restraints will lower.

Tap on 📄 again. The outer head restraints will move into the last stored position.

Adjusting the outer luxury head restraints of the rear seats manually

Diagram of a car interior showing a black seat with a blue arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

To adjust the head restraint angle: pull or push the head restraint in the direction of arrow

■ Attaching and removing the additional cushion of the head restraint in the rear passenger compartment (individual seats)

Position head restraint ② as far forwards as possible.
To attach the additional cushion: open Velcro strip ④ on the rear of additional cushion ①.

Guide Velcro strip ④ between head restraint ② and strip ③.
Close Velcro strip 4.
To change the position of the additional cushion: move additional cushion ① up or down.
To remove additional cushion: open Velcro strip ④ of additional cushion ①.
Remove additional cushion ①.

Attaching a heated additional cushion In vehicles with electrically adjustable head restraints, you can heat the additional cushion.

Attach the additional cushion to the head restraint as described.
▶ Move the head restraint to the very top.

Close-up of a mechanical component with two blue-labeled parts (1 and 2) and connecting rods, no visible text or symbols.

Push press-studs ② on the additional strap into counterpieces ① on the head restraint.
Move the head restraint to the desired height.
To switch neck heating from the additional cushion on/off: make sure that press-studs ② on the additional strip are correctly pushed into counterpieces ① on the head restraint.
Ensure that the "Couple neck heating to seat heating" function is active in the multimedia system ( page 128).
Activate or deactivate the seat heating ( page 130).

Folding the center head restraint into position and folding it down manually (premium seats) The center head restraint has a usage position and a non-usage position. The usage position is the upright position in which the head restraint is locked; the non-usage position is the position in which the head restraint is folded downwards. When the center seat is used, the head restraint must be in the upright, locked usage position.

Interior view of a car showing a car seatbelt with a blue arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

To fold into position: pull the head restraint upwards until it engages.

Folding down

Diagram of car interior showing seatbelt and seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Press button 1.
▶ Fold down the head restraint completely.

Folding the center head restraint into position and folding it back manually

Line drawing of a car interior showing seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols)

To fold into position: pull the head restraint upwards until it engages.

Folding down

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and side arm, with no visible text or symbols

Press button 1.
▶ Fold down the head restraint completely.

The center head restraint has a usage position and a non-usage position. The usage position is the upright position in which the head restraint is locked; the non-usage position is the position in which the head restraint is folded downwards.

When the center seat is used, the head restraint must be in the upright, locked usage position.

Configuring the seat settings

Multimedia system:

Adjusting the air cushions

On the corresponding menu, adjust the air cushions for Lumbar, Shoulders or Side Bolsters.

Setting the seat heating balance

Select Heating Settings.
▶ Select Seat Heating Balance.
Adjust the heat distribution for the desired seat.
The seat heating balance can be set in the Seat Climate Control menu in the rear passenger compartment.

Coupling neck heat to seat heating

▶ Select Additional Neck Warmer.

Switch the function for the desired seat on or off. If the function is active, the neck heat of the additional cushion has been coupled to the seat heating.

Setting automatic seat adjustment

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile

Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process.

Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the adjustment process by:

a) Pressing the warning message on the central display.
or
b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped.

Multimedia system:

Comfort Seat

▶ Automatic Seat Positioning

Manually adjusting driver's seat and steering wheel position to body size

The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and steering wheel position on the basis of the driver's body size and sets this directly.

To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in.
▶ Set the size using the scale.
▶ Select Start Positioning.
The driver's seat and steering wheel position is adjusted to the body size that has been set.

① You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me user account for your user profile. By synchronizing the profiles in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect profiles, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about synchronizing user profiles.

If the driver's seat and steering wheel position calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be manually adapted at any time via the control buttons.

The outside mirrors are not set via this function. Instead, they have to be set manually via the operating switches.

Setting automatic adjustment of the lateral support (active multicontour seat)

Multimedia system:

Comfort Seat

▶ Select Dynamic Multicontour Seat.

With this function, the lateral support of the active multicontour seat is automatically adjusted to the driving and cornering dynamics of the vehicle.

▶ Select the desired setting.

Overview of massage programs

• Classic Massage: Relaxing back massage program.
• Mobilizing Massage: Mobilizing massage program with upward-moving relaxing waves. Can promote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain.
• Activating Massage: Activating massage program with upward-moving relaxing waves.
• Hot Relaxing Back: Based on hot stone massage, the program combines heat and massage. It starts by massaging the back. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area.

• Hot Relaxing Shoulders: Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area.

• Wave Massage: Regenerating massage program via soothing waves across the back and in the seat cushion.

• Deep Waves: Wave-like movements in the cushion can promote blood flow and metabolic processes in the lower back and legs.
• Deep Workout: Connect the Workout, Backrest to the Workout, Cushion. The vibrations in the cushion intensify the effectiveness of tensing and releasing muscles when you tense against the pressure point. This supports metabolic processes and blood flow in the buttocks and legs.
• Workout, Backrest and Workout, Cushion These programs require your cooperation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as you feel it to activate back, abdominal and leg muscles.
• Calf Massage (rear passenger compartment): calf massage using vibration. Can support metabolic processes and the flow of blood back to the heart.

- Wave Massage (rear passenger compartment): combines the vibration of the calf massage with the Classic Massage from the backrest in the rear passenger compartment.

Selecting a massage program for the front seats

Multimedia system:

Comfort Massage

▶ Select a massage program ( page 129).
Start the program for the desired seat ▶.
To set the massage intensity: switch Intensive on or off.
To stop the vitalizing movement: select ■.
① The availability of this function is dependent on the vehicle's equipment.
For the rear seats, the massage programs can be selected on the following devices (if available):

- On the rear displays

• On the MBUX rear tablet

Resetting seat settings

Multimedia system:

→ Comfort → Seat
Select Reset.
Select ☐ for the desired seat. The settings for the selected seat are reset.

Switching the seat heating on/off

WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot.

In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly.

NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on

When the seat heating is switched on, overheating may occur due to objects or documents placed on the seats, e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface.

Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on.

Requirements

• The power supply is switched on.

Press button ① repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched of

The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off.

132 Seats and stowing

If you switch the power supply off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous setting of the seat heating for the driver's seat will remain active.
① You can set the heat distribution of the heated sections among the seat cushions and seat backrests on the front and rear seats using the multimedia system ( page 128).
① Vehicles with the Warmth Comfort Package: you can adjust the heating of the center console and door armrests using the multimedia system ( page 132).

Setting the panel heating

Multimedia system:

When the seat heating is switched on, the armrests, the center panels of the doors and the center console can be heated.

Switch the function for the desired seats on or off.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Requirements:

• The power supply is switched on.

Press button ① repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off.

If you switch the power supply off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous seat ventilation setting for the driver's seat will remain active.

Steering wheel

Adjusting the steering wheel electrically

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion
• If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel

Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected.

To move up
② To move back
To move down
4 To move forward
Save the settings with the memory function ( page 137).

Switching the steering wheel heater on/off

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on.

To switch on: push the switch into position ①.

If indicator lamp ③ lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on.

To switch off: push the switch into position 2.

When you switch the vehicle off, the steering wheel heater will switch off.

Decoupling the steering wheel heater from the seat heating

Requirements

• The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on.
• The steering wheel heater is linked to the seat heating.

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Comfort ▶ Seat

▶ Heating Settings

The function is active by default and the steering wheel heater is automatically activated and deactivated when the seat heating is switched on and off.

Tap on Additional Steering Wheel Heating. The steering wheel heater will be decoupled from the seat heating.

Easy entry and exit feature

Using the easy entry and exit feature

A WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature

You could lose control of the vehicle.

▶ Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the easy entry and exit feature

You and other vehicle occupants, particularly children, may become trapped.

Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the range of movement of the steering wheel and driver's seat.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel:

Move the steering wheel adjustment lever. The adjustment process is stopped.

If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat:

Press the switch for seat adjustment. The adjustment process is stopped.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

Vehicles with memory function: You can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature

Children could become trapped if they activate the easy entry and exit feature, particularly when unattended.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

In order to use the easy entry and exit feature, the automatic seat adjustment function must have been switched on ( page 128).
When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel and driver's seat will move as follows:

• The steering wheel will move upwards.

- The driver's seat will move forward or backward to a seat position suitable for getting out of the vehicle.

This will occur in the following situations:

• You switch off the vehicle when the driver's door is open.
• You open the driver's door when the vehicle is switched off.

① The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go.

The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range.

The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last driving position in the following cases:

• You switch the power supply or the vehicle on when the driver's door is closed.
• You close the driver's door when the vehicle is switched on.

The last drive position will be saved when:

• You switch off the vehicle.
  • Vehicles with memory function: you call up the seat settings via the memory function.
• Vehicles with memory function: you save the seat settings via the memory function.

Vehicles with memory function: press one of the memory function position switches to stop the adjustment process.

Setting the easy entry and exit feature

Requirements

- The automatic seat adjustment has been activated ( page 128).

Multimedia system:

Settings

▶ Vehicle

▶ Easy Entry And Exit Feature

Select Steering Wheel & Seat, Steering Wheel Only or Off.
If you are using an individual user profile, this information is used for the easy entry and exit feature. This will cause the driver's seat and steering wheel to move into the correct position automatically.

Memory function

Function of the memory function

WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made.
Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory function
When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped.
During the adjusting process of the memory function, ensure that no body

parts are in the area of movement of the seat or the steering wheel.

If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjustment switch immediately. The adjustment process is stopped.

WARNING Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by children

When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped, especially if they are unsupervised.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched off.

Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function.

You can save the following settings for the front seat:

• Seat, backrest, head restraint position and contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region

• Vehicles with an active multicontour seat: Side bolsters of the seat backrest

• Shoulder of the seat backrest

• Contour of the seat backrest
  Dynamic function level

• Seat heating: distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and seat backrest

• Driver's side: steering wheel position and position of the outside mirrors on the driver's and front passenger sides
• Head-up display (depending on vehicle equipment)

Operating the memory function

Storing

Interior view of a car dashboard with a highlighted control panel showing three buttons (M, 1, 2, 3) and a small inset image of the dashboard area.

Set the front seat, the steering wheel, the head-up display and the outside mirror to the desired position.
Press the M button and then release it.

Press one of the preset position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. An acoustic signal will sound. The settings are stored.
To call up: press the preset position button 1, 2 or 3. The seat will be moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the front seat, outside mirror, head-up display and steering column will continue to move into the stored position automatically.

Memory function in the rear passenger compartment

Function of the memory function in the rear passenger compartment

Operating the rear seat

Rear seat settings for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function in the rear passenger compartment.

You can save the following settings for the rear seat:

• Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint
• Vehicles with active multicontour seats: the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest as well as the contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region
• Seat heating: distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and seat backrest

Operating the front passenger seat and rear seat Front passenger seat settings and rear seat settings for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function in the rear passenger compartment.

You can save the following settings for the front passenger seat:

- Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint

You can save the following settings for the rear seat:

- Position of the seat, backrest and head restraint

• Vehicles with active multicontour seats: the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest as well as the contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region
- Seat heating: distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and seat backrest

The following settings are also stored to a memory position, if the indicator lamp in the button lights up:

• Position of the footrest of the front passenger seat, if available
  • Position of the screen, if available

Using the preset position buttons, you always store the current setting of each seat.

Operating the rear seat via the memory function in the rear passenger compartment

Storing

Press button ①. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp does not light up.
Adjust the rear seat using the buttons on the door control panel ( page 118).

Line drawing of a car interior showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

Press the M button and then release it.
Press one of the preset position buttons 1 or 2 within three seconds. The settings are stored.
You cannot store any settings on the 📌 and 🏠 buttons for adjusting the reclined and standard positions.

Calling up

Press button ①. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp does not light up.
Press one of preset position buttons 1 or 2.

The seat is moved to the stored position. After you release the button, the rear seat continues to move into the stored position automatically.

Operating the front passenger seat and rear seats via the memory function in the rear passenger compartment

Storing

Press button ①. The rear seat is selected if the indicator lamp does not light up.

Seats and stowing

Adjust the rear seat using the buttons on the door control panel ( page 118).
Press button ①. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.
Adjust the front passenger seat using the buttons on the door control panel in the rear passenger compartment ( page 114).
Ensure that the indicator lamp in button lights up.

Line drawing of a car interior with dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

Press the M button and then release it.
Press one of the preset position buttons 1 or 2 within three seconds. The settings for the front passenger seat and the rear seat are stored in the selected preset position.
You cannot store any settings on the and buttons for adjusting the reclined and standard positions.

Calling up

Press button ①. When the indicator lamp lights up, the front passenger seat is selected.
Press one of preset position buttons 1 or 2.
The seat is moved to the stored position. After you release the button, the front seat and rear seat continue to move into the stored position automatically.
The preset positions in the area for chauffeur mode can only be set when the conditions for chauffeur mode are fulfilled ( page 120).
① You can use the rear passenger compartment child safety lock to disable this function (→ page 78).

Stowage areas

Notes on loading the vehicle

DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

▶ Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid.
▶ Never drive with the trunk lid open.

Objects in the deployment area of an air bag may prevent the air bag from functioning correctly. Observe the notes on the protection provided by the air bag.

Vehicles with rear air bag: Also observe the notes on the rear air bag.

WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

▶ Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around.
Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over.

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

▶ Always slow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.
Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

Observe the notes on the cup holders.

Vehicles with automatic front-passenger air bag shutoff: Objects trapped under the front-

passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front-passenger air bag shutoff or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff ( page 48).

NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight

When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight.

Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest.

A WARNING - Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving

The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving.

If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle.

Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary.

Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size.
▶ Close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot.

NOTE Damage to the cup holder

The cup holder can be damaged when folding back the rear armrest. When open, the cup holder can be damaged by body weight.

The rear armrest can only be folded back when the cup holder is closed.
Do not sit or support yourself on the cup holder when it is open.

NOTE Damage to the stowage compartment under the ashtray due to intense heat

The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it.

Make sure that the ashtray is fully engaged.

WARNING Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter

You can suffer burns if you touch the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter.

In addition, flammable materials can catch fire if:

• you drop the hot cigarette lighter.
• children e.g. hold the hot cigarette lighter to objects.
  ▶ Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
  Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of the reach of children.
  ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe and tailpipe trims

The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact

with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area.
▶ Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them.

The handling characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle:

• Do not exceed the permissible total mass or the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle (including load and occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the vehicle's B-pillar.
• The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests.
• Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible.

- Secure the load using the parcel net hooks. Distribute the load on the parcel net hooks evenly.

Notes on driving with a roof load

• Distribute the roof load and the load inside the vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 141).
• Drive attentively, and avoid abrupt starts, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.
• When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs E and C. These are designed to focus on stability ( page 205).
  For more information on stowage compartments and stowage areas, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual.

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior

Overview of the front stowage compartments

① Stowage spaces in the doors
Stowage and telephone compartment beneath the armrest with charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones, multimedia and USB ports as well as stowage space, e.g. for an MP3 player
3 Stowage compartment in the front center console, depending on vehicle equipment with cupholders, USB ports and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones
4 Stowage compartment in front of the central display of the multimedia system
5 Glove box

The rubber mat in the stowage compartment in front center console can be removed for cleaning with clean, lukewarm water. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior ( page 372).

Opening and closing the stowage compartment in the front center console

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.

Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.
▶ Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

To open: slide the cover of the stowage compartment in the front center console all the

way forwards in the direction of the arrow using handle ①.

To close: briefly push handle ① of the open cover of the stowage compartment in the front center console forwards. The cover will automatically close the stowage compartment in the front center console.
Opening and closing the stowage compartment in the front armrest

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets.
▶ Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey.
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

To open: press release catch ① downwards. The covers of the stowage compartment in front armrest ② will open automatically in the direction of the arrow.
To close: move the covers of the stowage compartment in front armrest ② inwards in the direction of the arrow. The stowage compartment in the front armrest is now closed.

Locking/unlocking the glove box

Turn the emergency key a quarter turn clockwise 2 (to lock) or counter-clockwise 1 (to unlock).

Folding the folding table out or in

WARNING Risk of injury when the folding table is folded out

Vehicle occupants may bump into the folding table and injure themselves.

▶ Use the folding table only when the vehicle is stationary.
Stow the folding table before each journey.

WARNING Risk of injury from the rear air bag when the folding table is folded out

When the rear air bag deploys objects on the folding table may be thrown in the direction of vehicle occupants.

When using the table, deactivate the rear air bag.
Stow the folding table before each journey.

NOTE Damage to the folding tables when moving the seats back

Open folding tables may be damaged when the seats are moved back.

Make sure that the folding tables are folded in when moving the front seats back.

NOTE Damage to objects when the folding tables are expanded or collapsed

Objects such as tablets and displays can be damaged when the folding tables are expanded or collapsed.
Make sure that the folding tables are expanded and collapsed properly.

Folding out

i Observe the notes on the rear air bag.

Opening the stowage compartment in center console ① of the rear passenger compartment.
Pull folding table ② up and forwards by handle recess ③ and swing it outwards.
▶ Fold the table panels apart.
The table panels can be rotated forwards or backwards to bring them into a comfortable position for the vehicle occupants in the rear passenger compartment.
To fold in: fold the table panels together and swing in the folding table.

Removing the handset from the rear passenger compartment stowage compartment

Line drawing of a car interior showing the left side of the seat with a blue circular indicator labeled '1' (no text or symbols beyond the label)

Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear seats

▶ Fold down the rear armrest.
Open the stowage compartment in the rear armrest.
Tap handset ①. Handset ① will rise.
Remove handset ①.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a highlighted seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

Vehicles with individual rear seats

Open the stowage box in the rear passenger compartment backrest.
Press button 1.
Remove the handset.

Overview of the parcel net hooks

Observe the following notes:

• Secure the load using the parcel net hooks.
• Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load. These are intended only as anti-slip protection for light loads.
• Do not route tie downs across sharp edges or corners.
• Pad sharp edges for protection.

Depending on the equipment installed, the trunk contains up to four parcel net hooks.

Diagram of a car trunk with a highlighted 3D object and control buttons, showing no text or symbols.

① Parcel net hooks

Vehicles with individual rear seats Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear seats

▶ Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats: Fold down the rear armrest.
Pull handle ① and fold down cover ②. The stowage box in the rear passenger compartment backrest will be opened.

Opening the through-loading feature in the rear passenger compartment

Requirements:

• The loading flap is unlocked (→ page 149).

Vehicles with individual rear seats Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer rear seats

Slide release catch ② in the handle recess of loading flap ① upwards. Loading flap ① will be unlocked.
Push loading flap ① with release catch ② up as far back as possible until the flap locks in the highest position.
The through-loading feature in the rear passenger compartment will be opened.

If the through-loading feature is to be used as a stowage compartment again:

Fold down loading flap Ⓞ and lock it in the trunk (→ page 149).

Locking the through-loading feature in the trunk

Requirements

• The refrigerator box is removed.

Line drawing of a car backrest with a numbered component on the side (no text or symbols)

Slide the release catch on loading flap ⓘ in the trunk to the right. The loading flap is locked.

Using the bag hooks

WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects

The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage.

Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants.

▶ Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
▶ Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks.

▶ Pull the bag hook ② down by the tab ①.
i Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 141).

EASY-PACK trunk box

Adjusting the height of the EASY-PACK trunk box to any position

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped and injured when raising the floor

Your hands may become trapped on the frame of the EASY-PACK trunk box and objects may be thrown upwards.

▶ Ensure that your hands are not in the range of movement of the floor.
If someone becomes trapped, carefully push the center of the floor downward.
Remove all objects from the floor before raising it.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when pressing the EASY-PACK trunk box in

Your hands may become trapped when you are pressing the trunk box into the retracted position. Children, in particular, may injure themselves when doing so.

▶ Ensure that your hands are not in the range of movement of the EASY-PACK trunk box.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

NOTE Damage to the extended EASY-PACK trunk box

The EASY-PACK trunk box may be damaged when it is extended.

Do not place any objects on or press down on the EASY-PACK trunk box frame.

Do not close the trunk lid when the EASY-PACK trunk box is extended.

NOTE Damage to the EASY-PACK trunk box by objects

Objects that are sharp-edged, pointed, fragile, rounded or heavy and objects that roll can

damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and be thrown out.

Do not transport objects that are sharp-edged, pointed, rounded or fragile and objects that roll in the EASY-PACK trunk box.
▶ Always stow and secure such objects outside of the box in the trunk.
▶ Always observe the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box.
Do not use the EASY-PACK trunk box when the rear seats are folded forwards.

The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). To prevent the box from being overloaded, the box floor will lower onto the trunk floor when the load reaches approximately 11 lbs (5 kg).

To remove: pull handle ② on the box.
To increase the load capacity: push the center of floor ① downwards to the desired position and box size.
To reduce the load capacity: press button 3.
To stow: push the box in completely using handle ② until it locks in place.

152 Seats and stowing

① Observe the notes on cleaning the EASY-PACK trunk box (→ page 372).

Installing and removing the EASY-PACK trunk box

Installing

▶ Turn rotating catches ⑥ outward.
Insert retainers ③ of box ① into holes ②.
Raise box ① in the direction of the arrow and press hooks ⑤ into the anchorages of rear passenger compartment shelf ④.
Turn rotating catches 6 inward.

Removing

▶ Turn rotating catches ⑥ outward.
▶ Lower box ① in the direction of the arrow and pull it out of the anchorages on the rear passenger compartment shelf.
Pull box ① back out of the openings in the direction of the arrow.

Cup holder

Switching the cooling or heating function for the temperature-controlled cup holder on or off

When the heating function is used, the metal insert of the cup holder is heated. For this reason, you must not reach into the cup holder insert.

When placing champagne flutes in the holders in the front stowage compartments of the rear center console, do not close the covers of the front stowage compartments because the champagne flutes may tip over.

When placing glasses in the temperature-controlled cup holder, do not close the cover of the front stowage compartment in the rear center console because the glasses may tip over.

Front stowage compartments in the rear center console with temperature-controlled cup holders and holder for champagne flutes (example)

① Temperature-controlled cup holder
Button to switch the temperature-controlled cup holder on or off
③ Holder for champagne flutes

To switch on: press button ② until the blue (keep cool) or red (keep warm) indicator lamp on the button lights up.
To switch off: press button ② until the indicator lamp on the button goes out.

154 Seats and stowing

i Clean the removable rubber mat only with clean, lukewarm water and the temperature-controlled cup holder ① only with a soft cloth.

Placing champagne flutes in the holders in the front storage compartments of the rear center console

To place: put the champagne flutes into holders ③ until they slot into place.
To remove: pull the champagne flutes upwards out of holders ③.

Sockets

Using the 12 V socket

Requirements:

- Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A).

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are 12 V sockets in various places in the vehicle, such as the center console, the glove box and the trunk.

▶ Fold up the socket cover.

▶ Insert the plug of the device.

If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open.

USB port in the rear passenger compartment

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle will have the following USB ports in the rear passenger compartment:

• In vehicles with individual rear seats: in the stowage compartment of the rear passenger compartment center console.
• In vehicles with electrically adjustable rear outer seats: in the electronics compartment in the rear passenger compartment center console.
• In vehicles with electrically adjustable rear outer seats: in the stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest.

These USB ports in the rear passenger compartment can be used to charge a mobile end device.

You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charging cable. Depending on the vehicle equipment, devices can be charged with up to 20 V (5 A) when the vehicle is switched on.

Refrigerator box

Using the refrigerator box

WARNING Risk of fire due to a covered vent grille on the refrigerator box

If you cover the vent grille for the refrigerator box, it may overheat.

Always make sure that the vent grille is not covered.

The vent grille for the refrigerator box is in the trunk.

The refrigerator box can bear a maximum load of 7.7 lb (3.5 kg).

The upper compartment of the refrigerator box can accommodate, for example, plastic bottles with a maximum capacity of 17 fl. oz. (0.5 liters)

and cans with a capacity of up to 11 fl. oz. (0.33 liters)

If you do not need to use the refrigerator box for an extended period, you should switch it off, defrost it and clean it. After doing so, leave the lid open for a time.

More condensation may occur during heavy use. Cleaning may be required.

The refrigerator box will reduce its cooling capacity or switch off in the following cases:

• Too many electrical consumers are turned on.
• The starter battery is not sufficiently charged.

If this is the case, the indicator lamps will flash on the button for switching the refrigerator box on and off. The cooling function will automatically switch back on as soon as there is sufficient voltage.

Example: vehicles with individual rear seats

▶ Vehicles with electrically adjustable outer seats: fold down the rear passenger compartment armrest.
Pull handle ① on stowage box and fold down cover ② of the stowage box.

Example: vehicles with individual rear seats

To open: pull the handle on refrigerator box and fold down the cover of the refrigerator box.
To switch on: press button ② repeatedly until an indicator lamp (low cooling) lights up or two indicator lamps (high cooling) light up.

Seats and stowing

To switch off: press button ② repeatedly until both indicator lamps go out.

Removing or installing the refrigerator box

Installing

Remove cover cap 1

Open loading flap ① in the rear passenger compartment until the loading flap locks in the highest position (→ page 148). Pull up and hold handle ⑦. The connection to refrigerator box ④ is unlocked.

Slide the refrigerator box with handle ⑦ up into the open through-loading feature. Connection ④ and the electrical contacts of refrigerator box ⑤ are inserted into sockets ⑤ and ⑥ of the through-loading feature. Once the refrigerator box has been connected in the vehicle, push down handle ⑦. The refrigerator box is locked.

Removing

▶ Pull up and hold handle ⑦. ▶ Pull the refrigerator box with handle ⑦ up out of sockets ⑤ and ⑥ of the though-loading compartment. Connection ④ and the electrical contacts of refrigerator box ③ are separated from sockets ⑤ and ⑥ of the through-loading feature.

Opening and closing the stowage compartment of the refrigerator box in the trunk

Interior view of a vehicle showing a car trunk with a blue arrow pointing to a component, no text or symbols present.

To open: pull the stowage compartment in refrigerator box ① out by the handle backwards in the direction of the arrow. Stowage compartment ① will be opened.
To close: slide the stowage compartment in refrigerator box Ⓞ forwards in the direction of the arrow. Stowage compartment Ⓠ will be closed.

Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna

Notes on wirelessly charging a mobile phone

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.

Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compartment.

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

⚠ WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment

Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a fire hazard.

Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal.

NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone storage compartment

If objects are placed in the mobile phone storage compartment, these may be damaged by electromagnetic fields.

Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone storage compartment.

NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stow-age compartment caused by liquids

If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged.

▶ Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment.

Always observe the notes for persons with electronic medical aids ( page 34).

• Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module.

• The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are available only if the vehicle is switched on.

• Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment.

• Large mobile phones that do not rest flat in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior antenna.
• The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may also depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background.
• To ensure more efficient charging and connection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers that are necessary for wireless charging are an exception.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front

Requirements

- The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging.

A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the vehicle has the following options for wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the cockpit:

• In the front stowage compartment
- In the stowage compartment of the cockpit armrest

Line drawing of a car interior showing a hand holding a blue object labeled '1' (no text or symbols beyond the label)

Example: wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front stowage compartment

Place the mobile phone as close to the center of mat ① as possible with the display facing upwards.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front stowage compartment: when a charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunctions that occur while the mobile phone is being charged will be shown on the central display. Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the center console below the armrest: the mobile phone is charging when the indicator lamp is lit. In addition, malfunctions during the mobile phone's charging process are shown by the indicator lamp flashing three times.

① The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the rear passenger compartment

Requirements:

- The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging.

A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/

Line drawing of a car interior with a highlighted seat or seat (no text or symbols)

Example: vehicles with individual rear seats

Open the stowage compartment in the rear center console.
Place the mobile phone as close to the center of mat ① as possible with the display facing upwards.
When the indicator lamp at the front of the mobile phone system lights up, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunctions during the mobile phone's charging proc-

ess are shown by the indicator lamp flashing three times.

① The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.
① Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 141).

Installing and removing the floor mats

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.

Seats and stowing

Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

To remove: slide the corresponding seat backwards and pull the floor mat off holders ②.

Adjust the corresponding seat.

To install: slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell such that it fits.
Press studs ① onto holders ②.
Adjust the corresponding seat.

Exterior lighting

Information about lighting systems and your responsibility

The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation.

Light switch

Operating the light switch

1 ←P ∈ Left-hand parking lights
2 P←→ Right-hand parking lights
3 Standing lights and license plate lamp
4 AUTO Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position)

5 Low beam / high beam
6 0‡ Switches the rear fog light on/off.

When low beam is activated, the 300 indicator lamp for the standing lights will be deactivated and replaced by the 5D low-beam indicator lamp.

Always park your vehicle safely using sufficient lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations.
NOTE Battery discharging by operating the parking lamps

Do not have the parking lamps switched on over a period of several hours.

If the battery is insufficiently charged, the standing lights or parking lights will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start.

The exterior lighting (except standing and parking lights) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened.

- Observe the notes on locator lighting (→ page 170).

Switching on accident scene lighting

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
Switch on the hazard warning lights ( page 163).
Turn the light switch from the AUTO position to the \$D position. The low beam will be switched on despite the vehicle being switched off.

The accident scene lighting will be switched off if:

• you switch off the hazard warning lights.
• you turn the light switch back to AUTO.
  • the battery is insufficiently charged.

Automatic driving lights function

When the vehicle is switched on, the side lamps, low beam and daytime running lights will be switched on automatically depending on the ambient light.

WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility

When the light switch is set to AUTO, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if

there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray.

In such cases, turn the light switch to D .

The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for the vehicle lighting.

Switching the rear fog light on/off

Requirements

• The light switch is in the or position.
  Press button 0¢.

Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.

Operating the combination switch for the lights

① High beam
② Turn signal light, right
Headlamp flashing
Turn signal light, left
Use the combination switch to select the desired function.

Switching on high beam

Turn the light switch to the ☑ or AUTO position.

Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow ①. When high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam ⚡D will be deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam ⚡D.

Switching off high beam

Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow ① or pull it in the direction of arrow ③.

Headlamp flashing

Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3.

Turn signals

To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ② or ④. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times.

To indicate permanently: push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ② or ④. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist:

• A turn signal indicator activated by the driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change.
• If the driver indicated directly beforehand but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically.

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights

Press button ①.

The hazard warning lights will switch on automatically if:

• the air bag has been deployed.

Adaptive functions MULTIBEAM LED and DIGITAL LIGHT

Function of dynamic low beam

With this system, the headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation. It also provides extended functions for improved illumination of the road.

① The availability of the functions is country-dependent.

The system comprises the following functions:

• Active headlamps (→ page 164)
• Cornering light ( page 164)
• Highway mode (→ page 165)
• Enhanced fog light function (→ page 165)
• Bad weather light (→ page 165)
• City lighting (→ page 165)
- Topographical compensation (vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT) (→ page 165)

The system is active only when it is dark.

Active headlamps function

Illustration of a road with vehicles and trees, no text or symbols present

• The headlamps will follow your steering movements.
• Relevant areas will be better illuminated during a journey.

The functions will be active when the low beam is switched on.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance.

Cornering light function

Illustration of a person walking on a crosswalk beside a road with trees and a car (no text or symbols)

The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. The cornering light will be activated only when low beam is switched on.

The function will be active in the following cases:

• At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned
• At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering wheel is turned

Traffic circle and intersection function (Canada): the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the traffic circle or intersection.

■ Highway mode function (Canada) Highway mode increases the range and brightness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility.

Illustration of a multi-lane road with vehicles and trees, no text or symbols present

The function will be active if a freeway journey is detected by means of:

• the vehicle's speed
  • the multifunction camera

• the navigation system

The function will not be active in the following cases:

• at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h)

Enhanced fog light function (Canada)

The enhanced fog light function reduces reflective glare and improves the illumination of the edge of the road.

Illustration of a car driving on a road with trees and hills in the background (no text or symbols)

The function will be activated automatically in the following circumstances:

- At speeds below 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the rear fog light is switched on.

The function will be deactivated automatically in the following circumstances:

• When speeds greater than 62 mph (100 km/h) are reached.
• When the rear fog light is switched off.

Function of the bad weather light (Canada) The bad weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming individual LEDs in the headlamps. There will be less glare for the driver and other road users as a result.
The city lighting function (Canada)

City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light.

The function will be active in the following cases:

• At low speeds
  • In illuminated parts of urban areas

Function of the topographical compensation

Based on available map data, the lighting system responds pre-emptively to different road heights. This means that the headlamp range will remain virtually constant when you are driving uphill or downhill.

① Only vehicles with a multimedia system with navigation have this function.

Assistance functions of DIGITAL LIGHT

DIGITAL LIGHT visually expands on the driver assistance systems by projecting the assistant displays in front of the vehicle while it is in motion. DIGITAL LIGHT can therefore help the driver in critical situations.

① The availability of the functions is country-dependent.

The system will be active in the following cases:

• The light switch is in the AUTO position.
• High beam is switched on.
If you activate the head-up display with augmented reality, the projections will be deactivated.
① Depending on the country in which you are currently driving, certain functions may be disabled due to different legal requirements, even if they are enabled in the multimedia system. When you cross a border, the vehicle will automatically adapt to the applicable requirements.

Spotlight

Illustration of a person walking on a road with a car nearby, surrounded by trees (no text or symbols)

The spotlight function runs in the background and flashes the headlamps in four short bursts at persons detected within the lane markings. You will be made aware of the position of oncoming pedestrians by a projected symbol.

The function will be active in the following circumstances:

• You are driving outside illuminated areas.
• The system detects a lane marking.

Notes

Illustration of a multi-lane road with cars and trucks, surrounded by trees and a traffic sign (no readable text or symbols)

If Traffic Sign Assist detects a roadworks zone, the system will provide support as follows:

- A corresponding symbol will be projected onto the road when you enter a roadworks zone.

Observe the system limitations of Traffic Sign Assist ( page 250).

Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off

Requirements

• The ignition is switched on.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Light

▶ MULTIBEAM LED

▶ Activate or deactivate Dynamic Low Beam.
① In vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT headlamps, the Intelligent Light System can be switched on and off on the DIGITAL LIGHT menu.

Activating or deactivating enhanced assistance functions

① The availability of the functions is dependent on the country.
▶ Select Supporting Projections.
▶ Activate or deactivate the desired projection.
Switch Projection for locator lighting/vehicle stop on or off. If the locator lighting or the exterior switch-off delay time is activated, a high-resolution greeting or farewell scene will be played back for a short period of time when the vehicle is opened or locked. You can choose between the Digital Rain and Star Wave sequences.

(i) More information on locator lighting ( page 170)

More information on the exterior switch-off delay time ( page 170)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist function

WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to:

• Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
• Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
- Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late.

In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be

activated despite the presence of other road users.

▶ Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Detection may be restricted in the following cases:

• In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
- if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.

Illustration of a road scene with cars, trees, and a road (no text or symbols)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light:

• Low-beam headlamps
• High beam

At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h):

- If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automatically.

High beam will switch off automatically in the following cases:

• At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h)
• If other road users are detected
• If street lighting is sufficient

The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off

Switching on

▶ Turn the light switch to the AUTO position.
Switch on high beam using the combination switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the indicator lamp will light up on the driver's display.

Switching off

Switch off high beam using the combination switch.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function (Canada)

WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to:

• Road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
• Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
• Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier

On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late.

In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.

Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases:

- In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow - if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.

Illustration of a traffic scene with cars, trees, and a road (no text or symbols)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light:

• Low-beam headlamps
• Partial high beam
• High beam
• ULTRA RANGE Highbeam (only vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT)

ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the brightness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum.

Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It does not dazzle them but enables full high-beam illumination for the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. Highly reflective signs are also illuminated with reduced brightness.

At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) or when there is sufficient street lighting:

- Partial high beam and high beam will be switched off automatically.

At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h):

• If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automatically.
• If other road users are detected, partial high beam will switch on automatically.

at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h):

- ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will switch off automatically.

170 Light and visibility

At speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h):

• If no other road users are detected, the road is straight and it is not raining heavily, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically.
• If other road users are detected, partial high beam will switch on automatically.
• If highly reflective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched off automatically.

The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off (Canada)

Switching on

▶ Turn the light switch to the AUTO position.
Switch on high beam using the combination switch.
If Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated, the indicator lamp will light up on the driver's display. When partial high beam or

high beam is active, the corresponding blue indicator lamp will also light up.

Switching off

▶ Switch off high beam using the combination switch.

Switching the daytime running lights on/off

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Light

MULTIBEAM LED

▶ Switch the daytime running lights on or off.

In vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT headlamps, the daytime running lights can be switched on or off in the DIGITAL LIGHT menu.
(i) The availability of the function is dependent on the country.

Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Light
▶ Interior/Exterior Lighting
▶ External Lighting Delay
Set the switch-off delay time. When the vehicle's engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.

Activating/deactivating the locator lighting

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Light
▶ Interior/Exterior Lighting
▶ Activate or deactivate Locator Lighting.

When the function is activated, the exterior lighting will light up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked or the driver's door is opened when the vehicle is parked and not locked. When you start the vehicle, the locator lighting will be deactivated and the automatic driving lights activated.

Interior lighting

Adjusting the interior lighting

Switches the front interior lighting on/off.
Switches the rear interior lighting on/off.
3 Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off.
To switch reading lamps on/off: hold your hand under the respective reading lamp ④ or ⑤.

Operating unit inside the grab handle (rear passenger compartment)

Reading lamp on the respective side of the vehicle
② Rear interior lighting
To switch reading lamps on: press button ①. The reading lamp, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will light up.

To switch reading lamps off: press button once or twice.
When you press it once, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go out.
When you press it twice, the reading lamp on the respective side of the vehicle will go out.
To switch the rear interior lighting on/off: press button ②.
The reading lamps, the interior lighting in the grab handle and the dome lamps on both sides of the vehicle will light up or go out.

Adjusting the ambient lighting

Multimedia system:

Comfort Ambient Light

Setting the color

Select Color.
▶ Select Monochrome or Multi-color.
▶ Set the desired color or color scheme.

172 Light and visibility

Adjusting the brightness

Select Brightness.

Adjust the brightness.

① Depending on the ambient light, the ambient lighting will automatically switch between day and night modes.

Activating the brightness for zones

Select Brightness.
▶ Switch off Link Zones.
The Direct, Indirect and Accents zones can be set separately.
The Light Band zone can also be set in vehicles with active ambient lighting.

Activating effects

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident if ambient lighting and active ambient lighting effects are not switched on

The warning assistance effects will be fully active only when the relevant driving or driving safety systems are activated on the Driving Assistance menu.

Make sure that the relevant driving or driving safety systems are activated.

i Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers ( page 223).
Select Effects.
▶ Activate the desired effect.
① Depending on the vehicle equipment, different effects are available.

Operating feedback effects

• Climate: If changes are made to the temperature setting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change briefly.
- Voice Assistant: For vehicles with active ambient lighting, the voice assistant is visually animated.
- Greeting: When you get into the vehicle, a special color animation will play.

Warning assistance effects

- Warning When Exiting: If an object is detected in the blind spot while you are getting out of

the vehicle, the ambient lighting in the affected door will flash red.

Further information on the exit warning ( page 255).

• Active Lane Keeping Assist: If there is a warning from Active Lane Keeping Assist, the active ambient lighting will flash red. Further information on Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 258).
• Active Brake Assist: If there is an Active Brake Assist warning, the active ambient lighting in the center of the cockpit will flash bright red. Further information on the Active Brake Assist (→ page 246).
• Active Blind Spot Assist: In vehicles with active ambient lighting, the ambient lighting on the affected side will flash red if there is a warning from Active Blind Spot Assist. Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist (→ page 255).

Multi-color Animation

- The chosen color combination will change at predefined intervals.

① In vehicles with active ambient lighting, an animation will be played.
The desired operating feedback and warning assistance can be activated or deactivated via the symbol. Depending on the equipment, different operating feedback and warning assistance effects are available.
If the brightness is set to a low level, warning animations will be displayed at a higher basic brightness.

Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off

Multimedia system:

Settings Light
▶ Interior/Exterior Lighting
▶ Interior Lighting Delay
Activate or deactivate Interior Lighting Delay. If this function is active, the interior lighting will be switched on for a short time after the end of the journey.

Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wipers on/off

1 0 Windshield wipers off
2 ⋯ Automatic wiping, normal
3 .... Automatic wiping, frequent
4 — Continuous wiping, slow
5 = Continuous wiping, fast

174 Light and visibility

Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5.
Single wipe: press button ① as far as the point of resistance.
Wiping with washer fluid: press button beyond the point of resistance.
① Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash ( page 366).

In position [2] or [3], the windshield washing process is automatically triggered if dirt is detected on the windshield unless the Add Washer Fluid message is displayed.

Deep-cleaning the windshield

In the case of heavy soiling, you can deep-clean the windshield above outside temperatures of 41^ F ( 5^ C).

In a stationary vehicle, turn the combination switch to position 1, 2 or 3.

Press the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow ① and hold it for approximately two seconds.
The wiper arms will move into their replacement positions and washer fluid will be distributed on the windshield.
After approximately 30 seconds, the wiper arms will move back again and wipe the wind-shield several times. Deep-cleaning will now have finished.

Replacing the windshield wiper blades (MAGIC VISION CONTROL)

Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
Within around 15 seconds, press the button on the combination switch (→ page 173).
The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

Removing the wiper blades

To bring the wiper blade into position to be removed: hold the wiper arm firmly with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ① beyond the point of resistance.
The wiper blade will engage in the removal position with a click.

To remove the wiper blade: press release knob ②, pull the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ③ and remove.

Installing the wiper blades

Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ① until release knob ② engages.

- Press the wiper blade beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ③ on the wiper arm. The wiper blade will engage with a noticeable click and move freely again. - Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. - Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

Mirrors

Operating the outside mirrors

WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

- If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion

• If you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion
  Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.

WARNING Risk of accident due to misjudgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror

The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear.

Therefore, always look over your shoulder to check the actual distance between you and the road users traveling behind you.

176 Light and visibility

Adjusting the outside mirrors

Use button ② or ④ to select the desired mirror.
In vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant and driver camera, the required outside mirror can also be preselected automatically via a natural head movement to the left or right(→ page 312).

Use button ① to adjust the position of the selected mirror.

Folding the outside mirrors in/out

Briefly press button ③.

If the battery has been disconnected or has discharged, the outside mirrors must be moved briefly using button. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.

Engaging the outside mirrors

If an outside mirror has been forcibly disengaged, proceed as follows.

Press and hold button 3

You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly engage. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.

Automatic anti-glare mirrors function

WARNING Risk of acid burns and poisoning due to the anti-glare mirror electrolyte

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks.

The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.

If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following:

• Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention.
• If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention.

• If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.

• Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte.
  • If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror.

System limits

The system will not go into anti-glare mode if:

• The vehicle is switched off.
- Reverse gear is engaged.
• The interior lighting is switched on.

Front-passenger outside mirror parking position function

The parking position makes parking easier.

The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when:

• The parking position is stored ( page 177).
• The front-passenger mirror is selected.
- Reverse gear is engaged.

The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when:

• You shift the transmission to another transmission position.
  • You are traveling at a speed greater than 9 mph (15 km/h).
• You press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side.

Storing and calling up the parking position of the front-passenger outside mirror using reverse gear

Storing

Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2.
Engage reverse gear.
Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button ①.

178 Light and visibility

Calling up

Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button ②.
Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position.

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function

Multimedia system:

→ Settings Vehicle
▶ Open/Close
▶ Activate or deactivate Automatic Mirror Folding.

Area permeable to radio waves on the wind-shield

Radio-controlled equipment such as toll systems can be mounted only on areas ① of the windshield that are permeable to radio waves.

Areas permeable to radio waves ① are best visible from outside the vehicle when the windshield is illuminated with an external light source.
Note this position for vehicles with:

• Windshield heater
  • Infra-red reflective windshield

Infrared-reflective windshield function

The infrared-reflective windshield is coated and

reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle interior.

The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves.

Overview of climate control systems

Notes on climate control

An interior air filter in combination with the prefilter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollution level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of the THERMOTRONIC climate bar

The indicator lamps indicate that the corresponding functions are activated.

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["22.0"]
    C["7"] --> D["3"]
    E["4"] --> F["A/C"]
    G["5"] --> H["6"]
    I["12"] --> J["22.0"]
    K["8"] --> L["11"]
    M["10"] --> N["9"]
    O["7"] --> P["8"]
    Q["22.0"] --> R["CLIPA Menx"]
    S["12"] --> T["8"]
    U["1"] --> V["12"]

Front climate bar on the central display (example)

1 ▲ Increases the temperature
2 Upper display area of the climate bar with the examples of switching off climate control (→ page 181), switching air-recirculation mode on/off (→ page 184) and SYNC synchronization function (→ page 183)

3 Demists the windshield (→ page 186, 182)
A/C Switches the A/C function on/off (→ page 182) or PM275 Calls up the fine particulate status display (→ page 181) or Activates/deactivates residual heat utilization (→ page 184)
5 Switches the rear window heating on/off
Depending on vehicle equipment and settings: temperature display, display for the defrost function, airflow, pre-entry climate control or stationary heater
⑦ Increases the airflow or switches on climate control ( page 181)
8 ▼ Reduces the temperature
AUTO Sets climate control to automatic mode, right ( page 182)
10 MENU Calls up the air conditioning menu (→ page 181)

AUTO Sets climate control to automatic mode, left (→ page 182)
12 ☉ Reduces the airflow or switches off climate control(→ page 181)
The climate bar will remain visible even when the vehicle is parked or the air conditioning is switched off ( page 181).
① The availability of individual functions depends on the country and equipment.
① Vehicles with Distance Assist DISTRONIC: if Distance Assist DISTRONIC intervenes, the climate bar display on the central display will be made smaller.

Overview of the rear operating unit

Example: USA
Sets the air distribution to the center air vents in the rear passenger compartment, left
2 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, left

Sets the airflow in the rear passenger compartment, left, or switches climate control on/off (→ page 181)

Switches climate control on/off (→ page 181)

or switches residual heat on/off (→ page 184)

5 Sets the airflow in the rear passenger compartment, right, or switches climate control on/off ( page 181)

6 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, right

7 Sets the air distribution to the center air vents in the rear passenger compartment, right

Sets rear passenger compartment climate control to automatic mode, right

Sets the air distribution to the footwell vents in the rear passenger compartment, right

10 Synchronization is activated ( page 183)

⑪ Sets the air distribution to the footwell vents in the rear passenger compartment, left

Sets rear passenger compartment climate control to automatic mode, left

The settings for the second row of seats can be configured via the rear operating unit, the multimedia system ( page 183) or the MBUX rear tablet depending on the vehicle's equipment.

Operating the climate control system

Switching climate control on/off

Switching on climate control

Set the airflow to level 1 or higher via 🎨 on the climate bar on the central display

or

Press AUTO, ▲, ▼ or MENU.

Switching off climate control

Set the airflow to level 0 via ☑ on the climate bar on the central display

or

Press

If climate control is switched off, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly.

① If climate control is switched off via OFF will be shown on the climate bar.

Switching climate control on/off via the rear operating unit

Switching on

Press button 4.

or

Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using buttons ③ and ⑤.

or

Press buttons 2, 6, 8 or 12.

Switching off

Press button 4.

or

Set the airflow to level 0 using buttons ③ and ⑤.

If rear climate control is switched off via button, OFF will be shown on the displays.

Switching the A/C function on/off using the air conditioning control panel

The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air.

Press button A/C.

Switch off the A/C function only briefly; otherwise, the windows may fog up more quickly.

Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a malfunction.

Calling up the air conditioning menu using the climate bar

The air conditioning menu can be called up via the climate bar. The climate bar is always shown on the lower edge of the central display.

▶ Select the Climate Menu entry in the air conditioning bar. The First Row of Seats menu is opened.

Jumping directly to the Air Quality menu

Select the PV15 fine particle status display in the air conditioning bar. The Air Quality menu is opened. An animation of the automatic air cleaning taking place is shown.

182 Climate control

The fine particle status display is on the home screen next to the temperature display on the right and it informs you of the current particulate levels inside and outside of the vehicle. The measurement values are shown with the g / m^3 units (micrograms per cubic meter).

Strong acceleration after longer parking periods will lead to a detachment of the dust covering the vehicle. This dust measured by the PM2.5 sensor might lead to a short rise of outside values.

Defrosting the windshield via the climate bar

Switching on

Press ☐ on the climate bar on the central display.

Switching off

Press MAX, AUTO or ⏻ on the climate bar on the central display

or

set the airflow to 0.

When the defrost function is activated, some functions (e.g. the temperature setting) will automatically be deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system:

Climate Menu First Row of Seats

Depending on the external conditions, support for improved cooling and dehumidification of the interior air will be provided when the A/C function is activated. If it is not possible to operate the A/C function on the climate bar on the central display, switch the function on or off in the climate menu of the central display.

Select A/C (A/C).

Setting climate control to automatic mode via the climate bar

In automatic mode, the set vehicle interior temperature is controlled automatically and maintained at a constant level by the air supply.

Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central display.

① You can increase or reduce the airflow by pressing ⚙ on the climate bar on the central display.

To switch to manual operation: switch off automatic mode or adjust an aspect of air distribution, e.g.

Setting air distribution using the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system:

Climate Menu

Select First Row of Seats or Second Row of Seats.
To set the air distribution: select 📄, 🖼 or 📌.
Set the airflow.

When the air conditioning system is switched on, at least one zone is always active. However, several air distribution options can be selected at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the interior and the footwells simultaneously. In doing so, the climate control for the windshield can only be selected for the first seat row. When automatic mode is active, the buttons for setting the air distribution are automatically deactivated. When the air conditioning system is switched off, the buttons remain operable and the last setting is saved.

Setting the footwell temperature

Multimedia system:

Climate Menu

Select 📄 and set the desired footwell temperature using the slider.

Setting rear climate control using the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system:

Climate Menu

Setting the temperature

▶ Select Second Row of Seats.

Set the temperature.

Setting the airflow

▶ Select Second Row of Seats.

Set the air flow with ▲ or ▼.

Controlling the rear climate control automatically

Select AUTO.

When the defrost function is activated, some functions (e.g. the temperature setting) will automatically be deactivated. To deactivate the defrost function, press either _MAX , AUTO or _L set the air flow to level 0 ( page 182).

Deactivating rear climate control

Select REAR OFF.

Switching the synchronization function on/off via the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system:

Climate Menu First Row of Seats

The synchronization function controls the climate control centrally. The driver's settings for temperature, airflow and air distribution are automatically adopted for each climate zone.

▶ Select SYNC (SYNC).

Removing condensation from the windows

Windows fogged up on the inside

Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central display.

If the windows remain fogged up: press on the climate bar on the central display.

Windows fogged up on the outside

▶ Switch on the windshield wipers.

Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central display.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off

Multimedia system:

Climate Menu First Row of Seats

Press 📄 in the upper display area of the climate bar.
The interior air will be recirculated.

Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to fresh air mode after a while.

① If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.

Switching residual heat mode on/off via the climate bar

Requirements

• The residual heat function is available.
• The vehicle is parked.
- The coolant temperature is sufficiently high.

It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilating the front compartment of the vehicle for approx-

imately 30 minutes, depending on the temperature set.

To switch on or off: select Residual Heat on the climate bar of the central display.

The residual heat function will automatically switch off after some time.

If residual engine heat utilization is activated, the two buttons for setting the temperature and air distribution will automatically be deactivated.

Switching residual heat on/off via the rear operating unit

Requirements

• The residual heat function is available.
• The vehicle is parked.
• The coolant temperature is sufficiently high.

When the residual heat of the engine is activated in the rear passenger compartment, you can heat or ventilate the front and rear compartments for approximately 15 minutes.

Press button REST.

Activating/deactivating ionization

Multimedia system:

Climate Menu >> Air Quality

When ionization is activated, the interior air is enriched with negatively charged oxygen ions. This can promote the well-being of the vehicle occupants.

Select Ionization.
(i) The function can be performed only if AUTO mode is activated or the air distribution is set to the side air vent. The function is restricted if the side air vents on the driver's side are closed.

Fragrance system

Activating/deactivating the fragrance system using the multimedia system

Requirements

• Automatic climate control is activated.

• The glove compartment will close.
- A flacon is inserted.

Multimedia system:

Climate Menu Air Quality

The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a flacon located in the glove compartment.

Navigate down until the climate control bar is active.
Select Fragrance.
▶ Activate or deactivate fragrancing.
Setting the fragrance system using the multi-media system

Requirements

• A flacon is inserted.
• The glove compartment is closed.
• Climate control is activated.

Multimedia system:

Climate Menu Air Quality

The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a flacon located in the glove compartment.

Select Fragrance.
Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached.
- Inserting or removing the flacon of the fragrance system

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury from liquid perfume

If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk.
If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water.
▶ If symptoms continue, consult a doctor.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons

Full flacons must not be disposed of her with household waste.

Hand in full flacons at a pollutant collection point.

Cap
② Flacon
To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go.
To remove: after opening the glove compartment, wait for approximately seven seconds and pull out the flacon.

If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging.

Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it.

Refillable flacon

Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon.
Fill the flacon with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml).
Screw the cap back onto the flacon.

Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate information sheet that comes with the flacon.

Information on the windshield heater

WARNING Risk of burns from touching the windshield when the windshield heater is switched on

The windshield can become very hot when the windshield heater is switched on.

The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

Do not touch the windshield while the windshield heater is switched on.
▶ Allow the windshield to cool down before touching it.

The windshield heater will be switched on automatically if is activated on the climate bar on the central display.

After the vehicle is started, the windshield heater will be switched on automatically as required.

Pre-entry climate control for departure time

■ Pre-entry climate control for departure time function

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot.

In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly.

① This function is available only for Mercedes-AMG vehicles, plug-in hybrids or vehicles with a 48-V on-board electrical system.

The air inside the vehicle can be heated, ventilated or cooled to the set temperature when the vehicle is parked.

Plug-in hybrid: When the vehicle is connected to power supply equipment, priority will be given to charging the high-voltage battery to a specified minimum charge.

The running time of pre-entry climate control may be reduced in the following circumstances:

- Plug-in hybrid: The vehicle is not connected to power supply equipment.

- The high-voltage battery or the 48 V battery is not fully charged.

Plug-in hybrid: With active pre-entry climate control, the state of charge of the high-voltage battery may be reduced, even if the charging cable connector is connected.

If present, seat ventilation will be activated in cooling and ventilation modes.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following functions will be activated in heating mode, if available:

• Seat heating
• Steering wheel heating
• Panel heating
• Mirror heater
• Rear window defroster
• Windshield heater

When the set temperature is charged, climate control mode will automatically be updated and switched from heating mode to ventilation or cooling mode, from cooling mode to ventilation or heating mode or from ventilation mode to heating or cooling mode.

Setting pre-entry climate control for departure time via the climate bar Multimedia system:

Climate Menu ▶ Pre-entry Climate Ctrl.

Setting the departure time

Plug-in hybrid: The set departure times are used for the vehicle's pre-entry climate control and for predictions regarding the approximate state of charge and range at the time selected. Additional information on the charging settings.

Select Edit Departure Time

Select a departure time or set a new departure time.

Setting the repeat days

Select Edit Departure Time
Set the desired departure time and select the corresponding weekdays on which this departure time is to apply.
▶ Press OK to confirm.

Selecting seats

Select Driver, Passenger, Rear Left or Rear Right. Pre-entry climate control will take place for the selected seats.

If a departure time is set, a yellow LED will appear on the climate bar of the central display. In addition, an LED on the climate bar will indicate when pre-entry climate control is activated. It will light up blue when the vehicle is being cooled and red when it is being heated.

Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate control for departure time

Requirements

• The high-voltage battery or the 48 V battery is charged sufficiently.
• The function has been activated via the multi-media system.
  To activate: set the departure time (→ page 188). Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: Pre-entry climate control for departure time

will switch on a maximum of 5 minutes before the selected departure time.

To deactivate the pre-entry climate control for departure time early: press 📄 on the climate bar on the central display or switch off the preselection of the time in the climate menu.

If present, the following functions will remain active once the vehicle has been started:

• Seat heating
• Seat ventilation
• Panel heating

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following functions will also be adjusted during pre-entry climate control if they have already been switched on during regular vehicle operation:

• Fragrancing
• Ionization

Activating/deactivating immediate pre-entry climate control

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle

If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.

▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating

Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot.

In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries.

Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating.

To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly.

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched off.

① Immediate pre-entry climate control is available only for plug-in hybrids or vehicles with a 48-V on-board electrical system.

The vehicle interior can continue to be air-conditioned, e.g. during a break in driving, for up to 50 minutes for plug-in hybrids and up to 5 minutes for vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system.

Press 📄 on the climate bar on the central display.
The red or blue indicator lamp below 📄 on the climate bar on the central display will light up or go out.
Set the temperature using the ▲ and ▼ arrows on the climate bar on the central display.

The colors of the indicator lamp have the following meanings:

• Blue: ventilation or cooling mode is switched on.
• Red: heating mode is switched on.
• Yellow: the departure time is preselected.

Air vents

Adjusting the front air vents

WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.

Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, note the following:

• Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear.
- Keep the air inlet grille free of residue build-up (→ page 366).

To open the center and side air vents: press button 1.
The three indicator lamps on the button will light up. The air vents will be opened completely.
To close the center and side air vents: press button ① again.
The three indicator lamps on the button will go out one by one. The air vents will be closed completely.
To adjust the airflow direction of the side air vents: hold the center of outer side air vent ② and move it up or down or to the left or right.
To adjust the airflow direction of the center air vent: hold the center of air vent ③ and move it up or down or to the left or right.

Adjusting the rear air vents

WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents

Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents.

▶ Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents.
If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

To open the rear air vents in the center console: press button ①.

The air vents will be opened completely and the three indicator lamps on the button will light up.

To close the rear air vents in the center console: press button ① again. The three indicator lamps on the button will go out one by one. The air vents will be closed completely.
To adjust the airflow direction of the rear air vents in the center console: hold the center of air vent ② and move it up or down or to the left or right.

To open the side air vents in the rear passenger compartment: press button ①. If the button is flush with the side trim, the side air vent is open.
To close the side air vents in the rear passenger compartment: press button ① again. If the button protrudes from the side trim, the side air vent is closed.
To adjust the airflow direction of the side air vents in the rear passenger compartment: hold the center of air vent ② and move it up or down or to the left or right.
Opening or closing the air vent in the glove box

NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive objects in the glove box

Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside it.

▶ Close the air vent when you heat the vehicle.

At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and switch on the A/C function.

The automatic climate control must be switched on to cool the glove box.

Air vent controller
2 Air vent

192 Climate control

To open or close: turn controller ⏻ to the right or left.

Driving

Switching on the power supply or the vehicle

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example:

• releasing the parking brake.
• changing the gearbox position.
• starting the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

Requirements

• The key is in the vehicle and is recognized.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.

To switch on the power supply: press button once. You can, for example, switch on the windshield wipers.

The power supply will be switched off again if the following conditions are met:

• You open the driver's door.
• You press button ① twice more.

To switch on the vehicle: press button twice. Indicator and warning lamps will light up on the driver's display.

The vehicle will be switched off again if one of the following conditions is met:

• You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in position P or the electric parking brake is applied.
• You press button ① once.

Starting the vehicle

Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button

DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

▶ Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system

Flammable materials may ignite.

Therefore, regularly check that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system.

Requirements

• The key is in the vehicle and is detected.
Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Depress the brake pedal and press button once.
If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-essential consumer equipment and press button ① once.
If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message appears on the driver's display: start the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (→ page 194).

① You can switch off the vehicle while driving. To do this, press and hold button ① for about three seconds or press button ① three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes concerning this under "Driving tips" (→ page 197).

Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on the driver's display.

Starting the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message appears on the driver's display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.

Make sure that the cup holder ② is empty.
Remove key ① from the key ring.
Place key ① in cup holder ②. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove key ① from cup holder ②, the vehicle can be driven. For further vehicle

starts, however, key ① must be located in cup holder ② during the entire journey.

Have key ① checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the vehicle does not start:

Leave key ① in cup holder ②.
Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button.
① You can switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/stop button.

Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on the driver's display.

Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Services

Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before starting the journey

Ensure the following before starting the engine:

- The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone.

• It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
  • The fuel tank is sufficiently full.
  • The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

Charging the starter battery before starting the journey

You can receive a message on your smartphone when the state of charge of the starter battery is low. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes.

Ensure the following before starting the engine:

• The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone.
• It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked.
  • The fuel tank is sufficiently full.

Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)

WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment due to unintentional starting of the engine

Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work.

Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work.

Requirements

• Park position is selected.
  • The anti-theft alarm system is not activated.
  • The panic alarm is not activated.
• The hazard warning light system is switched off.
  • The hood is closed.
  • The doors are closed and locked.
  • The windows and sliding sunroof are closed.

Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every engine start, the engine runs for ten minutes.

You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts. You must start the engine with the key before trying to start the vehicle again with the smartphone.

You can switch off the vehicle at any time as follows:

- Via the smartphone app - By pressing the ☑ or Ⓧ button on the key

i Further information can be found in the smartphone app.

Securing the vehicle against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work:

Switch on the hazard warning light system or unlock the doors.

Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

To preserve the engine during the first 1000 miles (1500 km):

• Drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds.
  • No faster than 85 mph (140 km/h).
• Drive the vehicle in drive mode C or E.
• Shift to the next higher gear at the very latest when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer.
• Do not shift down manually in order to brake.
• Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle.
• Do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown).
• Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1000 miles (1500 km).

This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced.

Please also observe the following breaking-in notes:

• In certain handling and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is only reached when this teaching in process has concluded.
• Brake pads, brake disks and tires that are either new or have been replaced achieve optimum braking effect and grip only after the vehicle has been driven several hundred kilometers. Compensate the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Notes on optimized acceleration

If all necessary requirements and activation conditions are fulfilled, the best possible acceleration can be achieved from a standstill.

Do not use optimized acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident.

Be sure to observe the safety notes and information on ESP® (→ page 226).

Pulling away with optimized acceleration

WARNING Risk of skidding and accidents due to the wheels spinning

If you pull away using optimized acceleration, individual wheels can spin and the vehicle can skid.

There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents, especially when ESP® is switched off!

Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the vicinity of the vehicle.

Requirements

• the vehicle is broken in (→ page 196).
• the vehicle and tires are in good condition.
• the roadway has a high-grip surface.
- the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature.

NOTE Increased wear due to optimized acceleration

When pulling away with optimized acceleration, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load.

This can lead to increased component wear.

Do not always pull away with optimized acceleration.

Engage the D drive position ( page 209).
Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position.
Select the drive program S (→ page 206).
Deactivating ESP ^® (→ page 227).
Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with your left foot.
With your right foot, fully depress the accelerator pedal.

After no more than five seconds, take your left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle will pull away at maximum acceleration.
Switch on ESP ^® once the acceleration procedure is complete.

Ending optimized acceleration

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Reactivate ESP®.
① After you pull away with optimized acceleration, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that optimized acceleration values may only be reached again after a few minutes.

Notes on driving

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell

Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.

This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle.

Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell.
▶ Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals.
Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another.

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear

Incorrect footwear includes, for example:

• Shoes with platform soles
• Shoes with high heels
- Slippers

There is a risk of an accident.

Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely.

WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched off while driving

If you switch off the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available.

This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example.

You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example.

Do not switch off the vehicle while driving.

DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

▶ Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces

If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction.

Do not shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect.

DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous exhaust gases

If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets stuck in the snow.

Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater is running.

Open a window on the side of the vehicle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air.

A WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alcohol and drugs while driving

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment.

The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive.

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating

If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat.

This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail.

▶ Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.

Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving.

NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds

The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range.

Do not drive with the engine in the over-revving range.

NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal

Do not depress the brake pedal continuously whilst driving.

To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time.

NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away

Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immediately.

Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature.

NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel

The engine is not running smoothly and is mis-firing.

Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter.

▶ Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Reduced battery life due to frequent short-distance trips

The 12 V battery may not be sufficiently charged when the vehicle is used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery.

▶ Drive longer distances regularly to charge the battery.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.

Observe the signposted headroom clearance.
If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.

Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

Please bear in mind that all the speed values stated in this Operator's Manual are approximate and are subject to a certain tolerance.

Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle

When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occupied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change.

You should therefore bear the following in mind:

• Do not exceed the permissible roof load and towing capacity. Also observe the information in the Technical Data.
• Distribute the roof load and the load inside the vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle ( page 141).
• Drive attentively, and avoid abrupt starts, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.

Advice on driving on salt-strewn roads

The braking effect is limited on salt-strewn road surfaces.

Therefore, observe the following notes:

• Due to salt build-up on the brake disks and brake pads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in one-sided braking.
• Maintain a much greater safety distance to the vehicle traveling ahead.

Remove salt build-up as follows:

• Brake occasionally, paying attention to the traffic conditions
• Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey

Notes on hydroplaning

Hydroplaning can occur if a certain depth of water has built up on the road surface.

Observe the following notes during heavy precipitation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur:

- Reduce speed

• Avoid tire ruts
• Avoid sudden steering movements
• Brake carefully
  Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires ( page 400).

Notes on driving through water on the road Water ingress can damage the engine, electrics and transmission.

Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage.

Observe the following if you have to drive through water:

• The water, when calm, may reach no higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body.
• Drive at walking pace at most; water may otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment.
• Vehicles traveling in front or oncoming vehicles can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of water.

The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after driving through water. Brake carefully, paying

attention to the traffic conditions, until braking effect has been fully restored.

Function of rear axle steering

The rear axle steering is an electromechanical auxiliary steering on the rear axle which adjusts the steering of the rear wheels according to the position of the front wheels, depending on the speed. This results in greater maneuverability and improved driving stability for the vehicle.

Rear axle steering has the following characteristics:

• reduced steering effort and turning circle resulting in reduced parking effort
• more direct steering resulting in improved control of the vehicle
  • improved cornering of the vehicle

Observe the notes on snow chains and snow chain mode ( page 401).

ECO start/stop function

ECO start/stop function

Depending on the engine, the ECO start/stop function is not available in all drive programs. Observe the status display on the driver's display concerning this.

The engine will be switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met:

• You brake the vehicle to a standstill in transmission position D or N.
• Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system: you depress the brake pedal when traveling at a low speed.

If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop:

• You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle in front of you.
• The vehicle that stopped in front of you starts up again.
• You maneuver, turn the steering wheel sharply or engage reverse gear.

If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position [P], the engine can be switched off in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor.

The engine will restart automatically in the following cases:

• You engage transmission position D or R.
  • You depress the accelerator pedal.
• The vehicle requires an automatic engine start.
  • You release the brake pedal.
• Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system:

- You release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does not roll.

The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter glide mode at 15 mph (20 km/h).

ECO start/stop function symbols on the driver's display:

• The (A) symbol (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill; the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
• The symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle conditions for an engine stop have been met.
• Neither the Ⓐ symbol nor the Ⓐ symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, has been detected.
• The ^n symbol appears: the ECO start/stop function is deactivated or there is a malfunction.

If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warning tone will sound and the engine will not be restarted. In addition, the following display message will appear on the driver's display:

Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting

If you do not switch off the vehicle, it will automatically be switched off after three minutes.

Switching the ECO start/stop function on/off

Press ① button. A display will appear on the driver's display when you switch the ECO start/stop function on/off.

① will be continuously shown on the driver's display while the ECO start/stop function is deactivated.

ECO display function

The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driving style on the driver's display depending on the situation. This enables you to check the efficiency of your driving style and adjust it if necessary. The ECO Display menu shows ball ② that will roll forwards or backwards on a stylized road in the direction of travel according to the driving characteristics.

Above and below the road, lines mark the area for an efficient driving style ③. Ball ② will light up in green if it is rolling within these lines. Outside the lines, the ball will light up in orange.

The ECO display assesses the following criteria for an economical driving style:

• coasting at the right times
• consistent speed
• moderate acceleration

The overall assessment of your driving style "from start" is indicated using stars. It starts with five empty stars, which you can fill one after the other if you drive efficiently. When all five stars are filled, a glow will appear in the background.

① You can call up the ECO Display function via the Classic and Maybach menus (→ page 291).

ECO Assist function (vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system)

i ECO Assist is active only in drive programs E and C.

ECO Assist analyzes data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead and the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill gradient.

If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not sufficient, you must also brake with the service brake. This is especially the case if, for example, you pull away again in slow-moving traffic and the distance to the vehicle in front is very short.

① "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation
Route event ahead

If a route event ahead or a vehicle driving in front is detected which requires an adjustment to your driving style to ensure greater efficiency, corresponding symbol ② and the □ symbol (gray) will be displayed.

If you release the accelerator pedal, the symbol will turn green and recuperation in overrun mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is not sufficient, also apply the service brake. If ECO Assist intervenes for a route event ahead (not for a vehicle in front) and you then press the accelerator pedal again, you end ECO Assist's control.

The ECO Assist display is hidden again in the following cases:

• You do not react to the ECO Assist recommendation for a long time.
• You press the accelerator pedal while ECO Assist is intervening for a route event ahead (not for a vehicle in front).
  • ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route ahead.

In addition to a vehicle in front 📄, ECO Assist can detect the following route events ② depending on the vehicle's equipment:

Traffic circle
S-bend
Sharp bend
T-T-intersection
Downhill gradient
Speed limit

① In drive program [C], ECO Assist only reacts to route event "Vehicle in front."

System limits

If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data.

ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
• If the windshield is dirty in the vicinity of the multifunction camera.

• If the multifunction camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured.

• If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured.

• If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date.
• If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-works or in adjacent lanes.
  • If the radar sensors are dirty or obscured.
• When you drive on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients.
• If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.

DYNAMIC SELECT

Function of DYNAMIC SELECT

DYNAMIC SELECT makes the quick selection of a drive program possible in accordance with the current driving situation or the desired vehicle characteristics. You can select from the following drive programs.

(i) Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs.

The drive program selected will appear on the driver's display.

Individual

• Individual settings (→ page 206)

S Sport

• The maximum output is available
• Sporty driving with lowered suspension
• Sporty, but with an emphasis on stability
- Enables a sporty driver to adopt a more active driving style
- Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch of road

Comfort

• Comfortable and economical driving
• Balance between traction and stability
• Recommended for all road conditions

CV Curve

• Available only for vehicles with E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL
• Comfortable driving with curve tilting function

• Balance between traction and stability
- Recommended for all road conditions

Maybach

• Maximum driving comfort for comfortable and luxurious travel
• Balance between traction and stability
• Recommended for all road conditions

The ESP ^ setting in the drive program C is designed for stability. Therefore, choose this drive program especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied.

Depending on the drive program, the following systems will change their characteristics:

• Drive
• Engine and transmission management
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
• Availability of Glide mode

- ESP®

• Vehicles with AIRMATIC: suspension Suspension and damping

• Vehicle level
• Steering

Selecting the drive program

Press the DYNAMIC SELECT button Ⓞ on the left or right. The drive program selected will appear on the driver's display.

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT in the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

Setting drive program I

Select Individual.
Select and set a category.
① A sporty ESP mode can be set in conjunction with a sporty suspension mode.

Switching the reset display on/off

Activate or deactivate Request at Start.
This function must be activated for each user profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and ECO start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile.

Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an additional

prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated.

The prompt only appears if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings.

Function off: the next time the vehicle is started the C drive program is set automatically. The ECO start/stop function is activated automatically.

Displaying vehicle data

Multimedia system:

Select Vehicle.

The vehicle data is displayed.

Displaying engine data

Multimedia system:

Select Engine.

The engine data is displayed.

The actual maximum values that can be achieved for engine output and engine torque may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines).

Variables that can influence this are, for example:

• Sea level
• Fuel quality
• Outside temperature
  • Operating temperature of the engine

Adjust your driving style accordingly. The [●] warning lamp in the driver's display is on until the engine has reached operating temperature.

The values displayed serve only as orientation. The values for engine output and engine torque shown on the central display may deviate from the actual values.
The warning lamp to show the power output limitation after starting the vehicle is not available in all vehicle models.

Calling up the fuel consumption indicator

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Info

Select Consumption.

The current and average fuel consumption will be displayed.

Automatic transmission

DIRECT SELECT lever

Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect gearshifting

If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission position D or R, the vehicle may accelerate sharply.

If you engage the transmission position D or R when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example:

• releasing the parking brake.
• changing the gearbox position.
- starting the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the key out of reach of children.

Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position will be shown on the driver's display.

P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position

Engaging reverse gear R
Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance.
Engaging neutral N
Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance.
To shift into neutral N with the vehicle switched on, push the selector lever up or down for several seconds to the first point of resistance.

Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.

Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, even if the vehicle is switched off or the driver's door is opened:

Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral N when the vehicle is at a standstill.
Release the brake pedal.
▶ Switch off the vehicle.

The Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activated Manually No Automatic Change to P message appears in the driver's display.

If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the automatic transmission remains in neutral N.

The park position is automatically re-engaged as soon as one of the following conditions is met:

• You switch to transmission position D or R.
• You press the button P.

Engaging park position P

NOTE Damage due to engaging park position P while the vehicle is rolling

If you shift the transmission into park position P while the vehicle is rolling, the transmission may be damaged.

If the vehicle is rolling, do not open a door.
▶ Only engage park position P when the vehicle is stationary.

Observe the notes on parking the vehicle ( page 214).
▶ Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.
When the vehicle is stationary, press button P. When the transmission position display shows P, the park position is engaged. If the transmission position display P is not shown, apply the parking brake and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.
Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until P is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display.
Park position P will be engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met:
- You switch the stationary vehicle off in transmission position D or R.
- You open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary in transmission position D or R.

• When the vehicle is rolling, you switch if off in transmission position D or R and bring it to a standstill.
• When the vehicle is rolling, you shift to transmission position N, bring the vehicle to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary.
• Engaging park position P automatically is required by the vehicle.
  To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary and engage transmission position [D] or [R] again.

Engaging drive position D

Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

When the automatic transmission is in transmission position D, it will shift gears automatically. This depends, among other things, on the following factors:

• The selected drive program
• The position of the accelerator pedal

• The driving speed

Manual gearshifting

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

Diagram of a car steering wheel with two blue control switches labeled 1 and 2 (no text or symbols beyond labels)

When the automatic transmission is shifted to position , you can manually shift it with the steering wheel paddle shifter. If permitted, the automatic transmission will shift to a higher or

lower gear depending on the steering wheel paddle shifter being pulled.

You have two options for manually shifting the automatic transmission:

• Temporary setting
• Permanent setting

The gears will shift automatically when manual shifting is deactivated.

Temporary setting:

To activate: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ① or ②.

Manual shifting will be activated for a short time. The transmission position display will show M and the current gear.

How long manual shifting stays activated depends on various factors.

Manual shifting can be deactivated automatically in the following cases:

• When the drive program is changed
• When the vehicle is restarted
• When transmission position [D] is engaged again

- Driving style

To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ②.
To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ①.
To deactivate: pull and hold steering wheel paddle shifter ②. The transmission position display will show [D].
① You can also activate or deactivate manual shifting permanently in the multimedia system.

Permanently activating or deactivating manual gearshifting

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Vehicle ▶ Driving
▶ Permanently switch the function on or off.

Gearshift recommendation

The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style.

If gearshift recommendation ① appears next to the transmission position display, shift to the recommended gear.

Using kickdown

▶ Maximum acceleration: depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance.

To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission will shift up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached.

Glide mode function

With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption.

Glide mode is characterized by the following:

• The combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and continues to idle in neutral.
• Transmission position display D is shown in green.
• Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: the combustion engine is switched off depending on the driving situation. All of the vehicle functions remain active.

Glide mode will be activated if the following conditions are met:

• Drive program □ is selected.
  • The speed is within a suitable range.
• The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill gradients or tight bends.
• The state of charge of the battery is sufficient.
• You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake applications).

Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive system in drive program.

Glide mode will be deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met.
Glide mode can also be prevented by the following parameters:

• Incline
• Downhill gradient
• Temperature
• Height
• Speed
• Operating status of the engine
• Traffic situation

Function of 4MATIC

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP ^® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible especially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane.
In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary.

Refueling

Refueling the vehicle

WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

▶ Fire, open flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.
Before refueling, switch off the vehicle and, if installed, the stationary heater,

212 Driving and parking

and leave them switched off during refu- eling.

WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale fuel vapor.
▶ Keep children away from fuel.
Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.

If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting.
Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor.

Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body.
To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process.

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Vehicles with a gasoline engine:

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

▶ Refuel only with low-sulfur spark-ignition engine fuel.

This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:

• Diesel
  • Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e. g. E15, E85, E100
  • Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100
  • Gasoline with metallic additives

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel:

▶ Do not switch on the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel:

- Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high

- Consult a qualified specialist workshop. - Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

NOTE Damage to the fuel system due to overfilling the fuel tank

Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

If too much fuel has been added due, for example, to a faulty filling pump:

Do not switch on the vehicle.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle

▶ Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.

Requirements

• The vehicle is unlocked.

Observe the notes on service fluids and fuel. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified on the information label in the fuel filler flap. Otherwise, engine output may be reduced and fuel consumption increased.

① Fuel filler flap

② Bracket for fuel filler cap

③ Tire pressure table

QR code for rescue card

5 Fuel type

Press on the rear part of fuel filler flap ①.

Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it.

214 Driving and parking

Insert fuel filler cap into bracket ② from above.
Fully insert the pump nozzle into the tank shaft, hook it in place and refuel.
Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off.
Replace the cap on the tank shaft and turn it clockwise until it engages audibly.
Close fuel filler flap ①.

Parking

Parking the vehicle

WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehicle rolling away

If the vehicle is not securely parked sufficiently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient.

On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving.

Apply the parking brake.
▶ Switch the transmission to position P.

WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts

Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite.

Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components.
In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.

- operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example:

• releasing the parking brake.
• changing the gearbox position.
• starting the vehicle.

▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.

▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away

▶ Always secure the vehicle against rolling away.

NOTE Damage due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIRMATIC or E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL: The vehicle can lower because of temperature differences or longer non-operational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body.

When stopping the vehicle and when driving off, make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body.

Bring the vehicle to a standstill by depressing the brake pedal.
On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving.
Apply the electric parking brake.

Engage transmission position [P] in a stationary vehicle with the brake pedal depressed (→ page 208).
Switch off the vehicle by pressing button ①.
▶ Release the service brake slowly.
▶ Get out of the vehicle and lock it.
When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.

Automatic vehicle shut-off when locking

Your vehicle is equipped with automatic engine shut-off.

When you leave the vehicle ready to drive, the vehicle will be turned off when locked under the following conditions:

• The ignition is switched on or the engine is running.
• Transmission position P is engaged.
  • The driver's door is closed.

• In addition, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:

• The vehicle is locked using the vehicle key.

• Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the vehicle is locked via the locking button in the trunk lid.
• Vehicles with flush-mounted door handles: the vehicle is locked via one of the two outer sensor surfaces on the door handle of a closed door.

The engine will continue to run if the vehicle is not locked as described after it has been left. In this case, switch off the vehicle manually.

Automatic switch-off of the vehicle after a period of time (depending on equipment)

When the engine is running, the following display message appears in the driver's display when leaving the vehicle or after a certain time stopped in transmission position P : Vehicle Ready to Drive Shutdown Occurs When Locked or Automatically in XX Mins

The vehicle will then automatically switch off after a total of 20 minutes of time stopped.

To avoid automatic switch-off after the time has elapsed, confirm the corresponding mes-

sage in the central display of the multimedia system.

In the following cases, the engine continues to run:

• if the vehicle is not locked as described after leaving it
• if the automatic switch-off is not displayed by the display message
• if, once the time has elapsed, the automatic switch-off has been deactivated via the corresponding message in the central display

In this case, switch off the vehicle manually.

Garage door opener

■ Programming buttons for the garage door opener

DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning.

▶ Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient ventilation.

WARNING Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door

When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement.

▶ Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's movement.

Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener:

• Doors with a safety stop and reversing feature
• Doors which conform to the current U.S. safety standards

Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.

Requirements

• The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of movement of the door.
  • The vehicle is switched on.
  • The vehicle has not been started.

The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on.

Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz.

Radio equipment approval number:

• NZLMUAHL5 (USA)
  • 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada)

Press and hold button ①, ② or ③ that you wish to program. Indicator lamp ④ flashes yellow.
① It can take up to 20 seconds before the indicator lamp flashes yellow.
Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp ④ continues to flash yellow.
Point remote control ⑤ from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button ①, ② or ③.
Press and hold button ⑥ of remote control ⑤ until one of the following signals appears:

- Indicator lamp lights up green continuously. Programming is complete.

- Indicator lamp ④ flashes green. Programming was successful. Additionally, synchronization of the rolling code with the door system must be carried out.

If indicator lamp ④ does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure.
Release all of the buttons.

218 Driving and parking

① The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.

Synchronizing the rolling code

Requirements

• The door system uses a rolling code.
- The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive.
- The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range of movement of the door.

Press the program button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds.

Press previously programmed button ①, ② or ③ repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is completed.

① Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.

Troubleshooting when programming the remote control

Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control ⑤ is supported.

Replace the batteries in remote control 5.

Hold remote control ⑤ at various angles from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

Hold remote control ⑤ at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear-view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position.

On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button ⑥ on remote control ⑤ again before transmission ends.

Angle the antenna line of the garage door opener unit toward the remote control.

① It is possible that older garage doors cannot be operated using the remote control in the inside rearview mirror even after you have

successfully performed the measures described above. If this is the case, contact the HomeLink® Hotline.

i Support and additional information on programming:

- on the toll free HomeLink® Hotline on 1-800-355-3515

• on the Internet at https://www.homelink.com/mercedes

Opening or closing the garage door

Requirements

- The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door.

Press and hold buttons ①, ② or ③ until the door opens or closes.

If the indicator lamp ④ flashes yellow after approx. 20 seconds: Press the previously pressed button again and keep it pressed until the door opens or closes.

Clearing the garage door opener memory
Press and hold buttons ① and ③. Indicator lamp ④ lights up yellow.
If indicator lamp ④ flashes green: release buttons ① and ③.
The entire memory has been deleted.

Electric parking brake

Function of the electric parking brake (applying automatically)

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they could, in particular:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users.
  • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic.
  • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example.

In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion by, for example:

• releasing the parking brake.
  • changing the gearbox position.
• starting the vehicle.
  ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
  When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.
  ▶ Keep the key out of reach of children.

The electric parking brake is applied if the transmission is in position P and one of the following conditions is fulfilled:

• The vehicle is switched off.

- The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake ( page 220).

In the following situations, the electric parking brake is also applied:

• The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary.
  • Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill.
• In addition, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:

The vehicle is switched off.

The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened.

• There is a system malfunction.
• The power supply is insufficient.
• The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period.

When the electric parking brake is applied, the red PARK (USA) or (P) (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.

① The electric parking brake is not automatically applied if the vehicle is switched off by the ECO start/stop function.

Function of the electric parking brake (releasing automatically)

The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled:

• The driver's door is closed.
• The vehicle has been started.
- The transmission is in position D or R and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position P to D or R when on level ground.
- If the transmission is in position , the trunk lid must be closed.
- The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat.
If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled:
- You shift from transmission position P. or

- You have previously driven at speeds greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).

When the electric parking brake is released, the red PARK (USA) or (P) (Canada) indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out.
■ Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually

Applying

Push handle ①. The red PARK (USA) or (P) (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.
The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red PARK (USA) or (P) (Canada) indicator lamp is lit continuously.

Releasing

Switch on the vehicle.
Pull handle ①. The red PARK (USA) or (P) (Canada) indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out.
Emergency braking
Press and hold handle Ⓐ. As long as the vehicle is in motion, the Release Parking Brake message is displayed and the red PARK (USA) or (P) (Canada) indicator lamp flashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red PARK (USA) or (C) (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle

If a collision is detected on the locked vehicle when the tow-away alarm is activated and collision detection is switched on, you will receive a message in the multimedia system when the vehicle is switched on.

You will receive information about the following points:

• The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged.
  • The force of the impact.

The following situation can lead to inadvertent activation:

- The parked vehicle is moved, for example, in a two-story garage.

i Deactivate the tow-away alarm in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deactivate the tow-away alarm, collision detection will also be deactivated.

You can permanently deactivate collision detection via the multimedia system ( page 221).

If the battery is severely discharged, the function for detecting a collision on a parked vehicle is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start.

System limits

Detection may be restricted in the following situations:

• the vehicle is damaged without impact, for example, if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key
  • an impact occurs at low speed
  • the electric parking brake is not applied
  ① You are responsible for your vehicle. Convince yourself that your vehicle is free of damage and roadworthy.

Setting collision detection on a parked vehicle

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle
▶ Open/Close ▶ Vehicle Protection
Activate or deactivate the function via Collision Notification.
A maximum of three incidents can be registered. Up to 15 photos are taken for every incident. In the event of another incident, the photos of the first incident will be overwritten if they have not been deleted already.

Activating or deactivating the collision photos function

Note possible legal restrictions in some countries regarding automatic recording of the vehicle surroundings.

▶ Activate or deactivate Collision Photos.
Transferring collision photos with the Mercedes me App
▶ Select Upload Collision Photos.
▶ Select Upload Automatically.

222 Driving and parking

Scan the generated QR code on the central display with the Mercedes me App. The encrypted collision photos will then be uploaded to Mercedes me.
① Any device that can scan QR codes can be used to view the collision photos in the Mercedes me App.

Copying the collision photos to a USB flash drive

Connect a USB flash drive.
▶ Select Manage Collision Photos.
▶ Select Copy (USB).
All collision photos will be copied to the USB flash drive.
To ensure secure operation, only use with FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices.

Deleting collision photos

▶ Select Manage Collision Photos.
Select Delete. All collision photos will be deleted.

Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended period

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse.

The 12 V battery may also be impaired or damaged by heavy discharging.

i Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Standby mode (extension of the starter battery's period out of use)

Standby mode function (i) This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimized during extended periods of non-operation.

Standby mode is characterized by the following:

• The starter battery is preserved.
- The maximum non-operational time appears in the driver's display.
- The connection to online services is interrupted.

If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system:

• The vehicle is switched on.
• The vehicle has not been started.

Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the vehicle.

Charge the starter battery in the following situations:

• The vehicle's non-operational time has to be extended.
• The starter battery charge level is insufficient for standby mode.
  (i) Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.

Activating/deactivating standby mode (parking up the vehicle)

Requirements

• The power supply is switched on.

• The vehicle is not switched on.

Multimedia system:

Settings Vehicle
▶ Other Functions
▶ Activate or deactivate Standby Mode.

Driving and driving safety systems

Driving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems that assist you in driving, parking and maneuvering the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for you paying attention to your surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems.

Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

Some driving systems can regulate or limit the speed to a previously set value. Draw attention to the stored speed when changing drivers.

Information on vehicle sensors and cameras

Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.

① Multifunction camera
② Cameras in the outside mirrors
3 Front radar
4 Front camera

5

Corner radars

6

Ultrasonic sensors

7

Rear-view camera

A

WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehicle sensors and cameras

If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident.

Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean.
Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.

Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush ( page 371). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional

license plate bracket, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range.

If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grill, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop.

The rear-view camera can extend and retract automatically for the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image in the display.

Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems

• ABS (→ page 225)
• BAS (→ page 225)
- ESP® (→ page 226)
- ESP® Crosswind Assist (→ page 227)
• EBD (→ page 227)

• STEER CONTROL (→ page 227)
• HOLD function ( page 227)
• Hill Start Assist (→ page 229)
• ATTENTION ASSIST (→ page 229)
• Traffic Sign Assist (→ page 250)
• Traffic light view (→ page 254)
• AIRMATIC (→ page 261)
• E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL (→ page 263)

Driving Assistance Package

The availability of some functions or sub-functions of the Driving Assistance Package is equipment- or country-specific. The functions of your Driving Assistance Package may differ from the functions listed here.

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 231)

• Active Speed Limit Assist (→ page 236)

• Route-based speed adaptation ( page 236)

• Active Brake Assist (→ page 246)

• Active Steering Assist (→ page 239)

• Active Emergency Stop Assist (→ page 241)

• Active Lane Change Assist ( page 242)
• Active Stop-and-Go Assist (→ page 238)
• Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ( page 255)
• Active Lane Keeping Assist ( page 258)
- PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side (→ page 52)

Parking Package

The availability of individual functions depends on the country and equipment.

• 360° camera (→ page 266)
• Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 270)
• Active Parking Assist (→ page 274)
• Remote Parking Assist (→ page 279)
- Memory Parking Assist (country-dependent) (→ page 285)

Function of ABS

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations:

• During braking, for instance, at maximum full-stop braking or if there is insufficient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from locking.
  • Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

System limits

• ABS is active from speeds of approx. 3 mph (5 km/h).
- ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yellow ABS warning lamp lights up continuously after the vehicle is started.

Function of BAS

WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System)

If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased.

▶ Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force.

If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated:

• BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure.
- BAS can shorten the braking distance.
• ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Function of ESP ^®

WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated

If you deactivate ESP ^® , ESP ^® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization.

▶ ESP ^® should only be deactivated in the following situations.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP ^® ) can monitor and improve driving stability and traction in the following situations within physical limits:

• When pulling away on wet or slippery roads.
• When braking.

If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP ^® can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways:

• Applying the brakes to one or more wheels
- Adapting the engine output according to the situation

When ESP ^ is deactivated, the □ OFF warning lamp will light up continuously:

• Driving stability will no longer be improved.
  • The drive wheels could spin.
  • ETS/4ETS traction control will still be active.

① When ESP ^ is deactivated, you will still be assisted by ESP ^ when braking.

When the warning lamp flashes, at least one wheel has reached its grip limit:

• Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.
• Do not deactivate ESP ^© .
• Depress the accelerator pedal only as far as is necessary when pulling away

Deactivate ESP ^® in the following situations to improve traction:

• When using snow chains.
• In deep snow.
• On sand or gravel.

① Spinning the wheels will cause them to dig in to the surface, thereby enhancing traction.

If the warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.

Observe the following information:

• Warning and indicator lamps (→ page 508)
• Display messages (→ page 443)

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery roads.

ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways:

• The brakes are applied to the drive wheels individually if they spin.
• More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

Influence of drive programs on ESP®

The drive programs enable ESP ^® to adapt to different weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the

selected drive program, the appropriate ESP ^30 mode will be activated ( page 206).

Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist

ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle in the lane:

• ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly.
• The vehicle is stabilized by means of individual brake application on one side.

Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Multimedia system:

i ESP ^ can only be activated/deactivated using quick access when at least one other function is available in quick access. ESP ^ can otherwise be found in the Assistance menu.

Select ESP.
▶ Select On or Off.

ESP ^ is deactivated if the ESP ^ OFF warning lamp lights up continuously on the driver's display.

Observe any information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown on the driver's display.

Function of EBD

Electronic Brakeforce Distribution (EBD) is characterized by the following:

• Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels.
- Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends.

Function of STEER CONTROL

STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.

This steering recommendation is given in the following situations:

• both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake
  • the vehicle starts to skid

System limits

STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• ESP ^ is deactivated.
• ESP ^ is malfunctioning.
  • The steering is malfunctioning.

If ESP ^® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the power steering.

HOLD function

HOLD function

The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic.

The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.

System limits

The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary.

• The incline must not be greater than 30%.

Activating/deactivating the HOLD function

WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle

If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away:

• If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply.
• If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it.

Requirements

• The vehicle is stationary.
- The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened.
- The vehicle has been started or has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.
• The electric parking brake is released.
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
• The transmission is in position D, R or N.

Activating the HOLD function

Depress the brake pedal, and after a short time quickly depress further until the HOLD display appears in the driver's display.
Release the brake pedal.

Deactivating the HOLD function

▶ Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or

Depress the brake pedal until the HOLD display disappears from the driver's display.

The HOLD function is deactivated in the following situations:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.
• The transmission is shifted to position P.
- The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.

In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position and/or by the electric parking brake:

• The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened.
  • The vehicle is switched off.
  • There is a system malfunction.
  • The power supply is insufficient.

In addition, the Brake Immediately message may appear in the driver's display and a horn tone may sound at regular intervals.

Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message disappears. The HOLD function is deactivated.
Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Function of Hill Start Assist

Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when you pull away on a hill under the following conditions:

• The transmission is in position D or R.
• The electric parking brake is released.

This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away

After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle.

Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not

leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function of ATTENTION ASSIST

(i) Depending on the country and equipment, ATTENTION ASSIST offers a microsleep detection sub-function. This function is available only in conjunction with the driver camera on the driver's display (→ page 313).

ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on freeways and highways. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver are detected, the system will suggest taking a break.

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular and timely breaks that allow you to rest properly.

You can choose between two settings:

• Standard: normal system sensitivity.
- Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver will be warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST will be adapted accordingly.

If fatigue or increasing inattention is detected, the following warning will appear on the driver's display: ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!. You can acknowledge the message and take a break if necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message will appear.

If the driver's display shows a warning, a service area search will be offered in the multimedia system. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this rest area.

When you restart the vehicle, ATTENTION ASSIST will be switched on automatically. The last sensitivity level selected will remain stored.

The following information will be shown on the driver's display:

• The length of the journey since the last break
• The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST:

The more segments ② of the circle displayed, the higher the attention level detected.

• Fewer segments ② will be displayed in the circle as your attention level decreases.
  • Microsleep detection status ①:

Deactivated: display Ⓤ will be hidden.

- Activated but not operational: display ① will be grey.

Activated and operational: display ① will be green.

Microsleep detection

If the system, which uses the driver camera, detects indicators of microsleep, the ATTENTION ASSIST Nodding Off Take a Break! warning message will appear on the driver's display and a warning tone will sound simultaneously. This warning message must be confirmed by Touch Control. It is recommended that you take a break immediately.

If the driver does not react to the microsleep warning, an emergency stop may be initiated by the system ( page 241).

System limits

ATTENTION ASSIST operates in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. The microsleep detection function is available at a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) and above.

If the system is not available due to a fault, the ATTENTION ASSIST warning light will light up permanently on the driver's display

ATTENTION ASSIST will function only to a limited extent and warnings may be delayed or not occur in the following situations in particular:

• If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes.
• If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes).
  • If there is a strong side wind.
• If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration).
• If the Steering Assist function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active.
  • If the clock is set to the incorrect time.
• If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving situations.

- If ESP ^® is not available

Microsleep detection also will not function when the driver camera cannot detect your eyes; for example, as a result of the following factors:

• Your eyes are obscured due to the steering column position, for example.
• Poor ambient light.
  • Some types of eyeglasses or sunglasses.
• Your line of vision is outside the driver camera's field of vision.

Also observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on the driver's display.

The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment will be reset and restarted when you continue your journey in the following situations:

• You switch off the vehicle.
• You unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).

Setting ATTENTION ASSIST

Multimedia system:

Setting the sensitivity

Select next to ATTENTION ASSIST.
▶ Select Standard or Sensitive.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist maintains the set speed when driving freely. If vehicles are detected ahead, the set distance is maintained, if necessary until the vehicle comes to a standstill. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range:

- Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 100 mph (160 km/h)

• Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 130 mph (210 km/h)
The adjustable set speed may differ if a limit speed (e.g. winter tire limit) is stored.

Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:

• Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (energy-saving, comfortable or dynamic) ( page 205)

• Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane
  • Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package:

• Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles)

• Takes into account one-sided overtaking restrictions on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (country-dependent)

232 Driving and parking

In the DYNAMIC SELECT menu, it is possible to set the driving mode of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. Depending on which drive program is selected, the driving characteristics can be geared towards energy economy, comfort or dynamic performance. In the Active Distance Assist menu, the driving style can be permanently set to Comfort or Dynamic ( page 238).

Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driving Assistance Package: if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has braked the vehicle to a standstill, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front when it drives off again within 30 seconds if the system detects that the driver is holding the steering wheel. If a critical situation is detected in the surrounding area when driving off, such as a person in the vehicle path, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers ( page 223).

Display in the driver's display in the Assistance menu

① Vehicle in front
2 Distance indicator
③ Set specified distance

Vehicle detected in front ① is highlighted in green. It may also be in the lane to the left of your vehicle in situations where it is not permitted to overtake on the right, for example on highways.

Permanent status display

Gray: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected but not yet active.

Green speedometer, gray vehicle: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speed set.
Green: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active and vehicle detected.

The stored speed is shown under the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the status display is grayed out.

If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up.

When the set specified distance is increased or reduced, the □ display will briefly appear.

The green vehicle symbol will be displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to drive.
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive mode. The following message appears briefly in the driver's display 📄 Suspended.

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example:

• In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light.
• The windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered.
  • If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
• In parking garages or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients.
• If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles.

In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid.

Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations.

WARNING Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accelerate or brake in the following cases, for example:

• If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC.
• If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed.
• If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects.
  ▶ Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to brake at all times.
  Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

A WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning.

Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front.
Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.

WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction:

- when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes

Driving and parking

• to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
• to complex traffic conditions
• to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic

As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations.

▶ Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly.

Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Requirements

• The electric parking brake is released.
- ESP® is activated and is not intervening.
• The transmission is in position D.
- All the doors are closed.
- Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed.
- Snow chain mode is not active (→ page 401).

RES ^10 | Adopts the stored/detected speed
CANCEL Deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
① Increases/reduces the speed
Increases/reduces the specified distance
Activates/deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the respective button with only one finger or swipe on the control panel.

Activates/deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Press

Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

To activate without a stored speed: on control panel press SET/+ on the upper section or SET/- on the lower section or RES/. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

or To activate with a stored speed: press RES/P. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The last stored speed is called up and maintained by the vehicle. If the stored speed has been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.

Increasing or reducing the speed

To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel ①.

- The stored speed is increased by 1 mph (1 km/h).

To reduce the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel ①.

- The stored speed is reduced by 1 mph (1 km/h).

or

Briefly press SET/+ on the upper section or SET/- on the lower section of control panel ①.

The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h).

or

▶ Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

Press SET/+ on the upper section of control panel ①.

Adopting the limit speed shown on the driver's display

To activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press SET/+, SET/- or RES®.

To adopt the displayed speed limit: press RESI.

The limit speed displayed on the driver's display is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed, or limits its speed accordingly.

A speed limit shown on the driver's display is only adopted while driving, not when stationary.

Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal. Press RES/ ^® .

or

Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly.

The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.

Increasing or reducing the specified distance from the vehicle in front

Press

The □ display appears. The specified distance is reduced by one level.

If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level.

Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

A

WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat

If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.

Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat.

Press CANCEL

If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.

Function of Active Speed Limit Assist

If a changed speed limit is detected and the automatic adoption of speed limits is switched on, this is automatically adopted as the stored speed ( page 238). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not adopted.

The vehicle's speed is adjusted when it is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display on the driver's display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign.

If you are driving on German highways and there is no speed limit, the system uses the speed stored for a stretch of road with no speed limit as the set speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on a stretch of road with no speed limit, the recommended speed of 80 mph (130 km/h) is adopted.

If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted.

The maximum permissible speed does not take the road condition and current weather and traffic conditions into account. Adjust your speed accordingly, when necessary.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers ( page 223).

System limits

The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs ( page 250). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system.

Adjust your speed in these situations.

WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed

The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as:

• at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h)
- in wet conditions or in fog
- when towing a trailer
▶ Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations.
Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.

Function of route-based speed adaptation

When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an energy-saving, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in

front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account.

Route-based speed adaptation can be activated in the multimedia system ( page 238).

The following route events are taken into account:

• Bends
• Traffic circles
• T-intersections
• Turns and exits
  • Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic)

Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indicator is switched on and one of the following situations is detected:

• Turning at intersections
• Driving on slowing-down lanes
• Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes

The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and considering other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, traffic circles

and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a standstill.

Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases:

• If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event and it is therefore assumed that the route event is not relevant to the driver.
• If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process.

System limits

Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed.

In difficult conditions, the speed selection made by the system may not always be suitable. This applies to the following situations, forexample:

• The road's course is not clearly visible
- Narrowing of the road
- Varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes, e.g. at toll stations
• Wet road surfaces, snow or ice

In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.

WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation

Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations:

• If the driver does not follow the calculated route
  • If map data is not up-to-date or available
  • In the event of roadworks
  • In bad weather or road conditions
  • If the accelerator pedal is depressed
  • In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations

Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.

Setting Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC driving styles

Requirements

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.

Multimedia system:

Settings

▶ Assistance

Active Distance Assist

Selecting a driving style

Select Based on DYNAMIC SELECT, Dynamic or Comfortable.

① Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 234).

Setting speed adaptation

Select Adopt Speed Limit or Route-based Speed Adaptation. When these functions are active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on a route event ahead or a speed limit.

When one of the following systems is active, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

- Variable limiter

(i) Further information on speed adaptation ( page 236).

Function of Active Stop-and-Go Assist

Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you when in traffic jams on multi-lane roads with separate roadways by automatically pulling away within up to 60 seconds and with moderate steering maneuvers. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in.

Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers ( page 223).

Active Stop-and-Go Assist activates automatically when all the following conditions are met:

• You are in a traffic jam on a highway or high-speed major road.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated and active ( page 234).
  • Active Steering Assist is activated and active ( page 241).
• You are traveling no faster than 35 mph (60 km/h).

When Active Stop-and-Go Assist is active the status display appears on the driver's display.

System limits

The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Stop-and-Go Assist ( page 239).

Active Steering Assist

Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the vehicle's speed, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference.

① Depending on the country, Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference in the lower speed range. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance outside the center of the lane.

If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.

Permanent status display on the driver's display

Gray: activated and passive

Green: activated and active

Red, flashing: prompt to the driver to actively confirm or transition from active to passive status, system limit detected

During the transition from active to passive status, the symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the symbol is shown as gray on the driver's display.

Touch detection

The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with a numbered indicator (1) pointing to the dashboard (no text or symbols on the steering wheel itself)

If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, a visual warning is given first. Display ① appears on the driver's display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message.

If the driver does not react to this warning for a considerable period, an emergency stop is initiated ( page 241).

The warning is not issued or is stopped as soon as the system detects that the driver is touching the steering wheel.

Touch detection may be limited or may not function if there is no direct contact between hand and steering wheel, e.g. if you are wearing gloves or if there is a steering wheel cover on the steering wheel.

If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers ( page 223).

System limits

Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances:

• Visibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road.
• There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.

• Insufficient road illumination.
- The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker.
- No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in construction areas or at intersections.
- The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
- If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings are not detected.
• The road is narrow and winding.
• There are obstacles in the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers.

The system does not provide assistance in the following situations:

• On very tight bends and when turning.
• When crossing intersections.

• At traffic circles or toll stations.

• When actively changing lane without switching on the turn signal indicator.

• When the tire pressure is too low.

WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops functioning

If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane.

▶ Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully.
▶ Always steer the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions.

WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes

The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions.
▶ Steer according to traffic conditions.

Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist

Requirements

• ESP ^ is activated, but is not intervening.
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated.

Multimedia system:

Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist

Active Emergency Stop Assist uses touch sensors to monitor whether the driver is holding the steering wheel and initiates an emergency stop if necessary.

If Active Steering Assist is deactivated, the accelerator and brake pedal are monitored as well as the steering wheel. A warning is issued when the steering wheel is not being held or when a pedal is not depressed, and the vehicle is in danger of leaving the lane.

If Active Steering Assist is switched off, the system is available from a speed of approx. 37 mph (60 km/h).

Front view of a Mercedes-Benz car steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Active Emergency Stop Assist issues the following warnings in order:

• Display message ① appears on the driver's display.
• In addition to display ① a warning tone sounds.

• The message Initiating Emergency Stop appears on the driver's display, a continuous warning tone sounds, the vehicle no longer accelerates and, if necessary, slight belt tensioning is carried out.

• The vehicle speed is reduced in increments until it is at a standstill. Sharp brake impulses are also produced.
  ① Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active and the driver unfastens their seat belt and opens the driver's door, an emergency stop can be initiated immediately.

Depending on the country, a lane change to the adjacent right-hand lane is carried out, if possible. When automatic braking is initiated, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Depending on the country, the hazard warning light system is switched on.

When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out:

• The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.
• The vehicle is unlocked.
• If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center.

Before automatic braking is initiated, you can cancel Active Emergency Stop Assist by steering.

You can cancel the intervention by Active Emergency Stop Assist after automatic braking is initiated through one of the following actions:

• Accelerating or braking: the emergency stop is canceled, but the warning message, warning tone and power steering remain active.
  • Steering: power-assisted steering is canceled, the warning message and warning tone remain active and the vehicle continues to be braked.

Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an emergency stop a maximum of three times within a driving cycle. After that, Active Steering Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are disabled until the vehicle has been restarted.

System limits

For the detection of vehicles and other obstacles, observe the system limits of the following functions:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 231)
• Active Steering Assist ( page 239)
• Active Lane Change Assist (→ page 242)

• Active Brake Assist ( page 246)

Active Lane Change Assist

Function of Active Lane Change Assist

Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes and is activated by indicating briefly.

For this, the following conditions must be fulfilled:

• You are driving on a freeway or high-speed major road.
  • The vehicle's speed is between approximately 40 mph (65 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h).
• The neighboring lane is separated by a broken lane marking.
• No vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane.
  • Active Lane Change Assist is selected in the multimedia system.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are switched on and active.

Display on the driver's display in the Assistance menu

Two grayscale images showing cars on a highway, one with a lightning bolt indicating a collision or damage (no text or symbols)

① Green arrow: lane change initiated
2 Red arrow: lane change canceled

When Active Lane Change Assist is available, the display appears along with green arrows on the driver's display. If the system has been activated but is not currently available, the display

will appear along with gray arrows on the driver's display.

If no vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change will begin after the driver has indicated briefly. The lane change will be shown to the driver with a flashing green arrow next to the steering wheel symbol. Green arrow will be displayed in the appropriate adjacent lane on the driver's display in the Assistance menu. The message Lane Change to the Left, forexample, will also appear.

If a lane change is not possible directly after the driver has activated the turn signal indicator because an obstacle has been detected, for example, the arrow will also flash in green next to the steering wheel symbol 🔍 and the neighboring lane will continue to be monitored. When the lane becomes free, a lane change will be carried out and the message Lane Change to the

Left, forexample, will appear on the driver's display. If the green arrows stop flashing, the lane change must be activated again.

Active Lane Change Assist can be canceled in various situations, including the following:

• Change in the surrounding conditions (e.g. detected obstacle).
• The driver steers too sharply or in the opposite direction.
• The driver moves the turn signal indicator in the opposite direction.
  • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active Steering Assist is deactivated.
• The vehicle cannot make the lane change as planned.

Cancelation of Active Lane Change Assist is displayed as follows:

• The arrow in the selected direction of travel turns red.
• A corresponding message also appears on the driver's display.
• In certain circumstances a warning tone sounds.

WARNING Risk of accident when changing lane to an occupied adjacent lane

Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free.

The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free.

Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users.

▶ Monitor the lane change.

WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops functioning

If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guarantee that the system will remain active.

Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque.

▶ Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary.

Automatic Lane Change

Automatic Lane Change is a sub-function of Active Lane Change Assist. It can assist the driver in deciding when a lane change is appropriate and in executing it.

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrectly triggered lane change

The system cannot always clearly recognize all situations in which a lane change is appropriate.

The system can initiate a lane change even though the traffic situation is not suitable or the neighboring lane is not available, not usable or occupied.

▶ Always monitor the traffic situation.
If necessary, cancel the lane change by holding the steering wheel or counter-steering slightly and return the vehicle to its own lane.

You can cancel a lane change initiated by the system at any time by holding the steering wheel or

countersteering slightly and returning the vehicle to its own lane.

For an Automatic Lane Change, the following conditions must be met:

• The conditions for activating Active Lane Change Assist are fulfilled.
  • Automatic Lane Change is activated in the multimedia system.
• You are driving on a highway in a country where the function is available.
• The road currently being traveled allows lane changes, for example there are no tight bends.
• The vehicle's speed is between approximately 40 mph (65 km/h) and 85 mph (140 km/h).

Active Lane Change Assist can initiate an automatic lane change in various situations, including the following:

• The set desired speed of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be achieved due to a slower vehicle in front.

• There is little traffic and the set desired speed of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can also be achieved in a slower lane.

• A lane change is necessary to follow the set route in the navigation system or the road you are currently driving on. The lane change may take place before the request to do so appears in the navigation system.

• The system detects that the lane you are driving in will end soon.
  • You are in the lane furthest to the right.

In particular, Active Lane Change Assist will not carry out an automatic lane change in the following situations:

- If the vehicle is already in a lane that it should use to follow the set route in the navigation system.

- On some route sections, no lane change is made to the lanes furthest to the right.

- The system detects that the neighboring lane will end soon.

- If an automatic lane change has been canceled by the driver, no lane change in that direction will be initiated for a certain time.

- If the driver has initiated a lane change in one direction or has changed lanes manually, no

lane change in the opposite direction will be initiated for a certain time.

The same abort conditions apply to Automatic Lane Change as to driver-initiated lane changes with Active Lane Change Assist.

In addition, Automatic Lane Change can be canceled under the following conditions in particular:

• The system detects a construction site marked off by traffic cones in the vehicle's own lane or in the neighboring lane during the lane change.
• The system detects that the reason for the lane change no longer exists.

Display on the driver's display

When Automatic Lane Change is turned on, the Automatic Lane Change On message will appear. When Automatic Lane Change is available, the A display will appear in green instead of the VCAP display. If Automatic Lane Change is available but not all conditions to activate the function are currently met, the A symbols are shown in gray. If the system deems it advisable to change lanes and needs to adjust the vehicle's speed to do so, the green A will flash on the side to which a lane change is to be made.

When the automatic lane change starts, the message Lane Change to the Left will appear, forexample, and a warning tone will sound.

When the automatic lane change is canceled, the A on the side to which a lane change was to be made will turn red. Also, additional warning messages may appear and another warning tone may sound in certain situations.

System limits

The system limits of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist ( page 239).

The system may also be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• The sensors are damaged, covered or dirty (→ page 223).
  • The exterior lighting shows a defect.
• The system does not detect a suitable road, for example, on tight bends.
  • The vehicle is on a construction site.

The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable during this teach-in process, and no arrows are displayed next to the Active Steering Assist symbol [icon].

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers ( page 223).

Setting Active Lane Change Assist

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Assistance
▶ Driving ▶ Active Lane Change Assist

▶ Select Active Lane Change Assist.

Choose between the On and Off (Off) setting options.

Choose between the On, Also Automatically and Off (Off) setting options.

The Also Automatically setting option can also be switched on and off on the quick-access menu.

① If Active Steering Assist has been switched off, it will not be possible to operate Active Lane Change Assist.

Active Brake Assist

Function of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions:

• Collision warning
  • Autonomous braking function
  • Situation-dependent brake force boosting
  • Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Evasive Steering Assist
• Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Intersection start-off function
• Evasive Steering Assist (country-specific)

Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision.

If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone sounds and the △ distance warning lamp lights up.

Side-by-side comparison of a car on a road, showing two views with numbered annotations (1 and 2) highlighting the lane and side.

On the Assistance menu, an insufficient distance ① to the vehicle in front will be displayed in red. If you further reduce the distance, the vehicle in front will also be highlighted in red. When the system detects a risk of collision, red radar waves ② will appear in front of the vehicle.

① Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning will occur in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.

① Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning Support is activated, the Active Brake Assist warning will also be accompanied by ambient lighting ( page 171).

If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking may be initiated in critical situations. In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can also initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning tone and the distance warning lamp will occur at the same time as brake application.

If you apply the brakes yourself in a critical situation or apply the brakes during autonomous braking, situation-dependent brake force boosting will occur. The brake pressure increases up to maximum full-stop braking if necessary.

If autonomous braking or situation-dependent brake force boosting has occurred, pop-up Ⓞ will appear on the driver's display and then automatically disappear after a short time.

If the autonomous braking function or situation-dependent brake force boosting is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE ^® ) may also be initiated.

WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.

In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:

• Give a warning or brake without reason
• Not give a warning or not brake

Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time.

▶ Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the functions are restricted, e.g. due to activation of another driving system, the [ ] Active Brake Assist warning lamp will appear on the driver's display.

If the system is unavailable due to dirty or damaged sensors or due to a malfunction, or if the functions are restricted, the ▶!Active Brake Assist warning lamp will appear on the driver's display.

Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist.

The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges:

Collision warning

Collision warning can assist you in the following situations from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) with an intermittent warning tone and the distance warning lamp.

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning will occur in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt.

• at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists
• at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles
• at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead

- at speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists

Autonomous braking function

The autonomous braking function can intervene from speeds of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h):

• at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists
• at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles
  • at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists

Situation-dependent brake force boosting

Situation-dependent brake force boosting may intervene from speeds of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h):

• at speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists
• at speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles
• at speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead
• at speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists

Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist

You can cancel brake application by Active Brake Assist at any time by:

- Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown.

• Releasing the brake pedal.
Active Brake Assist may cancel brake application if one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
- you maneuver to avoid the obstacle
• there is no longer a risk of collision
- an obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle

Reaction to oncoming road users

Active Brake Assist can also react to detected oncoming road users:

• Reaction up to speeds of approximately 62 mph (100 km/h)
• Warning for oncoming road users via warning tone and △ distance warning lamp
• Autonomous braking application in order to reduce the severity of an accident

Intersection start-off function (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package)

If a risk of collision with other crossing vehicles is detected when you are pulling away or driving at walking pace, three red arrows pointing in the direction of the crossing road user together with the distance warning lamp will light up on the driver's display. If the situation is particularly critical, the arrows will flash. A warning tone will also sound. If you do not react to the warning in critical situations, acceleration may be restricted or autonomous braking may be initiated. Autonomous braking can also prevent the vehicle from pulling away and hold it at a standstill. In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can

also initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the △ distance warning lamp and the warning tone will occur at the same time as brake application.

If autonomous braking or situation-dependent brake force boosting has occurred, a pop-up will appear on the driver's display and then automatically disappear after a short time.

In the Late setting of Active Brake Assist, the purely visual warning level and the limitation of possible acceleration is deactivated. If the situation is particularly critical, a visual warning can still be issued, a warning tone can be emitted and autonomous braking may be initiated.

Evasive Steering Assist

WARNING Risk of accident despite Evasive Steering Assist

Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recognize objects or complex traffic situations clearly.

Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary.
End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations.
▶ Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.

Evasive Steering Assist has the following characteristics:

• Detection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles.
- Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving maneuver.
- Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving maneuver.

• Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle.
• Reaction from a speed of approximately 13 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approximately 68 mph (110 km/h).

You can cancel assistance from Evasive Steering Assist at any time by countersteering.

System limits

Full system performance will not be available for a short time after you switch the vehicle on or after you drive off. As long as the functions are restricted, the Active Brake Assist warning lamp can also be shown on the driver's display.

Depending on the environmental conditions, it may take a few minutes before full system performance is available.

The system may be impaired or may not function, particularly in the following situations:

• In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light.

• If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or obscured. (→ page 223)

• If the sensors are impaired due to interference from other radar sources, e.g. intense radar reflections in parking garages.

• If a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed.
• In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified.
• If pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range.
• If road users are hidden by other objects or are located close to other objects.
• If the typical outline of a pedestrian or cyclist cannot be distinguished from the background.
• If a pedestrian or cyclist is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects.
• If the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
• On tight bends.

Setting Active Brake Assist

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Assistance

▶ Collision Avoidance

▶ Activate or deactivate the function.
① It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated.

When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the distance warning function, the collision warning, the autonomous braking function and Evasive Steering Assist will be deactivated.

If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol will appear on the status bar of the driver's display, and the system will be reactivated the next time the vehicle is started.

Setting the time of the warnings

Select next to Active Brake Assist.
▶ Select Early, Medium or Late.

Traffic Sign Assist

Function of Traffic Sign Assist

Traffic Sign Assist detects the traffic signs with the multifunction camera and compares them

with the information on the digital road map of the navigation system. It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions on the driver's display. The maximum permissible speed can also be shown on the head-up display. The system can issue a warning when you exceed the maximum permissible speed.

In some countries, the system can provide you with further functions and can warn you when you are approaching pedestrian crossings or when you are about to drive past stop signs or red lights unintentionally.

The camera can also detect and analyze traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet).

Traffic Sign Assist portrays only selected signs on the driver's display. Actual traffic signs and speed limits have priority over traffic signs and speed limits shown on the driver's display.

Also observe the following information:

• Select a speed adapted to the traffic, surroundings and weather conditions
• Observe actual traffic signs

- Observe applicable traffic rules and regulations

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers ( page 223).

Displays on the driver's display

① Permissible speed
② Permissible speed when there is a restriction
③ Additional sign with restriction

The system can show up to two traffic signs on the driver's display simultaneously. The system always prioritizes displaying speed limits. No more

than one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed can be shown on the head-up display. If two speed signs are shown on the driver's display, e.g. when restrictions are detected, the value of left-hand speed limit is always transmitted to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for adoption and is shown on the head-up display.

Examples of traffic signs which can be displayed

Traffic Sign Assist can detect and display the following traffic signs ①:

• Speed limits
• End of the speed limit

• Overtaking restrictions

• Play streets

• Recommended speeds
  Traffic Sign Assist can detect the following additional signs ③ and, if necessary, analyze the relevance of the restrictions using other vehicle sensors:

• When wet

• Slippery road surfaces
  • In fog
• Temporary restrictions
• Exits

- Restrictions for car/trailer combinations

Traffic Sign Assist also uses data from the digital street map in the navigation system. When you leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on a highway on- or off-ramp, for example, or after you turn at an intersection, the display on the driver's display can thus be updated without a traffic sign having been detected.

i Regularly update the digital road map of the navigation system to enable Traffic Sign Assist to work optimally.

Depending on vehicle equipment and country, the system can also display speed restrictions ahead on the driver's display and on the head-up display. The driver's display can also show the distance to an upcoming lower limit speed. For this purpose, information from the digital road map of the navigation system is used. The Assistance menu can also display a dynamic visualization of the speed limits ahead.

If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the currently applicable maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears on the driver's display:

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. If the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not supported, this is displayed continuously.

If Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily or permanently unavailable due to a technical fault or if the windshield is dirty, the Traffic Sign Assist warning lamp will appear on the driver's display.

① Please also note the information on the display messages of Traffic Sign Assist ( page 443).

Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded

The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. Depending on the country, you can set in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permitted speed may be exceeded before a warning is given. You can switch off the warning or set whether the warning should be visual (by flashing the traffic sign on the driver's display) or visual and audible. The selected setting is confirmed by an indication on the driver's display.

Warning only visual
2 Warning off
① The type, duration and deployment thresholds of the speed warning as well as the possibility of setting the deployment thresholds from which the warning is to be triggered are subject to the country-specific legislation of the country in which the vehicle is delivered.

Additional functions of Traffic Sign Assist (country-specific)

Warning for no-entry signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you if you drive the wrong way down a sec-

tion of road, for example on highway on-ramps or one-way streets.

Warning at pedestrian crossings: if you approach pedestrian crossings, provided that pedestrians are in the danger zone or are moving towards it, Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h).

Warning at stop signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) if you are about to drive past a stop sign unintentionally. For this to be possible, the signs must be clear, for example if the system detects more than one stop sign, or a stop sign can be confirmed using the digital navigation map. No warning can be issued if several different signs are detected.

Warning at red lights: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) if you are about to drive through a red light unintentionally.

The following conditions must be fulfilled:
• Several traffic lights have been detected.
• All traffic lights detected are red.

• At least one of the red traffic lights detected is on the front passenger side beside the vehicle's own lane.
• The traffic lights are in the following sequence (from top to bottom): red, yellow, green.
  If the function is available, you can activate or deactivate the warnings for pedestrian crossings, stop signs and red lights in the Traffic Sign Assist menu under Further Warnings (→ page 254).

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections.
• If there is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured.

Driving and parking

• If the traffic signs are difficult to see because, for example, they are dirty, obscured, faded, iced over, damaged, inconveniently positioned, insufficiently illuminated or distorted.
  • Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly or at all due to technical factors, such as transmission frequency.
• If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect, incomplete or out of date.
• If the signs, road markings or road layout are ambiguous, e.g. in the case of traffic signs in construction sites, at exits and driveways, in the case of adjacent lanes or parallel roads, in the case of pedestrian crossing markings at traffic lights
• If the signage or road markings do not comply with the standard
• If the signage, road markings or road guidance is country-specific and deviates from the route guidance of the navigation system, e.g. in or after road works
  • After sharp turns and tight bends, when traffic signs are outside the camera's field of vision.

• If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs which are affixed or attached to them.

Setting Traffic Sign Assist

Multimedia system:

Settings Assistance

▶ Assistance ▶ Traffic Sign Assist

Activating or deactivating the speed warning

▶ Switch off Speed Limit Warning.
The speed warning remains off according to country-specific legislation until the next time the vehicle is switched on or off and the driver's door is opened.

Change the type of speed warning

Change the warning to Visual only or Visual and acoustic.

Setting the warning threshold

This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded.

Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold.

Activating or deactivating further functions of Traffic Sign Assist

Switch further warning contents on or off. The available functions are switched on or off.

Set the type of warning for other functions

Select Visual only or Visual and acoustic.

Traffic light view

Information about the traffic light view The traffic light view supports the driver when waiting in front of a red light by displaying the camera image on the central display. The camera image is displayed when the driver is the first vehicle in front of the red light and faded out when the vehicle drives off.

Displaying traffic light view

Requirements:

• The Traffic Light View option is switched on.
• A traffic light view is available.

Multimedia system:

Settings Assistance

▶ Assistance ▶ Traffic Light View

This function is not available in all countries. If the vehicle is in first position at a traffic light, the camera image with traffic light view is shown on the central display.

When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is faded out.

Activate or deactivate Traffic Light View.

Using other available functions

Select

▶ Select On Request or Automatic. If On Request is set and a traffic light view is available, the Tap Here for Traffic Light View message is displayed. The camera image is shown after confirmation of the message. When Automatic is set, the camera image is automatically displayed when the traffic light view is available.

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist

Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and 10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle. The system can detect vehicles traveling from speeds of approximately 8 mph (12 km/h) and issue a warning if they move into the monitoring range.

Status display in the driver's display

Gray: the system is activated but inoperative.

Green: the system is activated and operational.

Display in the driver's display in the menu Assistance

If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approximately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle enters the warning range immediately afterwards, the warning lamp in the corresponding outside mirror lights up red. In the Assistance menu, the lamp in outside mirror also lights up red and the lane in which the vehicle is detected is hatched out.

If a vehicle is detected in the warning range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a double warning tone sounds once, and the warning lamp flashes red in the corresponding outside mirror. Red radar

waves ② are displayed next to your vehicle in the assistance graphic.

If the turn signal indicator remains on, the display in the outside mirror flashes for all other detected vehicles, but no further warning tone sounds. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given.

① Vehicles with active ambient lighting: when the Warning Support is activated, the warning will also be highlighted by the ambient lighting ( page 171).

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers ( page 223).

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist

Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed.

Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist

Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the following:

• if you overtake a vehicle too closely so that it is in the blind spot area
• if vehicles traveling at a much faster speed approach and then overtake

Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings or intervene in such situations.

▶ Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.

Exit warning

The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants attempting to leave a stationary vehicle about approaching vehicles.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning

The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations.

▶ Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance.

If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range, the red warning lamp lights up in the corresponding outside mirror.

If a vehicle occupant pulls the door handle on the side of the warning, a warning tone sounds twice and the ambient lighting in the respective door and the warning lamps in the corresponding outside mirror flash red.

Vehicles with MBUX Interior Assistant: the visual warning begins as soon as the hand of a vehicle occupant moves into the area of the door.

① Vehicles with ambient lighting or active ambient lighting: the Warning Support of the ambient lighting can be activated and deactivated ( page 171).
The warning assistance can differ depending on the equipment and may vary according to the setting.

This exit warning is available only when Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is active.

After the vehicle is switched off, the exit warning continues to function for a few minutes. If a door is opened when the vehicle is switched off, the exit warning will be active again for a few minutes. When the outside mirror warning lamp flashes three times, the exit warning is no longer available.

The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants.

System limits

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in particular:

• if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured
• in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow
• if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes
  • if the road has very wide or narrow lanes
• if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane

Warnings may be issued in error if you are driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when you are driving alongside long vehicles, for example trucks, for a prolonged time.

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are not operational when reverse gear is engaged.

Additionally, the exit warning may be limited in the following situations:

• when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces
• when people approach the vehicle
• in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects

■ Function of the brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision.

The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and approximately 125 mph (200 km/h).

WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist

A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision.

Driving and parking

• Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application.
• Always maintain a safe distance at the sides.

Top-down view of a car detection interface showing two cars with a numbered indicator (1) and time controls at 50, 130, and 24 hours (no readable text or symbols on the car or background)

If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a display indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the driver's display.

In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. This brake application

may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.

System limits

Note the system limits of Active Blind Spot Assist; you may otherwise not recognize dangers ( page 255).

Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur especially in the following situations:

• Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle.
• A vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
- You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds.
• You brake or accelerate significantly.
- A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP ^® or Active Brake Assist.
- ESP ^® is deactivated.
- A loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected.

Activating/deactivating Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system:

Settings Assistance
▶ Collision Avoidance ▶ Active Blind Spot Assist
▶ Select Active Blind Spot Assist.
▶ Select On or Off.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction camera ( page 223) and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. The system can guide you back into your lane through a course-correcting steering intervention and additionally warns you with vibration pulses in the steering wheel. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h).

The system can intervene in the following situations:

• Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking.
- One of your front wheels goes over a lane marking.

If you activate the turn signal indicator, a steering intervention does not occur on the corresponding side.

If the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, a steering intervention will occur regardless of the turn signal indicator. If you leave the lane without activating the turn signal indicator, but danger of a collision with a moving obstacle in your lane is detected, a steering intervention does not occur.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with hands, no visible text or symbols

Display ① will appear on the driver's display and a warning tone will sound in the following situations:

• A steering intervention by Active Lane Keeping Assist lasts longer than approximately ten seconds.
• The system carries out two or more steering interventions within approximately three minutes without any steering intervention from the driver.

In the Active Lane Keeping Assist settings, you can set the sensitivity of the system and set the level of support. Additionally, you can set whether the system should react to discontinuous lane

markings or only continuous lane markings ( page 261).

Status displays for Active Lane Keeping Assist

White: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. If ESP ^® is deactivated or a tire pressure loss warning is displayed, Active Lane Keeping Assist is automatically deactivated.

Yellow: there is a malfunction. Please also observe the display messages.
Gray: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, but not operating.
7:8 Green: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated and operating. If the system is operational on only one side, only the lane marking on the corresponding side is shown in green.
Red: Active Lane Keeping Assist has guided you back into your lane with a course-correcting steering intervention. The status display will flash if there is also a haptic warning in the steering wheel. The lane

marking is shown in red only on the side for which there is a warning.

Active Lane Change Assist display in the "Assistance" menu

Top-down view of a car driving on a curved highway (no visible text or symbols)

If the front wheel of the vehicle drives over a detected lane marking, this will be highlighted red in the Assistance menu on the driver's display.

① Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning Support is activated, the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning is also accompanied by ambient lighting ( page 171).

System limits

In the following situations, a lane-correcting steering intervention may not occur but rather a warning may be given on the steering wheel, depending on the situation:

• You clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate.
• If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP ^ , Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist.
• You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration.

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
• If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections.

• If there is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured.

• If there is dirt on the bumper in the area of the radar sensors, or if they are damaged or covered.

• If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks.
• If the lane markings are worn, dark or covered.
• If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings are not detected.
• If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge.
  • If the road is very narrow and winding.

Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers ( page 223).

Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ Assistance
▶ Collision Avoidance
▶ Active Lane Keeping Assist
▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be activated and deactivated via the 📄 quick vehicle access.

(i) The settings after engine start are country-specific.

Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system:

Settings Assistance
Collision Avoidance
▶ Active Lane Keeping Assist

Setting the sensitivity

Select
▶ Select Early, Med. or Late.

The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the vehicle is started.

The standard setting for this function is dependent on the country.

Activating or deactivating assistance on dashed lane markings

Select Advanced Support.

The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the vehicle is started.

(i) The standard setting for this function is dependent on the country.
This function must be activated in vehicles without Driving Assistance Package, so that Emergency Stop Assist is fully available. Further information on Emergency Stop Assist ( page 241)

AIRMATIC

Function of AIRMATIC

NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles

Observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to recognize dangers.

AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level.

AIRMATIC includes the following components and functions:

• air suspension with automatic all-round level control
- speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption

262 Driving and parking

• increased vehicle level for greater ground clearance, selected via the multimedia system
  • ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment)

Suspension setting depending on the drive program

Drive program S and S:

• The suspension setting is firmer.
• The vehicle is set to low level -1.
- The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
- When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low level -1.

Drive program C

• The suspension setting is comfortable.
• The vehicle is set to the normal level.
- The vehicle is lowered to low level -1 when driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
- The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h).

• When driving at speeds below 75 mph (120 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low level -1.
• When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to the normal level.

Drive program

• The suspension setting is very comfortable.
• The vehicle is set to the normal level.
- When driving at speeds above approximately 87 mph (140 km/h), the vehicle is lowered.
- When driving at speeds below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h), the vehicle is raised again.

Setting the vehicle level

WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high

Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.

▶ Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions.

⚠ WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when you lower the vehicle.

⚠ WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards.

You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped.

The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.

NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering

Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered.

Make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered.

Requirements

• The vehicle has been started.
- The vehicle is not moving faster than 37 mph (60 km/h).

- When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h).

Multimedia system:

Raising the vehicle

Select 📄. The indicator lamp lights up continuously. The vehicle is raised to high level +1.

Your selection is saved. High level +1 set remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off.

The vehicle is lowered again in the following situations:

• When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
• When driving briefly between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h).
  • After selecting a different drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
  In this case, the vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program.

- When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h).

Lowering the vehicle

Select 📄. The indicator lamp goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program.
① In the Sport drive program, only the normal vehicle level is possible when the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack).

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL

Function of E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is an electrohydraulic suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce energy consumption. The suspension setting is adjusted depending on the road condi-

tion, vehicle load and the drive program selected. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level.

The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function detects areas of unevenness in the road before you drive over them by means of a multifunction camera. This reduces chassis movements.

The damping is adjusted individually to each wheel and depends on the following factors:

• Driving style, e.g. sporty
  • Road condition, e.g. bumps
• Drive program
  E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is comprised of the following functions and components:
• Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: ROAD SURFACE SCAN
  • Curve inclination function CURVE
  • Air suspension with automatic level control

• Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel consumption

• ADS PLUS: Adaptive Damping System with constant adjustment of damping characteristics

• DYNAMIC SELECT button for selecting a drive program ( page 206)
• Manual level adjustment via the multimedia system

Drive programs [S] and [S+]

• The suspension setting is firmer.
• The vehicle is set to low level -1.
- The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above approx. 75 mph (120 km/h).
- When driving at speeds below approx. 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low level -1.
• ROAD SURFACE SCAN is active.

Drive programs C, CV and C

• C and CV: the suspension setting is comfortable.

- C: the suspension setting is very comfortable.

• The vehicle is set to the normal level.
- The vehicle is lowered to low level -1 when driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
- The vehicle is lowered to low level -2 when driving at speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h).
- When driving at speeds below 75 mph (120 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to low level -1.
- When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again to the normal level.
• ROAD SURFACE SCAN is active.
- CV and C: the curve inclination function is active.

Function of ROAD SURFACE SCAN

This function is not available in all countries. The ROAD SURFACE SCAN function monitors the road in front of your vehicle using a multifunction camera ( page 223). ROAD SURFACE SCAN detects unevenness in the road surface, e.g. bumps, before the vehicle drives over them. Chas-

sis movements are reduced and driving comfort is increased.

ROAD SURFACE SCAN is automatically activated if the following conditions are met:

• No raised vehicle level is set.
• You are driving at a speed between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).

System limits

ROAD SURFACE SCAN may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• If the road is insufficiently lit, e.g. when it is dark.
• In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, direct sunlight or greatly varying ambient light, or if there is glare.
• If the windshield in the area of multifunction camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered.
• If the road surface has no optical structure or reflects light.

• If you are driving too close to the vehicle in front.

• If sections of the route have a very small radius of curvature.

• During abrupt driving maneuvers, e.g. heavy braking or sudden acceleration.

Observe the notes on cleaning the multifunction camera ( page 371).

Setting the vehicle level

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high

Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.

▶ Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions.

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the

vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle.

Make sure nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when you lower the vehicle.

⚠ WARNING Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering

Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards.

You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped.

The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody.

NOTE Damage due to vehicle lowering

Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered.

Make sure that there are no obstacles such as curbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered.

Requirements

• The vehicle has been started.
- The vehicle is not moving faster than 37 mph (60 km/h).
- When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h).

Multimedia system:

Raising the vehicle

Select 📄. The indicator lamp lights up continuously. The vehicle is raised to off-road level +1.

Your selection is saved. Off-road level+1 set remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off.

The vehicle is lowered again in the following situations:

• When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
• When driving briefly between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h).
• After selecting a different drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. In this case, the vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program.
• When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster than 19 mph (30 km/h).

Lowering the vehicle

Select 📄. The indicator lamp goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the active drive program.

In the Sport drive program, only the normal vehicle level is possible when the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack).

360° camera

Function of the 360° camera

The 360° camera is a system that consists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The cameras assist you when you are parking, for example, or at exits with reduced visibility.

The 360° camera includes the following cameras and evaluates their images:

• Rear view camera
• Front camera
• Two side cameras in the outside mirrors

The cameras are only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons,

animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking.

Camera Views menu overview

Parking Assistance menu
2 Top view with image from the front camera
3 Top view with image from the rear view camera
4 3D view, left-hand side of the vehicle

5 3D view, right-hand side of the vehicle
6 3D auto view
To activate/deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 273)
To set the GPS activation point (→ page 270)
To switch between standard and wide-angle view
① In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display is shown (→ page 270).

Function of the guide lines

Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area
② Lane marking the course the tires will take with the current steering angle (dynamic)
9 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic)
④ Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area
When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes and guide lines are displayed in green instead of yellow ( page 274).

Top view with image from the front or rear view camera

Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 270)
② Your vehicle from above
3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle

3D view, left/right-hand side of the vehicle

NOTE Risk of accident due to objects being severely distorted in the display or not displayed at all

Due to the projection of the cameras, objects in the 3D views may be severely distorted when displayed or not displayed at all.

Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking.

Top-down view of a car on pavement with a circular drainage pipe and a numbered annotation (1) pointing to the vehicle's side panel.

① Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 270)

In the 3D view, left-/right-hand side of the vehicle, the virtual camera moves to the respective side of the vehicle. When you change the transmission position, the view is automatically adapted.

3D auto view

① The area behind the vehicle is not displayed as a mirror image as is usual in the 3D views.

Top-down view of a car on a paved road with two numbered annotations pointing to the lane (no text or symbols on the car itself)

① Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 270)
② Guide lines

In the 3D auto view, the virtual camera moves to the standard perspective, facing forward from the

rear above the roof. The view changes automatically when approaching obstacles.

If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes to 3D view with free rotation. You can turn, tilt and zoom the views by touch.

Wide-angle view

Black-and-white photo of a car parked on a wet road with two numbered annotations pointing to the left side (no readable text or symbols)

① Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( page 270)
To switch between standard and wide-angle view

System limits

If the system is not ready for operation, the System Inoperative message will appear on the central display.

The 360° camera will not function or will only partially function in situations including the following:

• You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
  • The doors are open.
  • An outside mirror is not completely folded out.
  • The trunk lid is open.
• The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
• The ambient light is poor, e.g. at night or if light is shining into the camera.
• The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fogged up. See the notes on cleaning the 360° camera (→ page 371).
• If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle.

For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load. This may result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images.

The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to additional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket, bicycle rack).

The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention.
i Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

Also observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras ( page 223).

Calling up the 360° Camera views using the button

Press button①.
▶ Select Camera Views menu.
Select the desired view in the multimedia system ( page 266).

Selecting a view for the 360° camera (reverse gear)
Engage reverse gear.
Select the desired view in the multimedia system ( page 266).
360° Camera with GPS - managing activation positions

Multimedia system:

Renaming an activation position

① You can determine activation positions in the Camera Views menu. (→ page 266)
Select for the desired activation position.
Select Edit.
Enter a name and confirm. The activation position is saved under the new name.

Deleting an activation position

Select for the desired activation position.
▶ Select Delete Entry.
Confirm the prompt. The activation position is deleted.

Opening the camera cover

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Assistance
▶ Camera
Select Open Camera Cover.
The camera cover closes automatically after some time or after the vehicle is switched on or off.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system that monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the distance between the vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly.

The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. These must be detected beforehand by the sensors in the front or rear bumper while you are driving by them. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. The passive side impact protection can be activated and deactivated via the multimedia system. In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled one vehicle length, obstacles on all sides can be shown.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. Responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals, objects, etc. in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in / exiting parking spaces.

Displays in the central display

Three sequential images of a car on a paved road, showing top-down angles with no text or symbols.

As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is ready for display, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue.

Front and rear ready for display
2 All sides ready for display
③ All sides ready for display and obstacle detected

The color of the display changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle:

• Blue: > 3.3 ft (1 m) (no obstacles detected)
• Yellow: approx. 3.3 ft (1 m) - 2.2 ft (0.7 m)

• Orange: approx. 2.2 ft (0.7 m) - 1.2 ft (0.4 m)
- Red: <1.2 ft (0.4 m)

The boundary line shifts dynamically depending on the position and distance of detected obstacles.

Depending on the distance to the obstacle detected, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia system. In the Warn Early setting, the system warns you from a distance of 3.3 ft (1 m), in the standard setting only from 1.2 ft (0.4 m).

272 Driving and parking

If you are not in the Camera & Parking menu and an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected, pop-up window ① appears on the central display if the following requirements are met:

• Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than 8 mph (12 km/h).
  • Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than 11 mph (18 km/h).

Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front and 2.2 ft (0.7 m) on sides can also be displayed in the head-up display.

Vehicles with active ambient lighting and Parking Package with remote parking functions When Warning Support is activated, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display is also accompanied by ambient lighting. If an obstacle is detected, the ambient lighting lights up in the same color as the display in the central display.

The ambient lighting that accompanies the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display is intended only to

accentuate the display in the central display and does not replace it.

More information on ambient lighting: (→ page 171)

A display message for the ambient lighting does not occur in the area of the driver's display or in the rear passenger compartment.
(i) Depending on the selected setting, other functions may supersede the ambient lighting effects of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. In this case, the ambient lighting effects of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC do not occur.

System limits

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily take into account the following obstacles:

• Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects.
• Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks.
• Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehicle from the side.
• Objects placed next to the vehicle

Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the following situations, for example:

• You park the vehicle and switch it off.
• You open the doors.

After the engine is restarted, obstacles must be detected again by driving past them before a new warning can be issued.

Also observe the system limits of the 360° Camera ( page 266).

Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; the system otherwise cannot function properly ( page 223).

Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three seconds then goes out, and the _0^OFF symbol appears on the driver's display, the system may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.

If a warning tone also sounds, it may be due to one of the following causes:

• The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (→ page 371).
• Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

! NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range.

When parking or maneuvering the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged.

Requirements

• The camera menu is open.
- Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears.
Press Pw in the central display.

If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp does not light up or the symbol _g^FT is displayed, PARKTRONIC Parking Assist is not active.

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started.

Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.

Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Multimedia system:

Adjusting warning tones

▶ Select Set Warning Tones.

274 Driving and parking

Set the desired level under Volume or Tone Pitch.

Activating/deactivating audio fadeout

Audio Fadeout select and Audio Fade for Warnings switch on or off. The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced during a Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tone.

or

Audio Fadeout select and Audio Fadeout When in R switch on or off. The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced when reverse gear is engaged.

Setting the time of the warnings

▶ Select Time of Warning.
▶ Activate or deactivate Side Warning.
Set the desired warning time for Front or Rear.

Active Parking Assist

Function of Active Parking Assist
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system that uses ultrasound with the assistance of the 360° Camera. When you are driving forwards up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist offers the following functions:

- Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road

• Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the road (optionally either forwards or reverse)
• Parking in parking spaces that can be detected as such only due to markings (forexample at the roadside)
• Exiting parking spaces if you have parked using Active Parking Assist

Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. Responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no

persons, animals, objects, etc. in the maneuvering range.

If Active Parking Assist is available, the message appears on the driver's display. When the system detects parking spaces, appears. The arrows show on which side of the road free parking spaces are located. These are then shown in the central display.

When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the calculated path of your vehicle. When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the procedure is assisted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes.

To start the parking procedure, press the button (→ page 276).

Active Parking Assist will be canceled in the following situations:

• You press the button again.
• You begin steering.
  • You engage park position P.
• ESP® intervenes.
  • You open the driver's door.

System limits

If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available.

Also observe the system limits of the 360° Camera ( page 266).

Objects that are above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist, e.g. protruding loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or boundaries of parking spaces, are not detected when measuring the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely or brake too late.

Certain environmental conditions, such as snowfall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Use Active Parking Assist only on level, high-grip ground.

A WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early.
- The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.

There is a danger of collision!

In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.

Active Parking Assist can also display unsuitable parking spaces, e.g. parking spaces in which parking is not permitted or parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.

Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations:

• In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain.

• When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle.

• If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient.

• When snow chains are installed.
• Directly after a tire change or when spare tires are installed.
• If the tire pressure is too low or too high.
• If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. after bottoming out on a curb.
• On steep inclines of more than approximately 15%.

Driving and parking

Parking with Active Parking Assist

Press button ①.

▶ Select ② Parking Assistance menu.
Parking spaces ③ detected by the system are shown on the central display.

When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle path ④ into currently selected parking space ⑤ will also appear.

If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle.
If necessary, select another parking space.
To change the parking direction, tap the selected parking space again.

To start the parking procedure: press button ① again.
Take your hands off the steering wheel. The vehicle will drive into the selected parking space.

The turn signal indicator will be switched on automatically when the parking procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.

This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

Pay attention to objects and other road users.

▶ Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist.

A message reading Active Parking Assist Finished will appear once the parking procedure is complete.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb.
① You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking procedure. The system will then calculate a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be canceled.

Immediate parking via the Camera Views menu

Front view of a road with lane markings and a circular traffic light indicator (no readable text or symbols)

▶ Select the Camera Views menu.
When the vehicle is stationary and in transmission position , and symbol ⑥ appears in the camera image: press button ① again. The parking procedure will be initiated for the detected parking space.
(i) The parking space and parking direction cannot be changed in immediate parking.

■ Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist

Requirements

- The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist.

Start the vehicle.

Press button ①.

Select the Parking Assistance ^2 menu.
If necessary, change direction of exit ③.
To start exiting the parking space: press button ① again.
If necessary, change the gearbox setting. Observe any messages shown on the driver's display and central display.
The vehicle will drive out of the parking space.

The turn signal indicator will be switched on automatically when the procedure for exiting the parking space begins and switched off when it is completed. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

Once the procedure for exiting the parking space has been completed, a warning tone and the

Active Parking Assist Finished: Take Control of Vehicle message will prompt you to take control of the vehicle. You will need to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again.

If you do not react to the prompt to take control of the vehicle, the system will brake the vehicle to a standstill.

Pausing Active Parking Assist

You can interrupt the parking or exiting procedure of Active Parking Assist by performing one of the following actions, forexample:

▶ Depress the brake pedal.
Open the front passenger door, a rear door, the trunk or the hood.

Apply the electric parking brake or activating the HOLD function.

To resume the parking or exiting procedure: gently depress the accelerator pedal.

If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start the parking or exiting procedure.

Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking procedure. Check again that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist.

■ Automatic braking function of Active Parking Assist

Persons or objects detected in the maneuvering range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exiting procedure is resumed.

Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Check again that there are no persons, animals or

objects in the maneuvering range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist.

Remote Parking Assist

Function of Remote Parking Assist

Remote Parking Assist is an additional function of Active Parking Assist. Comply with local traffic laws and regulations when using Remote Parking Assist on public roads. If it is required to turn the wheels toward the curb, you cannot use Remote Parking Assist. Please note that you can use Remote Parking Assist only if you have a valid driving license and are in a fil state to drive.

Remote Parking Assist parks your vehicle or exits the parking space while you are outside of your vehicle. You can monitor the maneuvering and parking procedure on your mobile phone.

With Remote Parking Assist, you can carry out all the parking procedures of Active Parking Assist. You can also position the vehicle directly in front of a garage or a driveway entrance and then use Remote Parking Assist to enter or exit a parking space.

Remote Parking Assist manages pulling away, braking and steering. While Remote Parking Assist is active, the vehicle is locked.

Remote Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. Responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Interrupt or terminate the parking procedure if necessary. Make sure that there are no persons, animals, objects, etc. in the maneuvering range. Make sure to also pay attention to other vehicles.

System limits

If the system detects a malfunction or a system limit during the maneuvering or parking procedure, the procedure will be canceled:

• The vehicle is brought to a standstill.
- Transmission position is selected and the electric parking brake is applied automatically.
- The vehicle is switched off.
• The vehicle remains locked.

If the parking maneuver is canceled, a corresponding message is displayed on the mobile phone.

Depending on the situation, you can then take control of the procedure, maneuver the vehicle back to the starting position or manually take control of the vehicle.

The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply ( page 274).

Certain environmental conditions, such as snowfall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately or to connection problems with the mobile phone. Use Remote Parking Assist only on level, high-grip ground.

During the parking procedure, you should not stand more than approx. 10 ft (3.0 m) away from the vehicle. At greater distances, the procedure will be interrupted and a corresponding message will be displayed on the mobile phone. If you move closer to the vehicle, you will be able to continue the procedure.

Operating Remote Parking Assist

Requirements

For the Remote Parking Assist function, you require:

• a Mercedes me user account

• the current Remote Parking Assist App for your vehicle type
• a mobile phone
  A list of compatible phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/
  The following operating systems are supported:

- Android™

- Apple® iOS

⚠ WARNING Danger due to insufficient view of the vehicle surroundings

If you maneuver, park or exit a parking space with the vehicle using Remote Parking Assist, observe the following:

Make sure that you have the best view possible of the vehicle and the vehicle's surroundings.
Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the path of your vehicle.
Make sure that you maintain a suitable distance to the vehicle and that neither

you nor other road users could be endangered.

Be aware of the vehicle's surroundings at all times and identify possible dangers.
If necessary, cancel the parking procedure.

No persons or pets are permitted to remain in the vehicle during the parking procedure. Observe the system limits at all times. If necessary, cancel the parking procedure. Always ensure that vehicle access by other road users is maintained.

Activate the "Remote Parking Assist" service e.g. via the Mercedes me homepage.
▶ Authorize the mobile phone using the Remote Parking Assist App in the vehicle ( page 282).

Selecting the parking maneuver in advance while inside the vehicle

Stop the vehicle and select transmission position P.

Press button①.

graph TD
    A["Camera Views"] --> B["Parking Assist"]
    B --> C["1"]
    B --> D["2"]
    B --> E["3"]
    B --> F["4"]
    B --> G["5"]
    B --> H["6"]
    B --> I["7"]
    B --> J["8"]
    B --> K["9"]
    B --> L["10"]

Select ② Parking Assistance menu.
For further information on Remote Parking Assist: select 3.
If necessary, select another parking space ④ or select ⑤ to drive straight ahead into a garage, forexample.
If necessary, change parking direction 6.

Driving and parking

Alternatively, you can begin parking with Active Parking Assist ( page 276) and continue with the Remote Parking Assist from any vehicle position. To do this, stop the parking process and adjust the gearbox setting [P].
▶ Switch off the vehicle and exit it with the key.

Starting the parking procedure without selecting in advance

▶ Stop the vehicle and select transmission position P.
▶ Switch off the vehicle and exit it with the key.

Starting the parking procedure while outside the vehicle

Unlock the vehicle.

Carrying out a parking procedure with Remote Parking Assist

Keep the vehicle key with you during the parking procedure. You can cancel the parking procedure and bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing a button on the key.
① On completion of the parking procedure, the vehicle is locked.

If you have started the parking procedure as described above, the vehicle is ready to connect to your mobile phone for a limited time.

Start the Remote Parking Assist App on the mobile phone and connect to the vehicle.
Follow the instructions of the Remote Parking Assist App.

① The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when starting parking and switched off when it is completed.

If the connection between the vehicle and the mobile phone is interrupted while a parking maneuver is being performed, the maneuver can be continued if the connection is re-established within a short time.

WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space

While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane.

This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users.

Pay attention to objects and other road users.
Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Remote Parking Assist.

After ending the parking procedure, ensure that all vehicle doors, windows and the trunk are closed. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Canceling the parking procedure

You can cancel the parking procedure of Remote Parking Assist at any time and bring the vehicle to a standstill.

Cancel the parking procedure in the Remote Parking Assist App.
or
Press a button on the vehicle key.
or
▶ Pull a door handle.

■ Authorizing/de-authorizing a mobile phone for Remote Parking Assist Multimedia system:

▶ Settings

Assistance

arking

emote

ng Assist

Authorizing a new mobile phone

In order to be able to use the Remote Parking Assist function, you must authorize your mobile phone. You can authorize up to ten mobile phones.

▶ Select Remote Parking Assist.
Select Authorize a New Device in the window that opens. Remote Parking Assist is ready to connect.
Start the Remote Parking Assist app and additionally start the authorization process within it. A connection prompt is displayed.
▶ Scan the QR code on the central display. The mobile phone is authorized.

De-authorizing mobile phones

▶ Select Remote Parking Assist.

In the window that opens, select the device to be de-authorized.
To de-authorize a mobile phone: select a mobile phone and confirm with Yes. The mobile phone is deleted from the device list.
To de-authorize all mobile phones: select Deauthorize All Devices and confirm with Yes. All mobile phones are deleted from the device list.

Maneuvering assistance

Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If the system detects an obstacle in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approximately 1 mph (2 km/h).

A risk of collision may occur in the following situations, forexample:

• If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake pedals.
  • If the driver engages an incorrect gear.

• If the driver depresses the accelerator pedal with too much force.
  Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions:

• If the vehicle was stationary and the transmission position was changed to R or D.
• If the vehicle has rolled less than approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) since being at a standstill.
• If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m) away.

The Drive-away Assist can be deactivated or activated in the Maneuvering Assistance menu ( page 285).

If a critical situation is detected, the symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & Parking menu.

If Drive Away Assist is not available, the symbol appears in gray. If the Camera & Parking menu is not opened on the central display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear.

Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. Responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals, objects, etc. in the maneuvering range.

A WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist

Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action.

System limits

The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply ( page 274).

On uphill gradients, the performance of Drive Away Assist is restricted.

Function of cross traffic warning

The cross traffic warning can warn you of crossing traffic when you are exiting a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle.

The cross traffic warning is active under the following conditions:

• Warning for Cross Traffic, Rear: the vehicle is driving in reverse at a speed slower than approx. 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Warning for Cross Traffic, Front: the vehicle is driving forwards at a speed slower than approx. 6 mph (10 km/h) and the camera image is shown in the central display ( page 270).

The Warning for Cross Traffic, Front can be deactivated or activated in the Maneuvering Assistance(→ page 285) menu.

If a critical situation is detected, the △ symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & Parking menu.

Warning for Cross Traffic, Rear

• The vehicle can be braked automatically when crossing traffic is detected.
• If the Camera & Parking menu is not open and a critical situation is detected, a warning appears in the central display together with the PARKTRONIC Parking Assist pop-up.

Warning for Cross Traffic, Front

• If Active Parking Assist is active, the vehicle can be braked automatically when crossing traffic is detected.
• If Active Parking Assist is not active but the menu Camera & Parking is open, a warning appears.
• If the Camera & Parking menu is not open, the system cannot react to crossing traffic.

The cross traffic warning is only an aid and not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. Responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals, objects, etc. in the maneuvering range.

A WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of the cross traffic warning

The cross traffic warning cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations.

▶ Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the cross traffic warning alone.
Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action.

System limits

If the cross traffic warning is not available, the symbol appears in gray.

The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply ( page 274).

If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible.

In the following situations, the cross traffic warning is not available:

- on inclines

Close-range braking function

The close-range braking function can prevent collisions with pedestrians when the vehicle is backing up at slow speeds. If the rear-view camera detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill.

The close-range braking function can intervene under the following conditions:

• The vehicle is backing up at a speed slower than 6 mph (10 km/h).
• The camera image is shown in the central display ( page 270).

You can activate and deactivate the close-range braking function in the Maneuvering Assistance menu ( page 285).

If the close-range braking function is triggered, the symbol will appear in red in the selected view on the Camera & Parkingmenu:

If close-range braking is not available, the symbol will appear in gray.

The close-range braking function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. Responsibility for safe maneuvering

and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals, objects, etc. in the maneuvering range.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the maneuvering brake function

The maneuvering brake function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function.

In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all.

▶ Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the maneuvering brake function alone.
Be ready to brake.

System limits

Observe the system limits of the following functions:

• Active Parking Assist ( page 274)
• 360° Camera ( page 266)

The close-range braking function is not available in the following situations:

- on inclines

Activating/deactivating maneuvering assistant Multimedia system:

Settings Assistance

Parking

(i) This function is an on-demand feature ( page 27).
i Activating/deactivating the maneuvering assistant function is not available in all countries.
▶ Select Maneuvering Assistance.
▶ Activate or deactivate the desired maneuvering assistant.

Memory Parking Assist

Function of Memory Parking Assist

The function of Memory Parking Assist is available only in vehicles for Canada.

Memory Parking Assist can park your vehicle in a previously stored parking space. You can store parking procedures with a total distance of up to 550 yds (500 m) (110 yds (100 m) per parking or exiting procedure).

During parking or exiting, the system can travel a previously stored path of up to approximately 110 yds (100 m) to or out of the desired parking space, for example, from the driveway entrance into the garage.

Within a radius of approx. 165 yds (150 m), only one parking or exiting procedure can be recorded. Only use Memory Parking Assist on private property. Use on public roads, e.g. in public parking spaces, is not permitted.

Memory Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the vehicle path.

System limits

Observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist ( page 274).

WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Memory Parking Assist

If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise:

• Memory Parking Assist may steer too early.
- The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects.

This result in a collision.

In these situations, do not use Memory Parking Assist.

Objects located above or below the detection range of Memory Parking Assist may not be detected during the parking procedure.

Objects including drawbars of parked trailers that protrude into the parking space may not be detected.

Do not use Memory Parking Assist in the following situations, for example:

• In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain.
• When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle.
• If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient.
• When snow chains are installed.

Recording a parking procedure using Memory Parking Assist

Requirements

The function of Memory Parking Assist is available only in vehicles for Canada.

• The entire route is not on public roads, e.g. within your own property.
• The system needs reference points in the surroundings to orient itself, such as fences, walls or trees. Therefore, after starting the vehicle, a certain distance must first be driven. If not enough reference points are

detected in the surrounding area, no new route can be recorded.

Press button ①. The Camera & Parking view opens on the central display.

Select ② Memory Parking Assist menu.
Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the desired starting point of the assisted parking procedure, e.g. a driveway entrance.
To start recording: tap on ③.

① If not all conditions for a recording are met, symbol ③ is grayed out.

Park the vehicle in the desired parking space. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h).
To stop recording: stop the vehicle and tap on 3 again. The recording is stored.
① In the Memory Parking Assist settings you can delete and rename stored parking procedures.

Parking with Memory Parking Assist

Requirements

The function of Memory Parking Assist is available only in vehicles for Canada.
• A parking procedure has been recorded.

Press button①.
The Camera & Parking view opens in the central display.

Select Memory Parking Assist ② menu.
Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the starting point of the stored parking procedure.
Select the stored parking procedure from the list.
Follow the instructions on the central display. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space.
The turn signal indicator is not switched on automatically. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions.
After completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
■ Exiting a parking space with Memory Parking Assist

To start the parking procedure: press ▶.

Requirements

The function of Memory Parking Assist is available only in vehicles for Canada.

• The exiting procedure was recorded together with the respective parking procedure and stored separately within one driving cycle.
• The vehicle was parked using Memory Parking Assist.

Press button ①.
The Camera & Parking view opens on the central display.

Select Memory Parking Assist menu 2.

Starting the exiting procedure

Press ▶.
▶ Confirm the saved exiting procedure.
▶ Follow the instructions on the central display.
The vehicle will drive the recorded route.

The turn signal indicator is not switched on automatically. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Take control of the vehicle after the exiting procedure has been completed.

Vehicle towing instructions

The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side.

Observe the following information:

• Permitted towing methods ( page 389)
- The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground (→ page 390)

Notes on the driver's display

WARNING Risk of accident if the driver display fails

If the driver display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected.

The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired.

▶ Drive on carefully.
Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

The driver's display shows basic information such as speed, engine speed, fuel level, coolant temperature as well as indicator and warning lamps. Additional functions available include the following:

- Different menus, e.g. for assistance and navigation

• Status displays for the driving systems
- Display messages
• Information on speed, Consumption and range

Some menu content and settings can be customized.

Notes on the 3D driver display

The 3D driver's display enables a three-dimensional representation of the content of the driver's display. This requires the driver to be recorded by the driver camera.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• The driver camera is deactivated or is not working.
• The driver is outside the detection range of the driver camera.
• The operating conditions are not in place, e.g. if the outside temperature is too low or too high.

Operating the driver's display

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

▶ Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the driver's display.

Scrolling on the menu bar

① Back button
② Main menu button
3 Touch Control

The content on the driver's display is controlled using the control elements on the left side of the steering wheel. You can use Touch Control ③ to navigate vertically and horizontally by swiping with

one finger. Confirm your selection by pressing the Touch Control.

To operate Touch Control in the most effective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. You can also set the sensitivity of the Touch Control on the central display.

Briefly press main menu button 2.
Select a menu by swiping to the left or right on Touch Control 3.
To confirm: press Touch Control 3.

Driver display menus

Notes on menus on the driver's display

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the driver's display.

The following menus can be called up via the menu bar on the driver's display:

• Understated
• Sport
• Maybach
• Classic
• Navigation
• Assistance
• Service

On some of these menus, you can choose between different display content on the center display area.

292 Driver's display

On most of the menus, you can use Options to configure further settings for the menu-specific display content.

You can find further information about the possible settings and selections on the menus in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Head-up Display

Function of the head-up display

The head-up display projects various content into the driver's field of vision, for example.

You can use the head-up display menu bar to select various contexts, e.g.:

• Minimal
• Sport
• Standard
• Augmented reality
  • ECO display (depending on model and equipment) ( page 203)
• Settings
  • Head-up display on/off

Depending on the equipment, the functions may differ from the description and images in this Operator's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all equipment variants.

The following image shows an example of the head-up display. You can choose what content is displayed ( page 294).

Head-up display content with navigation (6x2°)

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["4"]
    D --> E["5"]
    E --> A

① Detected instructions and traffic signs
2 Navigation instructions (distance to the next route event)
Steer Assist status

Current speed
5 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC)

Head-up display with navigation and augmented reality (10x5°)

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["Central Processing Unit"]
    C["2"] --> B
    D["3"] --> B
    E["4"] --> B
    F["5"] --> B
    G["6"] --> B
    H["7"] --> B
    I["8"] --> B

① Navigation instructions
② Augmented reality navigation instructions
3 Navigation status displays, such as remaining distance to the destination, expected time of arrival
Active Lane Keeping Assist status
5 Steer Assist status
6 Current speed

⑦ Set speed in the driving system (e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC)
8 Detected traffic signs (Traffic Sign Assist)

When you receive a call, the 📞 Call Waiting message will appear on the head-up display and the driver's display.

System limits

Visibility is particularly influenced by the following conditions:

• Seat position
  • Image position setting
• Ambient light
• Wet road surfaces
• Objects on the display cover
• Polarization in sunglasses

Function of the head-up display with augmented reality

① Augmented reality is available only in conjunction with the 10x5° head-up display.

The head-up display with augmented reality projects content into the driver's field of vision, such as:

• Information from and visualization of the navigation system
• Information from and visualization of the driver assistance systems, e.g. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
• Information from the menus of the driver's display

Head-up display with augmented reality (example)

Marker for the detected vehicle in front (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC)
② Change-of-direction arrows for the route (navigation)
Driver assistance system status bar

The marker for the detected vehicle in front and the change-of-direction arrows for the route are dynamic displays. The vehicle marker stays with the vehicle in front, and Active Distance Assist regulates your speed based on this. The change-of-direction arrows point the way calculated by the navigation system.

System limits

The marker for the detected vehicle in front may be inaccurate or may not be applied to the correct vehicle in some situations. Always pay attention to the actual driving situation.

Route guidance with augmented reality will not be available in some situations, e.g. in the event of poor satellite reception or roads that have not been digitized.

Visibility is influenced by conditions including the following:

• Driver camera and multifunction camera recording
• The extent to which the windshield in the area of the multifunction camera is dirty, or if the camera is fogged up, damaged or obscured

Further system limits of the head-up display ( page 292).

Operating the head-up display

Selecting display content of the head-up display via the menu bar of the driver's display

Press the main menu button on the left.
To select the menu bar of the head-up display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.

Switching between display content on the head-up display

Swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. A preview of the selected display content will appear on the head-up display.

To confirm: press the OK button.

Switching back to the driver's display

Press the ↩ or □ button.

Setting the position and brightness

Swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control and select Settings on the menu bar of the head-up display.
Press the left-hand Touch Control. The current position and brightness settings will be displayed as graphics on the head-up display as well as on the driver's display.
To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. The settings configured for position and brightness will be saved automatically.
Press the ↩ or OK button to exit the settings.

① Vehicles with augmented reality function: when the position is adjusted, the status line will be moved upwards and the display section made smaller. This may slightly affect the area on which the augmented reality content is displayed.

Selecting the head-up display with augmented reality

Press the main menu button 📋 on the left.
To select the menu bar of the head-up display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To select the head-up display with augmented reality: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control to activate the desired content.

Switching the head-up display on/off

Driver's display:

→

Switching on

Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control
Press the left-hand OK Touch Control.
Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
Swipe on the left-hand Touch Control and select Head-up Display.
Press the left-hand OK Touch Control.

Switching off

Setting the Head-up Display in the multimedia system

Multimedia system:

Switching the 3D display for the driver display on or off

▶ Select 3D Driver Display. The 3D display of the driver display is switched on or off.

The 3D display for the driver display is only activated when the driver camera detects the driver. Otherwise, the driver display switches from the 3D display to the 2D display ( page 290).

Switching the Head-up Display on/off

▶ Select Head-up Display. The Head-up Display is activated or deactivated.

Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system

Electric drive support
② Recuperation behavior of the electric motor
Due to various system limits, the values displayed may temporarily differ slightly from the actual value.

Overview of status displays on the driver's display

The status displays for the driving and driving safety systems can be found in display sections

① to ④.

Pedestrian detection (only on assistant display)
Active Parking Assist is available ( page 276)
Active Parking Assist has recognized a parking space ( page 276)
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (→ page 273)

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (→ page 231)
Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( page 231)
Active Brake Assist switched off (→ page 250)
Active Brake Assist impaired or not functioning (→ page 250)
Active Steering Assist ( page 239)
Active Lane Change Assist (→ page 242)
Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 258)
Active Blind Spot Assist (only on assistant display) (→ page 257)
READY Plug-in hybrid operation activated
Haptic accelerator pedal ( page 203)
(A) ECO start/stop function (→ page 201)
HOLD HOLD function (→ page 227)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ( page 167) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ( page 168)
Active Stop-and-Go Assist (→ page 238)

Driver's display

* Slippery road surface warning

Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs ( page 250)

Overview and operation

Notes on the MBUX multimedia system

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

Depending on the equipment, the scope of function and product designation of your MBUX multimedia system may differ from the description and

images in this Operator's Manual. For example, route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all equipment variants.

NOTE Increased surface temperature due to direct sunlight on the central display

The surface of the central display is very dark. If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the surface can become very hot.

If the central display has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool down before touching it for a long time.

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system

Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experience.

- Operates Touch Control

② Central display with touch functionality

• Home screen overview

- Operates the touchscreen

3 Switch panel with:

Fingerprint sensor
Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off

Switches sound on or off

Adjusts the volume

Further operating options:

• Conducting a dialog with the MBUX Voice Assistant.
• Operating functions contact-free with the MBUX Interior Assistant.

The interaction then follows intelligently, reactively or with hand or head movements.

You can find further information about operation as well as about applications and services in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Anti-theft protection

This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on anti-theft protection can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Zero layer

Function of the zero layer

(i) Your software can be upgraded to a more current version at a later date.

The zero layer provides you with dynamic content from the MBUX multimedia system and is used to quickly access and control the applications you use. When you select 📄 on the central display, the digital map with the applications appears in the lower display area. Compared to the home screen with a classic menu, the steps required to call up the applications are reduced. You can switch between the zero layer and the home screen with a classic menu.

The applications can be hidden from the display area and shown again.

The zero layer provides the following modules and applications:

- Navigation module In the expanded view you can, for example, display the route overview, switch on the display of traffic information and make settings

for View (map), Messages & Acoustic Signals, Route.

• Entertainment (media, radio) and telephone When the lower display area is shown, the entertainment sources are always displayed. A mobile phone must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system for the phone to be displayed.
  • Active applications The lower display area shows an active massage program, for example.
• Suggestions Suggestions are displayed on the lower display area based on context and your user behavior. Here are a few examples:

Latest calls

• Active massage programs
• Vehicle functions

- Online voice applications

The applications are first displayed in a reduced view. By tapping on them, you can operate them or open the associated menu (expanded view).

A long press on a suggestion opens a context menu in which further functions are available.

The learning function can be switched on and off for the options.

Overview zero layer

Digital map and user-specific applications (example)

Navigation module (reduced view)
② Enters a destination
Searching for parking
3 Calls up the Control Center (pull the bar down)

Status line
5 Calls up user profile settings
6 Content sharing menu
7 Telephone Requirement for phone: the mobile phone is connected to the MBUX multimedia system.
8 Entertainment sources (media, radio)
9 Press briefly: shows all applications (→ page 302) Press and hold: calls up the home screen with classic menu
10 Route monitor e.g. route list, lane recommendations, toll stations, 3D image of the upcoming driving maneuver

The zero layer shows the digital map and the user-specific applications.

The following user-specific applications are displayed in the lower display area:

- Suggestions

Requirement: suggestions are activated ( page 316).

• Active applications e.g. a massage program
- Telephone 7
- Entertainment sources
• Online voice applications

The lower display area can be hidden and shown ( page 302).

Information about entertainment sources

You can operate the applications in the reduced view or in the menu (expanded view) (→ page 302).

Examples:

• Control a media source, e.g. pause/play, next track, set a station
• Select tracks from the current playlist or stations from the station list
• Select a media source
  The media source must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system.

Information about the telephone

To use the functions, the mobile phones must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system.

Requirement for suggestions: the Calls & Messages option is activated in the suggestions.

Examples:

• Answer a call and call a missed call The missed calls are displayed for the mobile phones connected to the MBUX multimedia system.
• Display contacts and call list and call a contact
• Use voice functions
• Suggest contacts
  The contacts are suggested for the mobile phones connected to the MBUX multimedia system. No contacts are suggested for the mobile phones that are linked to another user profile.
  • Write messages to contacts (suggestion)
• Connect a device via the device manager (suggestion)

Information about active applications

The following functions are available:

• Operating the massage program
  • Raising or lowering the vehicle level

Suggestions for comfort and vehicle functions as well as navigation

Requirement: the Comfort, Vehicle and Navigation options are activated in the suggestions.

- Operating the massage program For example, the multimedia system suggests a program at a certain time.

- Opening the trunk lid Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with trunk lid convenience closing.

- Opening and closing the convenience doors Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with comfort doors.

- Setting the vehicle level

- Making heating settings

- Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

302 MBUX multimedia system

- Selecting previous destinations and destinations from favorites

Suggestions for online voice applications

Requirement: the Online Voice Services option is activated in the suggestions.

The suggested voice applications are made available online and are based on your previous voice inputs.

Examples:

• What will the weather be like tomorrow?
- Play the messages.
- Start geoquiz.
- Open the garage door.

Calling up and operating the zero layer

Calling up the zero layer

When the vehicle has been switched on, the zero layer is displayed with the digital map. Navigation is active.

From another application: press the button on the right side of the steering wheel.

or

Tap on
Operating applications in the reduced view (examples)
Media: to play the previous or next track, tap □ or ▶.
To answer a call or call a missed call: tap on the contact.
After the connection has been established, the call functions are available.
To end a call: tap on the contact again.
To reply to message: tap on a message and dictate the message via the MBUX Voice Assistant.
To start a massage program: tap on the application and start the massage program.
To select a previous destination: tap on the application and select one of the previous destinations.
To select a destination from the favorites: tap on the application and select the destination.

Hiding and showing the display area with applications

To hide: pull the applications down.
To show: pull the bar above upwards.

or
Select
or
Press the button on the steering wheel on the right.

Navigation module (expanded view)

Example: route guidance is active

① Destination
② Searches for a gas station
3 Switches traffic information display on or off
Tap on the navigation module ( page 300).
▶ Select Route in the lower menu bar.

Operating a menu in the lower display area (example: active massage program)

1 Selects a massage program
2 Starts/stops a massage program for the driver
3 Starts/stops a massage program for the front passenger
Sets the massage program intensity for the driver's or front passenger seat
Tap on the application.
The expanded view of the application is displayed.
To close the menu: select ↩.

Opening and closing the context menu for a suggestion

Press and hold on a suggestion. The context menu opens and shows the No Longer Suggest option, for example.
To close: swipe downwards.

Removing a suggestion from the display area

Swipe the suggestion upwards.

Showing all applications

Press briefly. Available applications are displayed. The global search is available.
To hide applications: briefly press 📋 again.

Switching between zero layer and home screen with classic menu

Long press on 📋. The home screen with classic menu is shown.
To return to the zero layer: press and hold on

Home screen overview

① Status line
2 Calls up user profile settings and switches user
③ Using the global search
4 Calls up the Control Center: pull the bar down
⑤ Calling up favourites
6 Displays in the status line

7 Calls up an application
8 Quick-access to application
Global menu

Calls up previous menu
Press and hold: switches between home screen and zero layer
Previous track or previous radio station
▶ Next track or next radio station

During a telephone call, the call duration is displayed in global menu.

The following functions are called up in the Control Center:

• Notifications Center
• Content sharing menu
• Favorites
• Vehicle quick-access

Content sharing menu in the Control Center

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["4"]
    D --> E["5"]
    E --> F["6"]

Example: showing displays

① Calls up a menu
2 Central display with active content (cover display)
3 Displays animation for content sharing
4 Bluetooth® headphones connected to the right rear display

⑤ Rear displays with active content (cover display)
6 MBUX rear tablet
To share content, drag a display and drop it over another display.
To control media playback, tap a display.

Operating the MBUX multimedia system

On Touch Control

① Shows the home screen
② Touch Control

◀ ▲ ▶ ▼ Swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate)
OK Press (confirm)
Returns to the previous display
4 Makes or accepts a call
5 Rejects or ends a call
To increase volume: swipe upwards To reduce volume: swipe down
To switch off the sound: press
7 ★ Calls up favorites
Starts the MBUX voice assistant

You can navigate through menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control using a single-finger swipe, e.g.:

To enter a character: select a character using the keyboard and press on Touch Control 2.
To select a menu option: scroll in a list and press Touch Control ②.
To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.

Using the touchscreen

Example: Control elements under the central display

① Fingerprint sensor
② Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off
3 Switches the sound on/off

4 Adjusts the volume Press ☐ or ☐ or swipe over the button
To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry.
To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger.
To reduce the map scale: tap with two fingers.
To enter characters with the keypad: tap on a button.
To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right.
To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one finger on the touchscreen.
To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart.
To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fingers together or apart.
To turn the digital map: turn counter-clockwise or clockwise using two fingers.

To move the digital map: touch the touchscreen and move your finger in any direction.
To save the destination in the digital map: touch the touchscreen and hold until a message is shown.
To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the finger to the left or right.
To call up a global menu in the applications: touch the touchscreen and hold until the Options menu appears.

Function of the MBUX Voice Assistant

WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment

If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

▶ Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

For your own safety, always observe the following points when operating mobile communications equipment and especially your voice control system:

• Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving.
• If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be delayed.
• Familiarize yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey. Using the MBUX Voice Assistant, vehicle functions and various areas of the MBUX multimedia system can be operated by voice input. The MBUX Voice Assistant is operational approximately half a minute after switching on the vehicle and can be

operated from all seats. Further information and examples of voice commands can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual.

You can use the MBUX Voice Assistant to operate the following functions depending on the vehicle equipment:

• Telephone
  • Text message and e-mail
• Navigation
• Radio and media
• Vehicle functions
• Online functions

Full functionality of the voice control system is only available for you with activation of online voice control.

Conducting a dialog

Starting a dialog

Say "Hey Mercedes" to activate the MBUX voice assistant. Voice activation must be switched on in the multimedia system.

or

Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. A blue line appears in the MBUX multimedia system. The dialog can be started.

For the dialog with the MBUX voice assistant, you can use complete sentences of colloquial language as voice commands. Voice activation can also be directly combined with a voice command, e.g. "Hey Mercedes, how fast can I drive?"

Calling up help

For information about the MBUX voice assistant: say "Hey Mercedes, what can you do?" Digital Operator's Manual: "Show me the Operator's Manual". The full extent of the Digital Operator's Manual is available when the vehicle is stationary.

Operating functions (examples)

To operate the navigation: "Search for an Asian restaurant, but not Japanese, in South Manhattan." To operate the phone: "Call my father."

To change the system language to English (short command): "Change language to English".
To operate the radio: "Show me the list of radio stations."
To operate media: "Switch on random play-back."
To operate vehicle functions: "Switch the seat heating to level 2."
To operate online functions: "What's the time in Sydney?"
To ask a question about the vehicle: "Do I have Blind Spot Assist?"

Overview of the MBUX Interior Assistant

WARNING Risk of injury from the camera's laser radiation

This product uses a classification 1 laser system. If the housing is opened or damaged, laser radiation may damage your retina.

Do not open the housing.

Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a qualified specialist workshop.

This product complies with the requirements of the FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 with exception of the variations according to the FDA Laser Notice No. 50 from 24, June 2007.

The camera records image data for the applications, for example body, head and hand detection.
The camera converts the image data directly into meta data. No image data is saved in the process. The data is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle.
When you start the vehicle, the MBUX Interior Assistant is activated automatically. You can switch the Interior Assistant on or off. The setting is saved in your current user profile and is seat-specific. Via the user profile this is also available in other vehicles with the MBUX Interior Assistant. This means that you only have to make the setting once and can take it with you to the other vehicle.

① You can switch the Interior Assistant front and rear camera on and off using Front and Rear. The selected camera settings (on/off) are not saved in the user profile and only apply to the current vehicle. If you change to another vehicle with the MBUX Interior Assistant, please check the settings and adjust them if necessary.

The MBUX Interior Assistant is equipped with front and rear cameras.

① Alternatively, a configuration with front camera only is also available.

The front camera consists of two cameras that support the driver and the front passenger.

The rear camera consists of two cameras that support the left and right rear seat passengers.

The MBUX Interior Assistant records the vehicle occupants via 3D laser cameras. The cameras of the front camera are located in the overhead control panel. The cameras of the rear camera are located in the roof bows.

The Assistant detects interactions of the vehicle occupants via the cameras. It interprets the natural hand, head and body movements of the vehi-

cle occupants either in context or at their explicit request. The Assistant can thus automatically trigger vehicle interior functions and assist appropriately to the situation.

Diagram of a car interior showing a central device with a numbered label (1), no readable text or symbols present.

① Arrangement of the cameras of the front camera in the overhead control panel

Diagram of a car interior showing a dark plug inserted into a slot, with a numbered marker (1) pointing to the insertion point.

① Arrangement of the rear camera in the roof bows

The Assistant supports vehicle and infotainment functions at three interaction levels:

• INTELLIGENT

The Assistant recognizes vehicle occupants automatically and activates functions.

- REACTIVE

The Assistant recognizes the natural body language of a vehicle occupant and carries out functions automatically, appropriate to the situation.

- CONTACTLESS

The vehicle occupant actively requests a function using a hand movement or pose.

The Assistant offers functions for the following:

• SAFETY

The Assistant supports vehicle occupants with the use of restraint systems.

• COMFORT

The Assistant enhances comfort by automating functions inside the vehicle and supporting natural interaction with the vehicle.

• INFOTAINMENT

The vehicle occupants can carry out a favorite function with a hand pose.

System limits, display messages and notes for rectification

The error messages are shown on the central display, for example.

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

- The cameras may heat up during operation. As a result the cameras may switch off tempora-

rily, particularly during longer periods of operation and at high outside temperatures.

Do not touch or cover the cameras. Wait until the cameras have cooled down and are available again.

The Interior Assistant Unavailable Further Information to Follow message appears.

You receive a message when the camera is available again.

- The front or rear camera is covered, dirty, fogged up or scratched.

Wait until the camera has cooled down before cleaning the camera cover.

The Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual message appears.

Clean the outside of the camera cover with a dry or damp cotton cloth. Do not use microfiber cloths. Do not remove the cover when cleaning.

- A vehicle occupant is very large. Clothing being worn (gloves, hat, scarf, color of clothing) or objects carried on a person, for example a watch with a large face, are affecting the

camera view. Or the detection range of the camera is restricted.

The Interior Assistant availability for the driver is limited, see Operator's Manual message appears.

Keep the camera's field of vision clear.

Objects in the detection range of the camera can restrict the camera view. Please make sure that no objects hang on the inside rear-view mirror, for example.

- The MBUX Interior Assistant is faulty. The Interior Assistant Not Available. Please contact your Mercedes-Benz dealer. message appears.

Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

- Vehicles with rear bench seat: as soon as the center rear seat is occupied, the rear seat functions are not supported.

The Interior Assistant in rear is currently unavailable, see operator's manual message appears.

To use the Interior Assistant in the rear passenger compartment, keep the center rear seat free.

Anticipatory exit warning (SAFETY/reactive)

Requirements:

• The vehicle is equipped with Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning.
  • Active Blind Spot Assist is activated ( page 258).
• The vehicle is equipped with active ambient lighting or ambient lighting.
• The cameras are switched on: The front camera activates the front doors. The rear camera activates the rear doors.

① Observe the information on the system limits of Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ( page 255).

The function can warn vehicle occupants about a possible collision with an approaching vehicle or bicycle when they exit the vehicle.

As soon as a vehicle occupant moves their hand towards the door handle, depending on the vehicle equipment, the following warnings are issued:

• The active ambient lighting or ambient lighting flashes red.
• The warning lamp in the outside mirror also flashes red for one of the front doors.
• When the door is opened, a warning tone sounds.
  The visual warning is thus already given before the door is opened.
  Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ( page 255) and on ambient lighting ( page 171).

Switching the reading light and search light and on or off

Requirements:

- For the reading light: the cameras are switched on: The front camera activates the reading light for driver and front passenger.

The rear camera activates the reading light for the left and right rear seat passengers.

• The driver's and front passenger's hand movement takes place under the inside rearview mirror. Rear compartment passengers move their hand at the grab handle in front of the reading lamp.
• For the search light: the function is available in the vehicle when it is dark.

The cameras are switched on:

The front camera records the interaction area of the unoccupied front passenger seat.

The rear camera records the interaction area of the unoccupied left or right rear seat.

- The seats covered are unoccupied or a child is sitting in a child restraint system.

Switching the reading light on and off

Illustration of a hand holding a plastic bag with a ring above it (no text or symbols)

Carrying out operation of the reading light for the driver and front passenger

Abstract blue illustration of a stylized hand holding a curved object (no text or symbols)

Carrying out operation of the reading light for occupants of the rear passenger compartment

Move your hand up and down vertically under the inside rearview mirror.
or
Move your hand vertically, up and down in front of the reading lamp. The reading light is switched on or off.

312 MBUX multimedia system

Switching the search light on and off

Abstract illustration of a hand holding a small object near a vehicle (no text or symbols)

Interaction area for activating the search light

To switch on: reach with your hand into the area of an unoccupied seat.
The search light is switched on automatically for the vehicle occupants.
To switch off: withdraw the hand from the area of the unoccupied seat.
The search light is switched off again.

Automatic preselection of the outside mirrors (COMFORT/reactive)

Requirements

• The front camera is switched on.

Until now, to set the outside mirrors the desired mirror had to be selected using a preselection button in the driver's door.

With the MBUX Interior Assistant, the mirror to be set is preselected automatically by the natural movement of your head to the left or right. When the hand touches the button for adjusting the outside mirror, the LED under the button of the preselected mirror side lights up.

Use the button to set the position of the active outside mirror.

① Preselection of the outside mirrors using buttons is still possible. Further information on adjusting the outside mirrors ( page 175).
① The driver camera is also used for this application.

Calling up favorites with the V pose (INFOTAINMENT/contactless)

Requirements:

• The front camera is switched on.
- At least one favorite has been saved in the favorites list.
- The favorite is connected with the MBUX Interior Assistant.
- The area for detecting the favorites pose (V pose) is above the center console in front of the central display.
• The V pose is held for a brief time.

The V pose makes it easier to call up favorites. The front vehicle occupants can associate their own favorite with the V-pose. Some examples include a navigation destination, a radio station or a massage program for a seat.

If a favorite has not yet been saved and connected with the MBUX Interior Assistant, the multimedia system will assist you.

Illustration of a hand pressing a button on a computer screen (no text or symbols visible)

Implementation of the V-pose above the stowage compartment of the center console at the height of the central display

Position your hand above the stowage compartment of the center console at the height of the central display. The back of your hand is facing upwards. In doing so, your index and middle finger are spread to form a V. With your other fingers bent inwards.

Briefly hold the V pose. The favorite is called up.

Function of the driver camera

The driver camera is on the driver's display or in the 3D driver display.

The driver camera detects the following characteristics:

• Head position
• Viewing direction
  • Eyelid closure characteristics
• Driver's face

The driver camera is automatically activated each time the vehicle is opened with the key. The current status of the driver camera is shown in the status line of the central display.
The driver camera records image data for applications such as ATTENTION ASSIST and facial recognition, for example. The camera converts the image data directly into meta data. No image data is saved in the

process. The data is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle.

The driver camera must be set up for facial recognition before use. Teaching-in biometric data ( page 316).

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations:

• The camera is covered or dirty, fogged up or scratched.
  • The driver's face and/or eyes are covered.
• The driver is wearing glasses that block infrared.

Display messages

In the following situations display messages may be shown:

• The driver camera is inoperative.
The camera is faulty.
The Driver Camera Inoperative See Operator's Manual message appears.

314 MBUX multimedia system

- If the driver camera cannot capture the position of your head due to the position of the steering wheel or seat.

The Change the steering wheel/seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen. message appears.

- The view of the driver camera is reduced or restricted.

The The camera view of the driver is currently obstructed Affected functions: See operator's manual message appears.

The message can appear, for example, in the following cases:

• The camera's view is obstructed, e.g. due to a scarf or hat being worn.
• The driver is wearing glasses that block infrared.
• If hair partially obstructs the eyes, e.g. as with a long fringe.
  In the event of strong direct sunlight. The driver camera cannot detect the driver's eyes if the light-dark contrast is too strong.

- When one or both hands are on top of the steering wheel (twelve o'clock position).

Notes on care

For the display, please comply with the notes on caring for the interior ( page 372).

Switching the driver camera on or off

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System

▶ Intelligent Assistance

The driver camera is automatically activated each time the vehicle is switched on.

▶ Select On or Off.

When the driver camera is switched off or the The camera view of the driver is currently obstructed Affected functions: See operator's manual message appears, the following functions are not available or limited:

• The 3D driver's display ( page 290)
- The MBUX augmented reality, head-up display (only for stereo camera)(→ page 292)

• The microsleep and distraction detection function of ATTENTION ASSIST (→ page 229)
  • The facial recognition

This function serves as sensor input for authentication and unlocking of the user profile and protected applications ( page 316).

• The mirror preselection

This function allows the natural movement of the head to the left or right to automatically preselect the outside mirror to be adjusted ( page 175).

Information on users, suggestions and favorites

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile

Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process.

Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the mul-

timedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement.

If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the adjustment process by:

a) Pressing the warning message on the central display.
or
b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped.

The driver's seat is equipped with an anti-entrapment feature.

If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile.

User profiles and user-specific content

Prerequisites for the vehicle owner:

• You have a Mercedes me user account.
• You have a Mercedes me PIN.
- You have agreed to the terms of use.

• The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account.
  If one of the pre-requisites listed is missing or if no user profile has been selected, the data described in the following section will be saved in the vehicle as the standard setting. Standard settings can be changed by all vehicle users.

User profiles save personal settings. If the vehicle is used by several people, a person can change their profile settings without changing the settings of other users.

If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX high-end Rear Seat Entertainment System, the occupants in the rear passenger compartment can log in as Mercedes me users from their seats. The Multi-seat Profile Management allows three profiles to be used simultaneously. A user profile can only be activated simultaneously on one display.

Some settings apply to the entire vehicle and are displayed in all user profiles, e.g. ambient lighting and the current navigation settings. These initially belong to the driver, but can

also be changed by the other vehicle occupants in their user profile.

You can individualize a user profile in the vehicle using the set-up assistant or using the settings in your user profile. Some settings, e.g. the Mercedes me PIN and a profile photo are made in the Mercedes me App or in the Mercedes me Portal.

User-specific content and applications with personal data are protected by different levels of security. To access protected content, the Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors can be used.

The security level is set by the multimedia system and calculated from the combination of all sensor inputs. Some security levels cannot be turned off.
When a user profile is activated, the following personalized comfort systems, for example, can be adjusted or their settings loaded:

- Seat

- Ambient light

- Outside mirrors

316 MBUX multimedia system

• Roller sunblinds
  • Climate control settings

If the user profile is activated when driving,

the driver's seat position will not be adjusted.

Depending on the vehicle equipment you can, as a user, save the following settings, for example:

• Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings
• Climate control
• Ambient lighting
  • Radio (including station list)
  • Suggestions and favorites

Suggestions

The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then makes suggestions regarding navigation destinations, phone numbers and music preferences. The requirements for that are the selection of a user, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data.

Favorites

Favorites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. 100 favorites are available in total.

Configuring users, suggestions and favorites

Requirements

• The vehicle is stationary.

Multimedia system:

Adding a user

Select Add User. A QR code is loaded.
▶ Scan the displayed QR code with the Mercedes me App or any QR code scanner on a mobile device. If the Mercedes me App is not yet installed on your mobile device, you will be directed to the store of your mobile device.

▶ Follow the directions in the app.

The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. This automatically creates your user profile in the vehicle.

You will be informed when your user profile is available.

When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up assistant starts automatically after user selection.

Protecting user-specific content and applications If you add a new user, access protection is already activated for the user profile. The

Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors are available for access. Biometric sensors in the vehicle must be taught in. The authentication process then takes all taught-in and available sensors into account.

The following user-specific content and applications are protected, for example:

• User selection and user profile settings
- Biometric sensors
The teaching-in of biometric sensors is protected.

- Suggestions

The data and determination of the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations, contacts and messages are protected.

- ENERGIZING COACH

The recorded health data and their evaluation are protected.

• Mercedes me connect store

The purchase of services is protected.

▶ Switch Protect Content on or off.
▶ Switch Access Protection on or off.
When access protection is switched off, your user profile can be viewed from any seat and changes can be made.
i Access protection is switched on or off on a vehicle-specific basis.

Setting up, editing and deleting biometric recognition

The biometric data models are saved in the sensors in the vehicle. If recognition has been taught-

in, this sensor serves as a contributory factor for authentication on the multimedia system.

Select Protect Content.
Select Facial Recognition, Fingerprint Recognition or Voice Recognition.
① If necessary, authenticate yourself on the multimedia system.

Setting up facial recognition

▶ Follow the system's instructions.

Your face is scanned. A message in the driver's display or central display shows whether facial recognition was successful or not. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with the facial scan.

Setting up fingerprint recognition

Place and lift your finger several times on the fingerprint sensor under the touchscreen. The finger is scanned. If the scanning procedure is successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with your finger print.

Setting up voice recognition

Speak the sentence shown on the central display and follow the voice assistant's instructions.
If the voice recognition was successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user profile.
① Avoid background or disturbing noises during voice recognition.

Deleting biometric data

Tap on ☐, for example, behind Fingerprint Recognition.
Select Yes.

Selecting a user

When you call up your driver profile, the driver's seat and the steering wheel can be set.

You can cancel the setting process with the following actions:

• Press Tap Here to Cancel message on the central display.
• Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door.

318 MBUX multimedia system

Select Select User.
Select a user.
When requested to do so, authenticate with the Mercedes me PIN or a taught-in biometric characteristic. The user profile is loaded and activated.
① If you select Continue Without Selecting a User, no specific settings for the user profile are loaded.
Select
Select Settings.
Select System.
▶ Select Suggestions.
Select
Switch the options on or off individually. If an option is switched on and sufficient data has been gathered, personalized suggestions based on your user behavior will be offered to you on the zero layer. These are, for example, navigation destinations visited, phone num-

Configuring and deleting suggestions

bers dialed as well as suggestions based on your music preferences.
To delete collected suggestions: select ↻.
Select Yes.
The suggestions are reset.

Adding favorites from categories

Select
Select ★.
Select ▷.
Select a favorite.

Select + Create New Favorite.

Select the category.

Linking favorites with the MBUX Interior Assistant V pose

Select
Select ★.
Select >.
▶ Select Driver or Passenger.
Select the category.
Select a favorite.

System settings

Overview of the system settings menu

In the system settings menu, you can make settings in the following menus and control elements:

• Display
• Display brightness
• Control elements
• Keyboard language and handwriting recognition
• Sensitivity of the Touch Control
• Haptic operation for the touchscreen
  • MBUX voice assistant
  • MBUX Interior Assistant
• Sound
• Entertainment
• Navigation and traffic announcements
• Telephone
  Voice amplification

• Data protection

• Connectivity
  Wi-Fi, Bluetooth ^® , NFC
  • MBUX rear tablet child safety lock
  • Time & date

• Language
• Units for distance
• System PIN
• Suggestions
• Software update
• System reset

Overview of software updates

Important software updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured.

The multimedia system displays a corresponding message when a software update is available.

If the Automatic Online Update option is active, software updates are downloaded automatically. If the option is deactivated, you will be informed of new software updates once. The software updates are available for downloading for a limited period of time.

Carrying out a software update:

• You can start software updates via the communication module.
• You can start software updates via a Wi-Fi hotspot.
• You can start map updates from an external medium.

Online software updates cannot be performed via external Wi-Fi hotspots that are encrypted via TKIP.

If the Wi-Fi hotspot requires logging in via the browser, once the connection is successfully established the browser will open in order to start the update. Follow the instructions in the browser in order to start the download.
To complete software updates via the communication module, the vehicle must be connected with the Internet and a Mercedes me user account.

To complete software updates via Wi-Fi, the vehicle must be connected to an external Wi-Fi hotspot.

A software update consists of three steps:

• Downloading or copying of the data required for installation
  • Installation of the downloaded software update
• Activation of the downloaded software update

i It may be necessary to restart the MBUX multimedia system after completion of a software update.
While some software updates are being downloaded, the multimedia system cannot be operated and the vehicle functions may be restricted.
Some software updates require a safe vehicle status for the installation to be completed. They can only be carried out in a safely parked vehicle with the vehicle switched off.

For software updates requiring a safe vehicle status: when the last installation step is reached, a message appears on the central display after the

vehicle is switched off. Follow the step-by-step instructions on the central display to complete the installation.

There are software updates that can only be installed when the vehicle is safely parked, there are no more people in the vehicle and the vehicle is locked.

Availability of the driver's and central display During the installation of software updates, it is not possible to use the vehicle, central display and driver's display. You may receive the following display message when an installation is running:

The display message does not appear every time a software update is installed.

In rare cases, an error can occur during the installation. The multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version.

If it is not possible to restore the previous version, the display message shown above appears every time the vehicle is started.

Failure of the driver's display

If the driver's display fails or there is a malfunction, you may not recognize limitations in the functions of systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired. Drive on carefully and have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately ( page 454).

Further information about software updates can be found at https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Failure of the central display

If the central display fails or the display message shown above is shown continuously, several systems such as the rear view camera, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC or climate control are no longer available. Drive on carefully and consult a specialist workshop as soon as possible.

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

Requirements:

• The Wi-Fi function is activated on the multimedia system and the communication device to be connected.
• The communication device to be connected supports at least one of the connection types described.

The connection types shown depend on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The connection type must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected.

Some functions may first need to be activated on the communications device being connected. More detailed information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions.
The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings ▶ System

▶ Internet and Bluetooth

① The availability of the functions is dependent on the country.
Select Wi-Fi. The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched on.

When the Wi-Fi function is switched on, you can connect the multimedia system with external hotspots or make it available as a hotspot for external devices.

When the Wi-Fi function is switched off, it is not possible to establish a hotspot connection.

When the Wi-Fi function is switched off, no connection can be established with the MBUX rear tablet.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can purchase a data package directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store. To be able to use the data package, you conclude a separate contract with a mobile phone network provider

via the Mercedes me Store, which can be terminated at any time and for which there are no costs. This contract is a prerequisite for using the services from the previously purchased package. The availability of this option is dependent on the country. If the data package option is not available or can be upgraded, you can purchase data volume directly from the mobile phone network provider for a fee.
The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries.

Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot

Select MBUX Hotspot.
Select one of the following connection options.

Connecting using a QR code

Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the device being connected.

Alternatively: the device being connected has an integrated QR code scanner (see manufacturer's operating instructions).

▶ Scan the QR code shown. The Wi-Fi connection is established.

Connecting using NFC

▶ Activate NFC on the device to be connected.
When the NFC symbol is displayed in the MBUX Hotspot menu, hold the device to be connected to the NFC interface.
▶ Follow the instructions on the device. The Wi-Fi connection is established.

Connecting using a security key

Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is displayed with the MBUX XXXXX network name.
Enter the security key which is shown in the central display on the device to be connected.
▶ Confirm the entry.

Generating a new security key

Select the Generate New Security Key option in the MBUX Hotspot menu.
▶ Confirm the prompt with Yes. A new security key is generated.

322 MBUX multimedia system

A connection will be established with the newly created security key.

When a new security key is generated, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are re-established, the new security key must be entered.

Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering)

① This function is country-dependent.

▶ Select the Manage Internet Access option in the Internet and Bluetooth menu.

The Wi-Fi function on the mobile phone and Internet access via Wi-Fi must be activated (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

▶ Select Search for Access.

Select the network.

Log in to the Wi-Fi network.

or

Select the mobile phone with the Wi-Fi symbol.

With external Wi-Fi hotspots, which are encrypted via TKIP, online software updates cannot be carried out via the external Wi-Fi hotspot.

System language

Notes on the system language

This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English.

Setting the language

Multimedia system:

Setting the system language

A list of the available system languages is shown.

Select a language. The system language is switched to the selected language.

Resetting the multimedia system (reset function)

WARNING Risk of accident due to failure of central display functions

While the multimedia system is reset, its functions, such as the rear view camera, are not available.

▶ Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is stationary.

Requirements:

• The vehicle is switched on.

• The vehicle is stationary.

Multimedia system:

Settings System Reset

When resetting the system, personal data and settings are deleted, for example:

- Connected devices

- Individual user profiles

- Biometric data

• Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connection

The data used and saved in the multimedia system by the driver assistance systems is deleted.
① Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset must be in the cradle while the system is reset.

Select Reset.
A query appears asking if the system should really be reset.
Select Yes.
The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. The multimedia system is restarted after the system reset.
Due to data protection, as well as the function of individual driving systems and driving safety systems, it is a requirement to carry out a complete system reset before selling the vehicle or transferring it to a third party, or after use as a hire car.

AMG TRACK PACE

Function of AMG TRACK PACE

(i) This function is an on-demand feature and can be activated via Mercedes me after you purchase your vehicle. The Digital Operator's Manual contains further information on Mercedes me and on-demand features.

With AMG TRACK PACE, the driving characteristics on race tracks can be analyzed and optimized. You can drive previously saved race tracks (e.g. the Hockenheimring), or record and save new tracks. The lap times set will be stored for every track. These can be analyzed and compared with other lap times to achieve the best possible race results. Additionally, acceleration and braking operations can be measured and stored.

Note: Use AMG TRACK PACE only on closed circuits away from public roads. Adapt your driving style to your personal skill level and environmental conditions. As the driver, you are solely responsible for driving your vehicle. Park your vehicle safely before operating the application.

Setting Track Race

Multimedia system:

→ TRACK PACE ▶ Track Race

Recording a new track

Select New Track
▶ Select ▶ Start Record. at the desired starting point. The track recording starts at this point.

During track recording, sectors can be set to divide up the track.

Select Set Sector.
Select ■ Stop Recording to end track recording or cross the starting line again.
▶ Confirm the prompt with Yes.
Select the weather.

① The temperature is determined automatically.
Enter a name.
▶ Press OK to confirm.

The track is saved under the name entered.

324 MBUX multimedia system

Searching by track name

Select Search
Enter the track name.
Tracks with the searched name are displayed.

Measuring time on a saved track

Select All tracks.
Select the desired track.
Select
Select Start Time Recording if you are already at the starting line.

or

Select Navigate to for navigation to the starting line.
Timing begins automatically when the starting line has been crossed.
When _AR is selected, the track display can be switched to AR. In addition, it is possible to switch to the telemetry display by selecting N.
Select Stop timekeeping to end timekeeping.

▶ Confirm the prompt with OK.
Select the weather.
Select Yes to save the times driven for this track.

Showing readings during Track Race

The following readings can be shown:

• Tire temperature
• Miniature map
• Sector overview
• Engine data
  G-force display
• Lap overview

Select Start Time Recording.
Select
Drag the desired display from the grid on the left or right edge of the central display. The readings are shown during the Track Race.

By selecting × on the active display, you can deactivate this.

Displaying the analysis

Select All tracks. An overview of all the driven tracks appears.
Select a track.
Select a session.

The following data are displayed:

• Lap and sector times
  • Average and top speed
• Driver
• Vehicle
• Date
• Weather

Select Add Recording to use a different session as a reference value.

Select → to return to the overview.
Select Diagram.
Set the desired parameters. The analysis is displayed.

① Lap overview
② Parameter overview
3 Editing parameters
④ Deleting parameters
5 Adding new parameters

The following values can be set for the parameters, for example:

- speed

• Longitudinal/lateral acceleration
- Steering angle
- Engine speed
• Engine oil/tire temperature

Based on the analysis, you can check and optimize the driving behavior for any position on the track.

Exporting tracks (USB)

Select Tracks
An overview of all stored tracks appears.
▶ Select the desired track.
Select options □ for the desired track.
▶ Select Export Track to...
The selected track can be exported to a USB storage device connected to the vehicle.

Editing tracks and recordings

Select Tracks
▶ Select the desired track.
Select options for the desired track.
▶ Select Rename or Delete.

or

Select a track.
▶ Highlight the desired recording.
Select options.
▶ Select Export to... or Delete.

Setting Drag Race

Multimedia system:

→ TRACK PACE ▶ Drag Race

Measuring acceleration

Select Drag race options.
▶ Select Acceleration.
Set a starting speed or select Automatic. Measurement will begin as soon as the specified starting speed has been reached.
Set a target speed. Measurement will stop as soon as the specified target speed has been reached.
Start off and begin the measurement. Measurement will begin when the vehicle accelerates.

You can stop measurement early by interrupting the acceleration procedure.

Quarter-mile race

Select Drag race options.
Select Quarter Mile.
Set a target distance. Measurement will stop as soon as the specified target distance has been reached.
Start off and begin the measurement. Measurement will begin when the vehicle accelerates. Timing will run until the target distance or a maximum of one mile has been traveled.

You can stop measurement early by interrupting the acceleration procedure.

Measuring braking

Drag Race options
Select Braking.
▶ Set a starting speed or select Automatic.
Start off and begin the measurement.

Brake to a standstill. Measurement is incremental, in steps of 6 mph (10 km/h) to a standstill. If the braking procedure is started e.g. at a speed of 98 mph (157 km/h), measurement will start as soon as 93 mph (150 km/h) has been reached

Storing and calling up measured values If a measurement is completed or canceled, a prompt will appear asking whether the measurement should be saved.

▶ Confirm the prompt with OK to save.

Calling up saved measurements

Select History.
▶ Select Acceleration, Quarter Mile or Braking.
Select a measurement. The desired measurement will be displayed in detail.

or

▶ Delete a measurement.

Calling up the telemetry display

Multimedia system:

→ TRACK PACE ▶ Telemetry

The telemetry display shows current vehicle data as a digital value and as a diagram. Up to four parameters can be selected to be shown on the display.

For example:

• Engine speed
• Wheel angle
• Speed
• Steering angle
  Set the desired parameters.
  Set the time.
  The set parameters will be evaluated for the selected time on the diagram.

Configuring AMG TRACK PACE

Requirements

To connect a mobile device to the TRACK PACE app:

• The TRACK PACE app is installed on the mobile end device.
• The mobile end device is connected to the multimedia system via Wi-Fi.

Multimedia system:

TRACK PACE

Connect mobile device via the TRACK PACE app The TRACK PACE app makes it possible to record videos and to synchronize them with stored tracks.

▶ Select TRACK PACE App.
Select Authorize a New Device.
Start the TRACK PACE app on the device to be connected.
▶ Select Next and confirm the authorization prompt. A four-digit code is shown on the central display.
Enter the code on the smartphone. The device is authorized.

De-authorizing the mobile device

Select TRACK PACE App.
Select a device.
Confirm the message prompt with Yes. The device is de-authorized.

Setting the TRACK PACE display on the head-up display and driver's display

▶ Select IC and HUD Contents.
Activate or deactivate the desired contents. The contents on the head-up display and the driver's display are adapted.
① For further information on the Head-up Display ( page 292).
(i) Further information about the driver's display ( page 290).

Setting acoustic feedback

▶ Select Acoustic Feedback.
A scale with values from 0 to 10 is shown.
Select a setting.

Displaying statistics

▶ Select TRACK PACE Statistics. Statistics on the current user profile are displayed.

The following data are displayed:

• Driving time
• Track driven
• Recorded tracks
• Recorded Track Races
• Laps recorded
• Recorded Drag Races
  • Maximum design speed

Activating the ambient light

If this function is active, the vehicle interior is lit in red or green depending on delta time.

▶ Select Ambient Light.
▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Adjusting the dashcam

If the vehicle is equipped with a dashcam, it can be used in AMG TRACK PACE.

Select Dashcam.
Select Track Race or Drag Race and activate Activate Recording.
You can set which overlay is to be used in the recorded video under Video Overlay Content.

Navigation and traffic

Notes on navigation

Route guidance with augmented reality

WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depiction or wrong interpretation of the display

The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving.

Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation.
Avoid extended observation of the camera image.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of additional information

The additional information from the augmented reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation.

Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carrying out all driving maneuvers.

Switching navigation on

Multimedia system:

→

Alternatively, press the [icon] button on the steering wheel on the right (→ page 305). The zero layer with the digital map is displayed.

Navigation overview

Digital map

① Navigation module (reduced view) Route guidance active:

The navigation module shows the information relevant to the route in the zoomed-out view, e.g. the destination or a traffic delay

☒ Ends the current route guidance

Tapping opens the navigation module in the expanded view with the Route

② Destination entry
③ Searches for a parking space
4 Map orientation ⚙️ and set map type
5 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or arrow)
6 Display area with entertainment sources, phone, active applications and suggestions
Navigation window shows the next driving maneuver (zoomed out view) or the route monitor (zoomed in view) Route guidance active: route monitor shows, e.g. route sections, upcoming driving maneuvers with lane recommendations, destination, traffic delays, toll stations, 3D images at freeway exits, online content

Switches off navigation announcements Switches on navigation announcements

The following map orientations ④ are available:

• 2D and to the north
• 2D and direction of travel

• 3D and direction of travel
- Map with complete route
If the map is moved, the map switches between 3D direction of travel and 2D north orientation.

The following map types ④ are available:

• Daytime display
• Night-time display
• Satellite map
  If you notice a problem with the digital map you can report this under https://mapfeedback.here.com/#/report.

Navigation module (expanded view)

Example: route guidance is active

① Destination
② Searches for a gas station
3 Switches traffic information display on or off

Overview of the toll system

The toll system is optional equipment and is not available in all vehicles.

Debiting of toll charges at freeway toll gates is facilitated with an electronic payment system.

The toll system uses RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) for data transfer between the control unit and the toll station.

The toll system is initially switched off at the factory.

The control unit is in the vehicle glove box.

In order to be able to use the toll system, it must have been registered by the customer and activated by the service provider:

- Activate the toll system in the settings of the MBUX multimedia system or on the control unit.

• There are two ways to register and activate:

In the Mercedes me App, register the unit identification number of the control unit and activate the toll system.

- Alternatively, you can register and activate via the Toll Service app.

Activation of the toll system can take up to 48 hours after registration.

When the toll system is activated, the automatic detection of the number of vehicle occupants is initially switched off at the factory. The number of vehicle occupants is preset with one person.

The following applies for roads on which toll charges are dependent on the number of vehicle occupants:

- If the automatic detection of the number of vehicle occupants is switched off, the number of vehicle occupants must be selected manually. This ensures correct toll accounting.

- The number of vehicle occupants can be transmitted automatically. In the process, the number of seat belts worn is determined.

If the number of detected persons does not correspond with the number of persons actually in the vehicle, the number of persons must be manually selected.

The standard setting of one person does not need to be changed for roads which require toll payment regardless of the number of vehicle occupants.

The toll system enables the payment of toll charges in many states of the USA.

In Mexico, for example, the toll system can be registered and activated for journeys to the USA.

Notes on use

• You can only use the toll system once registration and activation are complete.
• Drive at the prescribed vehicle speed in the toll lane.
• Mercedes-Benz recommends operation using the MBUX multimedia system. Alternatively, this can also be done on the control unit in the glove box.
• For safety reasons, entries should be made while the vehicle is stationary.
• For further information, please consult the Mercedes me App or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

For information on how to register and activate the toll system, see the Digital Operator's Manual.

Destination entry

Requirements:

• For the online search:

• There is an Internet connection.
• Mercedes me connect is available.
• You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal.
• The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted the terms of use.

Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me

The service is available.

The service has been activated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Multimedia system:

Example: entering a POI or address

① Input line with current entry
② Search result
③ Selects destination input, displays further destination inputs with double arrow
4 Deletes an entry

⑤ Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search
⑥ Deletes the last character entered
⑦ Hides the keypad
8 Switches to handwriting recognition
Starts the MBUX voice assistant
10 Sets the written language
⑪ Switches to digits and special characters
⑫ Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters

Enter the destination in ①. The entries can be made in any order. The search results are displayed in a list.
① Online search results for POIs may contain additional information, for example opening times and prices. The information is provided by an online map service. This online function is not available in all countries.
You can enter a destination as a three-word address from what3words. This option is not available in all countries.
▶ Hide the keyboard with OK.

332 MBUX multimedia system

Select the destination in the list. The route is calculated.
① Observe the notes on the MBUX multimedia system ( page 298).

Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance

Detailed display with a route (example)

① Calls up alternative routes
② Adds an intermediate destination to the route and recalculates the route
3 Sets intermediate destination as new destination and calculates new route

4 Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of the destination
⑤ Address of the intermediate destination

After selection of a destination the route is be calculated.

▶ Select one of the options.

Calling up alternative routes

Select Routes.

▶ Select an alternative route.

Starting route guidance (there is no route yet)

Select Let's Go!.

Calling up the detailed display with destination address

▶ Pull the bar between ② and ③ upwards. Depending on the destination selection and availability, online content, for example ratings and weather information, is shown. If the destination is in a different time zone, a message is displayed.

To share a destination: select Share. This option allows you to scan the displayed QR code.
To save a destination as a favorite: select ★ Favorite and then an option.
To call up an Internet address: if a web address is available, select www.
To call the destination: if a telephone number is available, select Call.

Searching for POIs in the vicinity of the destination shown

Select In The Vicinity.
Search using categories, enter a search entry or search for a personal POI.

Selecting a route type

In the navigation module (expanded view), select Ⓞ (→ page 328).
Select Route. The route is calculated as a fast route with a short journey time. Trailer mode is available if a trailer has been coupled with the vehicle. If available, you can select online routes. Traffic

announcements for the route are taken into account via Reroute Based on Traffic ▶.
(i) Trailer mode and online routes are not available in all countries and for all vehicles.

Calculating alternative routes

In the navigation module (expanded view), select | ⚙ |.
Select View.
Activate Route Overview after Start. Alternative routes are calculated for every route.

Selecting alternative routes

If Route Overview after Start has been switched on and a route has been calculated, the function is available.
In the navigation module (expanded view), select Alternative Routes.
When the alternative routes have been calculated, display the route in the navigation window by swiping to the right or left.
Select Start.

Activating a commuter route

A user profile has been created and Allow Destination Suggestions has been activated in the user options ( page 316). Route guidance is not active.
In the navigation module (expanded view), select 🙏.
Select Route.
▶ Activate Activate Commuter Route. The navigation system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. For the daily commuter route, traffic events on the route are also reported when driving without active route guidance.
To select or delete a commuter route: selectStart or ×.
Avoiding or using route sections, e.g. highways or ferries
In the navigation module (expanded view), select ☐.
Select Route.
▶ Select Avoid Options.

▶ Activate or deactivate the avoid option.
Activating route guidance with augmented reality
In the navigation module (expanded view), select [icon].
Select View.
▶ Select Augmented Reality Video.
Activate or deactivate Augmented Reality Video. The camera's video image is shown on the central display before a turning maneuver. The video image includes additional information.
Showing property information for route guidance with augmented reality
Road guidance with augmented reality is activated.
In the navigation module (expanded view), select 🔊.
▶ Select View.
Select Augmented Reality Video.

▶ Activate Street Names and House Numbers. During route guidance, the activated options are shown as additional information in the camera image.

Using map functions

Multimedia system:

Increasing map scale

When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with one finger on the central display.

or

Move two fingers apart on the central display.

Decreasing map scale

Tap with two fingers on the central display.

or

Move two fingers together on the central display.

Moving the map

When the map is displayed, swipe in any direction with one finger on the central display.

To reset the map to the current vehicle position: select Center.

Selecting map orientation

Tap repeatedly on the compass symbol on the map.

The map orientations changes in this order:

- The 2D map view is displayed so that north is always at the top.

- The 2D map view is aligned to the direction of travel.

- The 3D map view is aligned to the direction of travel.

• The map shows the complete route.

Using services

Requirements:

• There is an Internet connection.
• Mercedes me connect is available.
- You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal.

- The vehicle is connected to a user account and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service.

Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me

• The service is available.
- The service has been activated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Multimedia system:

Showing traffic information

In the navigation module (expanded view), select Ⓞ (→ page 328).
Select View.
Activate Traffic.
▶ Activate Traffic Incidents and Free Flowing Traffic.

Traffic incidents, for example roadworks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages, are shown on the route.

The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. The smallest value for the display for traffic delays is a minute.

Displaying hazard warnings

If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic Incidents option.

In the navigation module (expanded view), select ⚙️ (→ page 328).
▶ Activate or deactivate Traffic Incidents. If the option is activated, all of the symbols are shown.

If the option is deactivated, the symbols are only shown when there is a hazard warning. The following hazards may be shown on the map:

• Accidents and breakdowns
- Slippery roads, fog, crosswinds and heavy rain
• Hazards reported manually
• Vehicle with active hazard warning light

• Roadworks
  • Additional hazards (if available)

Displaying online map contents

In the navigation module (expanded view), select ☐.
Select View.
Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover.

The service information is not shown in all map scales, e.g. weather symbols.

Parking service

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head-room clearance

If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged.

Observe the signposted headroom clearance.
If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter.
▶ Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.

NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to observe local information and parking conditions

The data is based on the information provided by the respective service providers.

Mercedes-Benz does not guarantee the accuracy of the information provided in relation to the car park or parking area.

Always observe the local information and conditions.

① This service is not available in all countries.

In the navigation module (expanded view), select 🔍 and switch on Parking.

Tap on P the map.
or
In the route overview, select P Parking Spaces.
Select the search position and search filter, e.g. Near destination and Parking garages. The map shows car parks suited to the selected settings.
Select a parking option. The map shows the parking options in the vicinity.
The following information is displayed (if available):
- Destination address, distance from current vehicle position and arrival time
• Information on the parking garage/car park
For example, opening times, parking charges, current occupancy, maximum parking time, maximum access height. The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need

for observation of the actual circumstances.
• Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards)
• Details on parking tariffs
• Number of available parking spaces
• Payment method (e.g. at parking meters)
• Services/facilities at the parking option
- Telephone number
Calculate the route ( page 332).

Notes on the dashcam

NOTE Risk of legal consequences due to violation of legal regulations and data protection provisions

You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions.

The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending

on the country in which the dashcam is operated.

This function is not permitted in all countries.

Before using the dashcam, read up on the content of the legal regulations, in particular the data protection requirements in the respective country of use.
Observe the legal regulations, in particular the data protection requirements.

① Observe the following instructions for safe operation:

• Only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices.
• Use USB-IF certified USB storage devices. USB-IF is a non-profit corporation and stands for USB Implementers Forum. Based on the USB specification, USB-IF certifies, for example, USB versions, corresponding cables and plugs as well as energy supply processes via the USB interface.

- USB storage devices may be damaged if often or permanently overwritten at high speed. Mercedes-Benz recommends a high-quality external SSD drive. The abbreviation SSD stands for Solid State Drive.

The file size and therefore the duration of single recording is limited by the limitations of the USB flash drive format. So FAT32 formatted USB flash drives do not allow files larger than 4 GB, for example.
When the file size is reached, the recording stops and you receive a notification.

The following functions are available in the Gallery app:

• Switching write protection on or off
• Deleting video files

Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam

Requirements:

- At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system.

Multimedia system:

→ Apps >> Dashcam

▶ Select the USB symbol.
▶ Select the USB device.
When USB devices contain multiple partitions, recorded video files are not always displayed in the recording list. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition.

Starting or stopping video recording with the dashcam

Requirements

• For recording and saving a video file: a USB device is connected with the multimedia system.
• The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:

ashcam

If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select a USB device ( page 337).
If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when recording starts.

To select a recording mode: select Loop Recording or Individual Recording. Loop Recording records several short video files. When the memory is full, recording is continued automatically. In doing so, other files will be overwritten starting with the oldest file.

Individual Recording stops recording when the memory limit is reached. An individual recording is automatically protected against being overwritten.

To start: select Start Recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Do not remove the storage medium during recording. Before removing the storage medium, eject it first. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device.

To end: select End Recording.

In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude and latitude) are shown in the video image. For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates may show greater inaccuracies.

A report may appear in the following cases:

• Individual Recording: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently.
  Change the USB device or delete a video file.

- The camera is not functional, the Camera Unavailable message appears. Have the camera checked in an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

- If the country border indication has been switched on.

- If an outdoor recording is started with the camera app during a dashcam recording, the dashcam recording pauses and resumes automatically after the camera recording is finished. A notification to this effect is displayed.

Telephone

Telephony

Notes on telephony

WARNING Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

▶ Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits.
If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary.

A WARNING Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion

Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when the vehicle is stationary.
As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system and mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.

WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly

If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around

and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within.

There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction.

▶ Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations.
Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets.
▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey.
▶ Always slow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compartment.

Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly:

- Loading the vehicle (→ page 141) Bluetooth® connection:

The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth ^® profile of the connected mobile phone. If the mobile phone supports all the following Bluetooth ^® profiles, the full range of features is available:

• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)
- The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system.
• MAP (Message Access Profile)
- The mobile phone message functions can be used on the multimedia system.
- HFP (hands-free profile)
- Wireless telephony is available on the multimedia system.
- SAP (SIM Access Profile)
- The car telephone has access to the SIM card data and dials into the mobile phone network via the exterior antenna.

Irrespective of this, Bluetooth ^® audio functionality can be used with any mobile radio unit.

For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manufacturer's operating instructions.

Network connection:

The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion:

• You switch into a transmission/reception station, in which no communication channel is free.
• The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available
• A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time

The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice ^® for improved speech quality. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice ^® .

Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.

Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.

Telephone menu overview

Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode)
③ Signal strength of the mobile phone network
Battery status of the connected mobile phone

5 Options
6 Messages
7 Calls up devices
B Numerical pad
9 Starts contact search

Telephony operating modes overview

Depending on your equipment, the following telephony operating modes are available:

• A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth ^③ .
• Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode).
• You can use all the functions of the multi-media system with both mobile phones.

Connecting a mobile phone

Requirements

• Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's Operator's Manual).
• Bluetooth ^ is activated on the multimedia system.

Multimedia system:

→ ▶ Phone ▶ Devices
▶ Devices

Searching for a mobile phone

▶ Select Connect New Device.

Connecting a mobile phone

Select a mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone.
If both codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.

Functions in the telephony menu

In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example:

• Making calls, e.g.:
• Accepting a call
• End Call
• Answering a call with a message
• Conference

• Accepting or rejecting a waiting call

• Managing contacts, e.g.:

• Downloading mobile phone contacts
• Managing the format of a contact's name
• Deleting favorites

• Receiving and sending messages, e.g.:

- Using the read-aloud function

- Dictating a new message

Mercedes me Apps

Mercedes me calls

Making a call via the overhead control panel

me button for service or information calls
② SOS button cover
3 SOS button (emergency call system)

Making a Mercedes me call

Press me button 1.
Making an emergency call
To open the cover of SOS button ②, press it briefly.
Press and hold SOS button ③ for at least one second.

If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.

Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button
A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the me button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system ( page 342).
Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service:

• Accident and Breakdown Management
- Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general information about the vehicle

You can find information on the following topics:

• Activation of Mercedes me connect
- Operating the vehicle
• Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
- Other products and services from Mercedes-Benz

Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center ( page 344).

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system

Requirements

• Access to a GSM network is available.
• The contract partner's GSM network coverage is available in the respective region.
• The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically.

Multimedia system:

▶ Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the display.

Then you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.

Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection

Requirements:

• The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation (→ page 221).
  • The vehicle is stationary.
  • The hazard warning lights are switched on.

① This function is not available in all countries.

The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances.

Requirements for collision detection in the context of accident recovery:

• The vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system (ATA) (code 551).
• The vehicle is equipped with the interior protection (code 882).
• The vehicle is equipped with the Anti-Theft Protection Package (code P54).
• The collision detection service with theft notification has been activated on Mercedes me connect.

If a collision is detected when the tow-away alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch the vehicle on.

The message informs you about the potentially affected area of the vehicle and the strength of the collision.

In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. This may take a few seconds.

① The availability of collision detection depends on the vehicle.

After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.

▶ Select Call.

• After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Breakdown Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (→ page 346).
• The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center takes your call and organizes the breakdown and accident assistance.

You may be charged for these services.

(i) Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls ( page 350).

In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined.
If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with Call Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later.
The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again.

Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call

If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle.

Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multimedia system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment.

To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your consent, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet.
This will contact you to confirm the appointment and if necessary consult about the details.

If you select Call Later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time.

Data transferred during a Mercedes me call If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable targeted advice and an efficient service.

The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data:

• The vehicle is switched on.
- The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone network provider.
- The quality of the mobile connection is sufficient.

Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors:

• Reason for the initiation of the call
- The available mobile phone transmission technology
• The activated Mercedes me connect services
- The service selected in the voice control system

The scope of the data transmitted depends on the vehicle model and vehicle equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available at all times.

Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services are not activated

If no Mercedes me connect services are activated, the following data is transferred:

• Vehicle identification number
- Time of the call
- Reason for the initiation of the call
• Confirmation of the data protection prompt
• Country indicator of the vehicle
- Set language for the multimedia system
- Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle

If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted:

• Current mileage and maintenance data

If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia system, the following data is also transmitted:

• Current mileage and maintenance data
- Current vehicle location

If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center:

• Current vehicle location

Data processing

The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services.

The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center.

The recorded message is not available in every country.

Mercedes me connect

Information on Mercedes me connect

Mercedes me connect consists of multiple services.

You can use the following services via the multi-media system and the overhead control panel, for example:

• Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system)
• Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System (automatic emergency call and SOS button)

The Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are available to you around the clock.

The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel ( page 342).

You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system ( page 342).

Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( page 349).

Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Information on Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management

i Accident and Breakdown Management is not available in every country. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to find out whether this function is available in your country.

The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions:

- Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (→ page 349)

If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management. Forwarding the call is however not possible in all countries.

- Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehicle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

You may be charged for these services.

- Addition to the emergency guide after automatic accident or breakdown detection ( page 343)

In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the authorized service partner or breakdown assistance.

- Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics

With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are subject to diagnostics.

If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary.

These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia system.

Please note that the service and breakdown call is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, be sure to contact the usual national emergency

number first or use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( page 349).

More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

Data transferred during Mercedes me connect call services

The data transferred during a Mercedes me connect call depends on:

• The reason for initiation of the call
- The service that is selected in the voice control system
• The activated Mercedes me connect services

You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu

When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you.

For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

① Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me Apps updated.

You can call up the menu using Apps in the multimedia system.

In the Apps menu, the following options can be available:

• Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me user account
• Deleting a connection between a user account Mercedes me and the vehicle
• Calling up the Mercedes me services
• Calling up apps such as In-Car Office or the web browser depending on availability

Web browser overview

1 Previous website
② Next website
Update
4 URL
5 Adds/removes bookmarks
6 Options
7 Settings

i Under ⋯ you have the following options:

• Tabs
• Bookmarks & History
• Reading Mode
• Share Link
• Share Content
• Request Mobile Website

① Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion.

Overview of Smartphone Integration

With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain functions on your mobile phone via the multimedia system display.

Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with Smartphone Integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth ^30 with the multimedia system.

The full range of functions for Smartphone Integration is only possible with an internet connec-

tion. The appropriate application must be downloaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched on and connected to the multimedia system via the USB port using a suitable cable.

Apps for Smartphone Integration:

• Apple CarPlay ^ (wireless connection via Bluetooth ^ also possible)
• Android Auto (wireless connection via Bluetooth ^30 also possible)

For safety reasons, the first activation of Apple CarPlay ^® or Android Auto on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary with the parking brake.

You can start Smartphone Integration using the Devices menu.

You can end Smartphone Integration via the Devices or by disconnecting the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system.

① Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connection via the device manager or the

connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary.

Overview of transferred vehicle data

When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible.

The following system information is transmitted:

• Software release of the multimedia system
• System ID (anonymized)

The transfer of this data is used to optimize communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone.

To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated.

This has no connection to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is deleted when the multimedia system is reset ( page 322).

The following driving status data is transmitted:

• Transmission position engaged

• Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving
• Day/night mode of the driver's display
- Drive type

The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation.

The following position data is transmitted:

• Coordinates
• speed
• Compass direction
  • Acceleration direction

The mobile phone uses this data to improve the accuracy of navigation, for example, when driving through a tunnel.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Information on the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ("eCall"). This feature can

help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911.

Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insufficient network coverage from the wireless service providers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted.

eCall is a standard feature in your Mercedes-Benz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data detailed in the Transmitted Data section that follows.

To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle's communication module.

Deactivation of this module prevents the activation of any and all Mercedes me connect services. After the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available.

The vehicle must be switched on before an automatic emergency call can be made.

① eCall is activated at the factory.

eCall can be deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is transferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system.

Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident.

An emergency call can be made automatically or manually.

Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.

Messages on the display

SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not on or eCall not available.

During an active emergency call, appears in the display.

You can find more information on the regional availability of eCall at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/

If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loudspeakers, microphone, air bag or the SOS button, for example, are faulty.

You can recognize a malfunction in the emergency call system by the following displays:

• A corresponding message will also appear in the driver's display.
  • The SOS button lights up red continuously.

Triggering an automatic Mercedes-Benz emergency call

Requirements:

• The vehicle is switched on.

- The starter battery is sufficiently charged. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system triggers an emergency call automatically in the following cases:

- After activation of the restraint systems such as air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices after an accident

• After an automatically initiated emergency stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist

The emergency call has been made:

• A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center.
• A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers.

The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an automatic emergency call.

If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display.

▶ Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone.

If an emergency call has been initiated:

• Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator.
• Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.
• If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle immediately.

Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call

To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long ( page 342).

or

To use voice control: use the voice commands of the MBUX Voice Assistant.

The emergency call has been made:

• A voice connection is made to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center.
• A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers.
• Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call center operator.
• Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site.

If no connection can be made to the emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the central display.

▶ Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone.

Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call

Select on the multifunction steering wheel. Depress button for several seconds.

Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

In the event of an automatic or manual emergency call the following data is transmitted, for example:

• Vehicle's GPS position data
• GPS position data on the route (a few hundred meters () before the incident)
• Direction of travel
• Vehicle identification number

- Vehicle drive type

• Number of people detected in the vehicle

- Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not

- Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically

• Time of the accident

• Language setting on the multimedia system

Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBUSA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FOR-MERC.

For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100.

Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels.

For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated:

• The current vehicle position can be determined.
• A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established.

Radio & media
Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu

Symbol Designation Function
	Play Select to start or continue playback.
	Rest Select to pause the playback.
	Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist.

Symbol Designation Function

	Settings Select to make settings.
	Home Select to return to the home screen.
	Messaging Select to call up messaging.
	Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode.

The following functions and settings are available in the Media menu:

• Connecting external data storage media with the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth®)
• Playing back audio or video files

Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu

Symbol Designation Function
	Home Select to return to the home screen.
	Messaging Select to call up messaging.
	Skip forwards/back	Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.
	Settings Select to have further options shown.The setting options are country-dependent.
HD	HD radio^TM Select to switch the HD Radio^TM function on or off.This function is not available in all countries.
	Station list Select to have the station list shown.
	Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example.

Additional functions of TuneIn Radio

① A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using Tuneln Radio.

Symbol Designation Function

	Settings The following additional settings are available in the Tuneln Radio menu:Selecting streamLogging on to or out of the Tuneln account
	Favorites Select during playback to save the station currently set as a favorite.
	Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback.
	Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio station.

Additional functions of the satellite radio SIRIUS XM ^® satellite radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing commercial-free music, sports, news and entertainment, for example. SIRIUS XM ^® satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satellites to broadcast

around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM® Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA).

① Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names

and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.

Symbol Designation Function
	Settings The following additional settings are available inthe satellite radio menu:Activate child safety lock to lock channels with adult contentSet alarm program for music and sport alertsCreate TuneMix lists to listen to music seamlessly
	Play Select to start or continue playback.
	Rest Select to pause the playback.

Depending on the frequency band selected, different functions are available to you.

Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner.

Calling up TuneIn Radio

Requirements:

• There is a user account at https://www.mercedes.me.

• The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account.
• The Tuneln Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me portal.
• The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased.
• A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference.

① New data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal.
The functions and services are country-dependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Multimedia system:

Radio

Select Tuneln Radio.
The Tuneln menu appears. The last station set starts playing.
① The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception.

Setting up satellite radio

Requirements:

• Satellite radio equipment is available.
• Registration with a satellite radio provider has been completed.
• If registration is not included when purchasing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account.

Multimedia system:

Radio SiriusXM

▶ |

Select Service Information. The service information screen appears showing the radio ID and the current subscription status.
Establish a telephone connection.
Follow the service staff's instructions. The activation process may take up to ten minutes.
You can also have the satellite service activated online. To do so, please visit https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).

Music and sport alerts

Multimedia system:

→ | ➕ | i Radio ➕ SiriusXM

Alerts

Setting music and sport alerts

This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels.

Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of matches in the live program.

Activating messages for a category

Select a category and activate

Adding messages for a category

Select a category and add a message +.
▶ Select Artist Alerts or Song Alerts in the dialog window.
The message is set for the activated track and artist. If a match is found, a prompt

MBUX multimedia system

appears asking whether you wish to change to the station.

- Automatic adjustment

Deleting messages in a category

Select a category, mark the desired messages and delete .

or

Do not mark any messages and delete all entries.

Sound settings

Overview of functions in the sound menu

The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system installed. You can find out which sound system is installed in your vehicle in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Standard sound system

The following functions are available:

• Equalizer
  Treble, mid-range and bass
  • Balance and fader
  • Volume

ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the driver's display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date.

You can hide this service display using the back button on the steering wheel.

Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases:

• Mainly short-distance driving
- When the engine is often left idling for long periods
• In the event of frequent cold start phases

Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions.

You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Displaying the service due date

Driver's display:

Service

The next service due date is displayed.

To exit the display: press the ← back button on the steering wheel.

Bear in mind the following related topic:

- Operating the driver's display (→ page 290).

Information on regular maintenance work

NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates

Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle.

Adhere to the prescribed service intervals.
Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Have the maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed if operating conditions are difficult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress.

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. It is the responsibility of the driver of the vehicle to have maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed due to actual operating conditions and/or stresses.

Examples of arduous operating conditions:

• Regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops
• Mainly short-distance driving
• Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces
• When the engine is often left idling for long periods
• Operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used

In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. If subject to increased stress, check the tires more. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected.

▶ Display and note down the service due date on the driver's display before disconnecting the battery ( page 359).

Maintenance Management

Notes about Maintenance Management

If the Maintenance Management service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to the Mercedes-Benz customer center.

The customer center transmits the data to the service partner that you have entered on the

Mercedes me website at: http://www.mercedes.me. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle.

The calculation of the optimal transmission time of the maintenance request to the service partner is subject to technical limitations that may cause the maintenance recommendation to be perceived as too early or too late or not to be made at all. In this case, you can conveniently arrange a maintenance appointment with the customer center via the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system.
① Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system are not available in every country. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to find out whether this function is available in your country.

Data transferred when using Maintenance Management

When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to determine the required scope of maintenance as well as malfunction detection and malfunction rectification.

Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use".

① Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system are not available in every country.

Telediagnosis

Notes about Telediagnosis

This service is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect if certain wear parts need to be replaced or if malfunctions have occurred in vehicle systems. If the Telediagnosis service is activated, relevant data is automatically transmitted to the manufacturer. If fault conditions are

detected by the vehicle system self-diagnosis, the system transmits recommendations for action to the Mercedes-Benz customer center depending on the fault detected. The customer center transmits the data to the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at: http://www.mercedes.me.

For selected faults, the notification that a malfunction has been detected may appear in the multimedia system with a request to contact the Mercedes-Benz customer center. From this message, a call can be made directly to the customer center for assistance.

The transmission of a notification to the multimedia system depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment and requires a fast data connection, over which the service provider has no influence.
Reliable fault detection is subject to technical limitations. Therefore, only a limited selection of faults can be detected and recommendations for action transmitted to the customer center and the service partners. Mercedes-Benz AG is continuously working on the expansion of this service. The fault detection

depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment.

Data transferred when using Telediagnostics

When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to determine the required scope of maintenance as well as malfunction detection and malfunction rectification. Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use".

The scope of the data transmitted depends on the vehicle model and equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available at all times.

Engine compartment

Opening and closing the hood

WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked

The hood may open and block your view.

▶ Never release the hood when driving.
Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood

The hood may suddenly drop into the end position.

There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement.

Do not open or close the hood if there is a person in the hood's range of movement.

WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.
• You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
  Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
  In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.

WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.

Observe the following if you must open the hood:

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.
Remove jewelry and watches.
Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

WARNING Risk of injury from touching live components

The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate with a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock.
▶ Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the vehicle is switched on.

The live components include the following, for example:

• Ignition coils
• Fuel injectors

• Electric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel injectors

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers when the hood is open

If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and the vehicle first if you need to open the hood.

Opening the hood

▶ Pull on handle ① twice.

The hood will be released and open slightly.

Then lift the hood by hand.

Closing the hood

NOTE Damage to the hood due to pressing the hood closed with your hand

If the hood is closed manually, there is a risk of dents.

▶ Do not close the hood manually.

Lower the hood to a height of around 8 in (20 cm) and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go.
If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly.

Engine oil

Checking the engine oil level using the driver's display

Requirements

• The engine has been warmed up.
• The vehicle is parked on a level surface.
• The engine is running at idle speed.

• The hood is closed.

Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style.

Driver's display:

Service

The engine oil level is shown.

One of the following messages will appear on the driver's display:

• Engine Oil Level Measuring Now...: the engine oil level cannot be determined yet.

Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving.

- Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is green and is between "min" and "max"; the engine oil level is correct.

- Engine Oil Level Refill 1,0 liq.gal. and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is yellow and is below "min";

▶ Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil.
- Engine Oil Level Reduce and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver's display is yellow and is above "max";
Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
• For Engine Oil Level Switch on Vehicle
Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level.
• Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
• Engine Oil Level System Currently Unavailable
Close the hood.

Refilling engine oil

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil

If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite.

Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler opening.
Allow the engine to cool off and thoroughly clean the engine oil from component parts before starting the vehicle.

NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives

Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifications explicitly prescribed for the service intervals.
▶ Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals.
Do not use additives.

NOTE Damage caused by adding too much engine oil

Excessive engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter.

▶ Have excess engine oil removed in a qualified specialist workshop.

Depending on driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may also be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
① Depending on the engine, the cap may be located in different positions in the engine compartment.

▶ Turn cap ① counter-clockwise and remove it.
Refill engine oil.
Replace cap ① and turn it clockwise until it engages.
▶ Check the oil level again ( page 363).

Checking the coolant level

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

▶ Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant

If you open the cap, you could be scalded.

Let the motor cool down before opening the cap.
When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses.
▶ Open the cap slowly to release pressure.

Have the coolant checked or refilled only at a qualified specialist workshop.

Refilling the windshield washer system

WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts

Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off.

Observe the following if you must open the hood:

▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan.

Remove jewelry and watches.
Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

WARNING Risk of burns from hot component parts in the engine compartment

Certain component parts in the engine compartment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system.

Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following.

WARNING - Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate

Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

Remove cap ① by the tab.
▶ Add washer fluid.
① Further information about the windshield washer fluid ( page 439).

Keeping the air/water duct free

Keep the area between the hood and the windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow or leaves.

Cleaning and care

Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash

A WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle

The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle.

After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored.

NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is activated, the vehicle will brake automatically in certain situations:

• Active Brake Assist
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
- HOLD function
• Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, switch off these systems, e.g. when towing or using a car wash.

NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash

Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions.
▶ Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash.

▶ Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
• The HOLD function is switched off.
• The 360° Camera is switched off.
- The vehicle is locked and the door handles are retracted.
- The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed.
• The outside mirrors are folded in.
- The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off.
• The windshield wiper switch is in position 0.
- The key is at a minimum distance of 20 ft (6 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid or a door could open unintentionally.
• For car washes with a conveyor system:

- Neutral N is engaged.

- The vehicle is locked from the inside.

• Do not make any hand movements in the area of the overhead control panel or deactivate (→ page 307) the Sliding Sunroof and Roller Sunblind option in the settings for the MBUX Interior Assistant.
  If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.

Automatic car wash mode

In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driving into an automatic car wash. Car wash mode can be activated at a speed of up to 12 mph (20 km/h) ( page 368).

When car wash mode is activated, the Automatic Car Wash Mode Active message will appear on the driver's display. The following adjustments will be made:

• The outside mirrors will be folded in.
- To prevent the windshield washer system from starting up automatically, the rain sensor will be deactivated.

• The comfort doors will be deactivated.
- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be deactivated.
- Vehicles with 360° Camera: the front image will be activated after approximately eight seconds.
- Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick detection will be deactivated.

If one of the settings cannot be selected, this will be shown by the symbol next to the respective setting.

Pressing Switch Off will cancel car wash mode. Above a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), car wash mode will be deactivated automatically.

You can also switch off car wash mode via the MBUX multimedia system ( page 368).

The following settings will be reset when car wash mode is deactivated:

• The outside mirrors will be folded out.
• The rain sensor will be activated.
• The comfort doors will be activated.

• Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be reset to the previously selected setting.
• Vehicles with 360° Camera: the front image will be deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h).
• Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick detection will be activated.

Activating/deactivating automatic car wash mode

Requirements

• The vehicle is stationary.
• The vehicle is switched on.

Multimedia system:

→ Settings → Vehicle → Driving

Activating automatic car wash mode

▶ Select Automatic Car Wash Mode.
Select Activate.

If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is shown by a next to the respective setting.

① For an overview of the settings made when activating automatic car wash mode ( page 366).

Deactivating automatic car wash mode

▶ Select Switch Off. The automatic car wash settings are reset.

The automatic car wash mode is automatically deactivated as soon as a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) is exceeded.

Information on using a power washer

WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles

The water jet can cause externally invisible damage.

Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail.

Do not use a power washer with round-spray nozzles.

▶ Have damaged tires or chassis parts replaced immediately.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a power washer, ensure the following:

• Keep a minimum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm) from the vehicle.
• Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your vehicle are covered with decorative film. Maintain a minimum distance of 27.6 in (70 cm) between the foiled parts of the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140°F (60°C).
• Observe the information on the correct distance in the operating instructions of the equipment manufacturer.
• Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tires, gaps, electrical component parts, batteries, illuminants or louvers.

Washing the vehicle by hand

NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress
▶ Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood.

Observe the relevant legal requirements (e.g. in some countries, washing by hand is permitted only in specially designated wash bays).

Use a mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo).
Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois.
i Observe the notes on the care of car parts ( page 371).

Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care

To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes:

Paint

• Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
• Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
• Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid.
• Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water.
  • Tar stains: use tar remover.
• Wax: use silicone remover.
• Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.
• Remove dirt immediately, where possible. Do not use any acid solutions.

Matte finish

• Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz.

• Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.

• Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels.

• Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards.
• Do not use car wash programs with a final hot wax treatment.
• Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.

In the event of paintwork damage:

• Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
• Make sure the radar sensors function ( page 223).

Notes on cleaning decorative films

Observe the "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care" ( page 369). They also apply to matte decorative films.

Observe the notes on cleaning decorative films to avoid damage.

Cleaning

- For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive

substances (e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz).

• Remove dirt as soon as possible. Avoid rubbing too hard in order not to damage the decorative film irreparably.
• If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative film is dull: use the paint cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
• Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
• Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards.
• To prevent water stains, dry a film-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash.

Avoiding damage to the decorative film

• The service life and color of decorative films are impaired by:
• Sunlight
• Temperature (e.g. hot air blower)
• Weather conditions
  Stone chippings and dirt

- Chemical cleaning agents - Oily products

• Do not use polish on matte decorative film. Polishing will have the effect of shining the film-wrapped surface.
• Do not treat matte or structured decorative films with wax. Permanent stains may occur

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In this case, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

You can obtain more information on care and cleaning agents from the manufacturer.

In the case of film-wrapped surfaces, visual differences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative film after a decorative film has been removed.

i Have work or repairs to decorative films carried out at a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center).

Notes on cleaning and care of vehicle parts

WARNING Risk of entrapment if the wind-shield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned

If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

▶ Always switch off the windshield wipers and the vehicle before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following car parts:

Wheels and rims

• Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners.
- Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components.
- To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and pads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and pads will warm up and dry out.

Windows

NOTE Damage to electronic components due to excess fluids

When cleaning the windows from the inside, fluids such as cleaning agents or water may run down and get behind trim parts of the vehicle interior and cause damage to electronic components.

▶ Use cleaning agents as sparingly as possible.
▶ Immediately absorb any excess fluids.

- Clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.

- Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning agents to clean the insides of windows.

① After changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windshield thoroughly with cleaning agents recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the

application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or glare spots.

(i) Remove external fogging or dirt on the wind-shield in front of the multifunction camera.
Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or not available ( page 223).

Wiper blades

• Move the wiper arms into the replacement position (→ page 174).
• With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth.
  ① Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating may leave residue on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too often.

Exterior lighting

• Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo).
• Use only cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.

372 Maintenance and care

Sensors

• Clean the sensors in the front and rear part of the vehicle with car shampoo, plenty of water and a soft cloth (→ page 223).
• When using a power washer, maintain a minimum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm).

Cameras

• Open the camera cover with the multimedia system (→ page 270).
• Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lenses.
• Do not use a power washer.

(i) Remove external fogging or dirt on the windshield in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or not available ( page 223).

Notes on care of the interior

WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of solvent-based care products

Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away.

Do not use any care or cleaning products containing solvents to clean the cockpit.

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts

Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them.

This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident.

▶ Never bleach or dye seat belts.

NOTE Property damage due to disinfectants

The interior includes a number of sensitive surfaces such as displays, plastics and leather.

Disinfectants can contain alcohol and other substances that penetrate and damage surfaces. Technology behind buttons and displays can also be damaged.

Do not use disinfectant on interior surfaces.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and care:

Seat belts

• Clean with lukewarm soapy water.
• Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
• Do not dry by heating them to over 176°F (80°C) or exposing them to direct sunlight.

Display

- Switch off the display and let it cool down.

• Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-LCD).
• Do not use any other agents.

Head-up display

• Clean with a soft, non-static, lint-free cloth.
• Do not use cleaning agents.

Plastic trim

• Clean with a damp microfiber cloth.
• For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.
• Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come into contact with the plastic trim.

Real wood and trim elements

• Clean with a microfiber cloth.
• Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water.
• For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.

- Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.

Headliner

- Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.

Carpet

- Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.

Steering wheels made of imitation leather

• Use a damp cotton cloth and a 1% soap solution to clean the entire steering wheel. Do not spot clean.
• Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use a microfiber cloth.
• Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.

Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINA-MICA

NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners

Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel

cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish.

• Clean with a damp cloth and a 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth.
• For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
  • Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
• Do not use a microfiber cloth.

Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material defects. Leather is also subject to a natural aging process during which the surface properties change.

Genuine leather seat covers

- Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then clean the seat covers with a damp cotton

374 Maintenance and care

cloth and wipe down with a dry cloth. Regularly clean the seat covers.

• For heavy soiling: use a leather care agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz aftercare.
• Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use a microfiber cloth.
• Do not allow the leather to become too damp.
• Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.

① Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material defects. Leather is also subject to a natural aging process during which the surface properties change.

Waves or wrinkling in the seat cover may occur due to the stress on the seat; this is caused by the natural leather material. Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear marks and aging damage and thus significantly extends its life

span. Clothing that can leave stains (e.g. jeans) may discolor the leather.

DINAMICA seat covers

• Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cloth to clean.
- Do not use a microfiber cloth.

Fabric seat covers

• Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp microfiber cloth and a 1% soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot clean.
• Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
• Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.

EASY-PACK trunk box

• Clean with a damp cloth.
• Do not use any alcohol-based thinners, gasoline or abrasive cleaning agents.

Emergency

Removing the safety vest

There is a safety vest compartment in the stow-age compartments of all doors for storing a safety vest.

To remove: pull out safety vest bag ① by loop ②.

Open safety vest bag ① and pull out the safety vest.
To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll it up and stow it in safety jacket bag ①.
Slide safety jacket bag ① along the lower edge of the armrest into the safety jacket compartment. Meanwhile, ensure that loop ② hangs out well within reach.

Remove a new reflective safety jacket from its packaging material before sliding it into the safety jacket compartment. The packaging material may otherwise cause it to slip out or make removing it difficult.

Observe the legal requirements in each country.

① Maximum number of washes
② Maximum wash temperature
Do not bleach
Do not iron
Do not tumble dry
6 Do not dry clean
⑦ Class 2 safety vest

The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed.

Replace the safety vest in the following cases:

• The reflective strips are damaged or dirty

376 Breakdown assistance

• The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded
• The fluorescence has faded, e.g. due to continuous exposure to sunlight.

Dispose of the safety vest in an environmentally responsible manner:

- To do so, contact your local waste disposal company.

Warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

Push both sides of warning triangle holder in the direction of the arrow and open it.
Remove warning triangle ②.

Setting up the warning triangle

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    A --> C["3"]
    A --> D["3"]

Fold side reflectors ① upwards to form a triangle and attach at the top using upper press-stud ②.
Fold legs ③ down and out to the side.

First-aid kit (soft sided)

First-aid kit (soft sided) ① is located on the right-hand side of the trunk and is secured with Velcro strip ②.

Flat tire

Notes on flat tire

WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire

A flat tire severely affects the driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle.

Tires without run-flat characteristics:

▶ Do not drive with a flat tire.
Change the flat tire immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:

▶ Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires).

In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equipment:

• Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire) (→ page 378).
• Vehicles with a TREFIT kit: you can seal the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TREFIT kit (→ page 379).
  • Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the

overhead control panel in the case of a break-down ( page 342).

• All vehicles: change the wheel (→ page 422).

The emergency spare wheel is available only in certain countries ( page 428).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires. A TREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicles with a Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and that are not equipped with a TREFIT kit: in the event of a flat tire, contact the Customer Assistance Center for the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system.

Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires)

WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode

When driving in emergency mode the handling characteristics are impaired.

Do not exceed the specified maximum speed of the MOExtended tires.
Avoid any abrupt steering and driving maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle.
▶ Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice:

- Banging noise

- Vehicle vibration

- Smoke which smells like rubber

• Continuous ESP ^® intervention

• Cracks in the tire side walls

▶ After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified specialist

workshop with regard to their further use.

The defective tire must be replaced in every case.

With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. However, the tire affected must not show any clearly visible damage.

You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire.

Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system: MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an activated tire pressure monitoring system.

If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows:

• Check the tire for damage.
• If driving on, observe the following notes.

Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning:

Load condition Driving distance possible in emergency mode

Partially laden 50 miles (80 km)

Fully laden 19 miles (30 km)

The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a standard tire as a temporary measure.

TREFIT kit storage location

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the storage bag for the TREFIT kit is located in the trunk or in the storage net on the left. Comply with the loading guidelines ( page 141).

Using the TREFIT kit

Requirements

• Tire sealant bottle and tire inflator compressor are ready for use (→ page 378).
  • TREFIT sticker is present.
• Gloves are present.

TREFIT kit storage location: (→ page 378)

You can use TREFIT tire sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), especially in the tire tread. You can use TREFIT in outside temperatures as low as -4°F (-20°C).

WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant

The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases:

• There are large cuts or punctures in the tire (larger than damage previously mentioned)
  • The wheel rims have been damaged
  • After journeys with very low tire pressure or with flat tires

Do not continue driving.
▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant

The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children.

If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following:

Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately using water.
If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse out the eyes using clean water.
If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately.

Change out of any clothes contaminated with tire sealant immediately.
If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately.

NOTE Overheating due to the tire inflation compressor running too long

Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption.

Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor.

Have the tire sealant bottle replaced at a qualified specialist workshop every five years.

Do not remove any foreign objects that have entered the tire.

Affix part ① of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision.
Affix part ② of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire.

Pull plug ⑥ with the cable and hose ⑤ out of the tire inflation compressor housing.
Push the plug of hose ⑤ into flange ④ of tire sealant bottle ③ until the plug engages.
Place tire sealant bottle ③ head downwards into recess ② of the tire inflation compressor.

Remove the valve cap from valve ⑦ on the faulty tire.
Screw filling hose ⑧ onto valve ⑦.
Insert plug ⑥ into a 12 V socket in your vehicle.
Switch on the vehicle.
Switch on the tire inflation compressor using On/Off switch ①.
The tire will be inflated. First, tire sealant will be pumped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase!

Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clean water.

If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene.

If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained:

▶ Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tire.

Please note that tire sealant may leak out when you unscrew the filling hose.

Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately 33 ft (10 m).

Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being achieved

If the specified tire pressure is not achieved after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance.

The braking characteristics as well as the driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

▶ Do not continue driving.
▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained:

▶ Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tire.

WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires

A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds.

Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully.
Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant.

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) for a tire sealed with tire sealant.

NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant

After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose.

Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TREFIT kit.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible disposal

Tire sealant contains pollutants.

▶ Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor.
▶ Pull away immediately.
▶ Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained

If the specified tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance.

The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired.

Do not continue driving.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Alternatively, call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap for values.
To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor.

To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button ① next to manometer ②.
When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire.
▶ Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bottle.
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there.

Battery (vehicle)

Notes on the 12 V battery

WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• When braking
• In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
  In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
  Do not drive on.
  Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

• Further information on ABS ( page 225)
• Further information on ESP ^③ (→ page 226)

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use only batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

All vehicles except vehicles with lithium-ion batteries

WARNING Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge

Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery.
To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery.

The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during jump-starting.

WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid

Battery acid is caustic.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not lean over the battery.
Do not inhale battery gases.
Keep children away from the battery.
▶ Immediately rinse battery acid off thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately.

All vehicles

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal pose of them with the household rub-

Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner.

If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the safety notes and protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion if the 12 V battery is used improperly.

Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when you are handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, an apron and a safety mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor immediately.

Do not place heavy objects on the surface of the battery or use the battery to support a person in any way.

Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

Observe the following if you are intending not to use the vehicle for an extended period of time:

• If available: activate standby mode (→ page 222).
• Alternatively: connect the battery to a battery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery.

Notes on the 48 V battery

WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the battery

Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This

can restrict functions relevant for safety systems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular:

• When braking
• In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions
  In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
  Do not drive on.
  Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

• Further information on ABS ( page 225)
• Further information on ESP ^® (→ page 226)

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries

Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal pose of them with the household trash.

Li-ion Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

Have any work on the 48 V battery carried out exclusively at a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion if the 48 V battery is used improperly.

The surface of the 48 V battery may be hot.

Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks.

Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse off splashes of electrolyte or acid with plenty of clean water. Consult a doctor immediately.

Do not place heavy objects on the surface of the battery or use the battery to support a person in any way.

Do not perform any work on the battery. Always have any work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not disconnect the battery yourself. Do not remove the battery yourself. Do not attempt to open the battery.

Keep children away.

Wear safety glasses.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time:

- If available: activate standby mode (→ page 222).

Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment.

NOTE Damage to the battery due to over-voltage

When charging using a battery charger without a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged.

Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

All other vehicles

When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment.

NOTE Damage to the battery due to over-voltage

When charging using a battery charger without a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged.

▶ Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

WARNING Risk of explosion due to the ignition of hydrogen gas

If there is a short circuit or sparks are created, there is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when you charge the battery.

▶ Make sure that the POSITIVE terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts.
▶ Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.

When connecting and disconnecting the battery, always observe the sequence of battery terminals described.
During starting assistance, always take care to connect only battery terminals of identical polarity.
During starting assistance, observe the sequence described for connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables.
Do not connect or disconnect the battery terminals with the engine running.

WARNING Risk of explosion due to a mixture of explosive gases

A mixture of explosive gases can escape from the battery during charging and jump starting.

▶ Fire, open flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.
Make sure that there is sufficient ventilation.
Do not stand over the battery.

WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen battery

A discharged battery may freeze at temperatures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charging, battery gas can be released.

▶ Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing starting assistance.

If the indicator/warning lamps on the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.

The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures.

It is recommended that you have a thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

All vehicles

NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine

Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel.

Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine.

Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery:

• Use only undamaged jumper cable / charging cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
• Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable / charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start connection point.
• The jumper cable / charging cable must not come into contact with any parts that may move when the engine is running.

• Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged.
- Keep away from fire and naked flames.
- Do not lean over the battery.

Observe the additional following points when charging the battery:

• Use only battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
• Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery.

Observe the additional following points during starting assistance:

• Starting assistance may be provided only using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
  • The vehicles must not touch.
• Vehicles with gasoline engines: jump-start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold.

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Preparing for starting assistance/the charging process

Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
▶ Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Switch off the vehicle and all electrical consumers.
Open the hood.

Open cover 1.
Slide protective cover ② of POSITIVE contact ③ on the jump-start connection point in the direction of the arrow.

Starting assistance

Connect the POSITIVE contacts of the vehicles with the jumper cable. Start with your own vehicle first.
Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
Connect the negative terminal of the donor battery to ground point of your vehicle ④

using the jumper cable. Start with the donor vehicle first.

Start the engine of your own vehicle.

Let the engines run for several minutes.

Before disconnecting the jumper cables, switch on an electrical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window defroster or the lighting.

When starting assistance has finished:

First, remove the jumper cable from the ground point of your own vehicle and the negative terminal of the donor battery, then remove the jumper cable from the POSITIVE contacts of both vehicles. Always start with your own vehicle first.

Close protective cover ② of POSITIVE contact ③ and close cover ①.

Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Charging the 12 V battery

Connect the POSITIVE contacts of the vehicle and the charger with the charging cable. Start with the vehicle first.
Connect the NEGATIVE contact of the charger and ground point ④ on the vehicle with the charging cable. Start with the charger first.
▶ Start the charging process.

When the charging process is complete:

Remove the charging cable from ground point on the vehicle and the NEGATIVE contact of the charger first and then from the POSITIVE contacts on the vehicle and charger. Always start with the vehicle first.
Close protective cover ② of POSITIVE contact ③ and close cover ①.

Replacing the 12 V battery

Observe the notes on the 12 V battery ( page 383).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself:

• Always replace a faulty battery with a battery that meets the specific vehicle requirements. The vehicle is equipped with a battery using AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat) technology or a lithium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is guaranteed only with an AGM battery or lithium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use only batteries that have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
• Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fitting or terminal covers from the battery being replaced.
• Make sure that the vent hose is always connected to the original opening on the side of the battery.

Install any existing or supplied cell caps.

Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape.

- Make sure that detachable parts are reconnected in the same way.

Tow starting or towing away

Permitted towing methods (not plug-in hybrid)

NOTE Damage from automatic braking

If one of the following functions is activated, the vehicle will brake automatically in certain situations:

• Active Brake Assist
• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
- HOLD function
• Active Parking Assist

To avoid damage to the vehicle, switch off these systems, e.g. when towing or using a car wash.

Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away.

For towing with both axles on the ground, use a tow rope or tow rod. Do not use tow bar systems ( page 289).

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly

Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

Towing with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company.

Vehicles with rear wheel drive

Permitted towing methods
Both axles on the ground	Yes, for a maximum of 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)
Front axle raised	No
Rear axle raised	Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the center position with a steering wheel lock

4MATIC vehicles

Permitted towing methods
Both axles on the ground	Yes, for a maximum of 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h)
Front axle raised	No
Rear axle raised	No

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground

Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods.

Make sure that the battery is connected and charged.

When the battery is discharged, the following actions cannot be performed:

the vehicle cannot be started.

the electric parking brake cannot be released or applied

The transmission cannot be shifted to positionNorP

① If the transmission cannot be shifted to position [N] or the driver's display in the instrument cluster does not show anything, have the vehicle transported (→ page 392). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transportation.

NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long distances

The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distances.

A lowing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km) must not be exceeded.

WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur:

• The towing eye may become detached.
- The vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or rollover.

Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or

towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass.

If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its weight must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.

Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( page 432).
Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door; the transmission will otherwise automatically shift to .
▶ Install the towing eye (→ page 394).
Fasten the towing device.

NOTE Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar

Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes.

▶ Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism.
Do not activate the HOLD function.
Deactivate tow-away alarm ( page 111).

▶ Deactivate Active Brake Assist ( page 250).
▶ Shift the transmission to position N.
Release the electric parking brake.

A WARNING Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process

Safety-related functions are limited or no longer available in the following situations:

• The vehicle is switched off.
- The brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning.
- The energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.

When your vehicle is towed away, significantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required.

Use a tow bar.
Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away.

NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power

If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged.

▶ Pull away slowly and smoothly.

Loading the vehicle for transport

Requirements

• The vehicle is stationary.
• The vehicle is switched off.
- The driver's display is in the initial state with no menus open (→ page 290). Transport is also possible with a warning message visible.
• The 12 V battery is charged.

▶ Select vehicle transport.

The noise certification mode is intended exclusively for the technical test organization. It restricts the drive power of the vehicle and must not be used in customer operation.

If necessary, set the system language ( page 322).
Observe the notes on towing away ( page 390).
Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle.
▶ Switch on the power supply ( page 193).
Shift the transmission to position N.

The transmission may be locked in position in the event of damage to the electrics. To shift to , provide the on-board electrical system with power (→ page 387).

NOTE Possible damage to the vehicle when loading or unloading

When loading or unloading, the vehicle must be raised to transport level.

If the transport settings are not shown or the Vehicle Not Ready for Loading message is displayed, the vehicle may not be loaded or unloaded.

If required, raise the vehicle to transport level again.
▶ A vehicle that cannot be raised to transport level may not be loaded or unloaded using a ramp. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of accident due to activated transport level

If the vehicle is raised to transport level, driving and driving safety systems have only limited availability and the view from the vehicle is restricted.

Driving safety is severely restricted and there is a risk of an accident!

Do not use transport level in normal road operation.
Only activate and use transport level to load the vehicle and when not on public roads.
▶ Ensure that no persons or obstacles are located in the area surrounding the vehicle.

Raising the vehicle to transport level

Press the ↻ button for at least five seconds.
Immediately press and hold the OK button for at least one second. The For Transport Level Switch On Vehicle message is displayed.
Switch on the vehicle(→ page 194). The transport settings are displayed.

Swipe downward to select Transport Level and press OK. The vehicle is raised and the Vehicle raising... Do not drive onto ramp yet message is displayed for 5 seconds. The raising process can last up to 60 seconds and can be canceled with the button.
When raising, do not switch off the vehicle.

While the vehicle is being raised, you can maneuver at a maximum speed of 25 mph (40 km/h).

Before loading the vehicle, wait until the transport level has been reached and the Transport Level status is shown.

If the vehicle is raised to transport level, the transport settings will continue to be shown even after a restart. Operation of the driver's display is restricted.

When the vehicle is at transport level, it is lowered again in the following situations:

• When driving faster than 25 mph (40 km/h).
  • The 12 V battery is discharged.

The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active level.

Transporting the vehicle

Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
Shift the transmission to position P.
Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
▶ Switch off the vehicle and the power supply.
▶ Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

4MATIC vehicles

Diagram of two cars on a rail track with a blue X-marked cross symbol (no text or labels)

Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle.

NOTE Damage to the drive train due to incorrect positioning of the vehicle

Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehicle.

Unloading the vehicle

Make sure that the vehicle is raised to transport level before unloading.

Lowering the vehicle after unloading

▶ Switch on the power supply.
Start the vehicle.
In Transport Settings, swipe up to select the Standard Level and press OK. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active level and the Lowering Vehicle... message is displayed.
After the vehicle has been lowered, press the button for at least two seconds. Transport Settings closes.

Towing eye storage location

Line drawing of a car interior with a numbered component (1) and no visible text or symbols

Towing eye Ⓞ is located under the trunk floor. Depending on the vehicle version, the towing eye is in a different position in the trunk.

Installing and removing the towing eye

Press the mark on cover ① inwards and remove.

Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten.
After removing the towing eye, engage cover in the bumper.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch

When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process.

Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow away or tow start the vehicle.
Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle during recovery.

Tow-starting the vehicle (emergency engine start)

NOTE Damage to the automatic transmission due to low-starting

Tow-starting the vehicle can damage the automatic transmission.

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Electrical fuses

Notes on electrical fuses

WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines

If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded.

This could result in a fire.

▶ Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses containing the correct amperage.

NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses

Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or systems or their functions being considerably restricted.

▶ Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz with the respective specified fuse rating.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and fuse rating. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found on the fuse assignment diagram.

Fuse assignment diagram: in the vehicle document wallet.

NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture

Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction.

When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box.
When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned correctly on the fuse box.

If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.

Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:

• The vehicle is secured against rolling away.

• All electrical consumers are switched off.
• The vehicle is switched off.
The electrical fuses are located in the following fuse boxes:
- Fuse box on the driver's side of the engine compartment (→ page 396)
- Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (→ page 398)
- Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (→ page 398)
- Fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel ( page 398)

Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment

Requirements:

• Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 395).
• Have the following tools readily available:
• a dry cloth

a screwdriver with an appropriate head

Opening

(i) Depending on the vehicle equipment, access to the fuse box may be limited. Mercedes-Benz recommends consulting a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

WARNING Risk of injury from using the

windshield wipers when the hood is open

If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage.

Always switch off the windshield wipers and vehicle before opening the hood.

Top-down line drawing of a car's front engine compartment showing vent, grille, and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Release the rotary catches on cover ① and pull the cover up and out.
Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be an electrical component ② on the fuse box lid. If present, unscrew screw ③ and put the component to the side without disconnecting the electrical connection.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

If present, release hoses ④ from the retaining clips on the fuse box and vehicle body.

If present, release hoses ⑤ from the retaining clips in the engine compartment and vehicle body.

Unscrew screws ⑥ and fold out bar ⑦.

Unscrew screws Ⓑ and remove fuse box lid ⏱ to the side.

Closing

▶ Check whether the seal is positioned correctly in lid ⑨.
Place lid ⑨ on the fuse box and tighten screws ⑧.

Fold back bar ⑦ and tighten screws ⑥.
If present, engage hoses ⑤ in the retaining clips in the engine compartment and vehicle body.
If present, engage hoses ④ in the retaining clips on the fuse box and vehicle body.
If present, insert electrical component ② into the holder on the fuse box lid and tighten screws ③.
Insert cover ① and engage the rotary catches.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit

- Observe the notes on electrical fuses (→ page 395).

The fuse box is under a cover on the side of the driver's side of the cockpit.

Open cover ① in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

Mercedes-Benz recommends you have the fuse box opened at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell

Requirements

- Observe the notes on electrical fuses (→ page 395).

Open cover ① in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the trunk

Requirements:

- Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( page 395).

Diagram of a car interior showing a blue arrow pointing to a component labeled '1' (no text or symbols beyond the label)

Fold cover ① down in the direction of the arrow.

Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics

Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics.

If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires

WARNING Risk of injury through damaged tires

Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss.

▶ Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately.

WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insufficient tire tread

Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip.

In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions.

Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires.

Minimum tread depth for:

• Summer tires: 18 in (3 mm)
• M+S tires: 16 in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

Carry out the following checks on all wheels regularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving off-road:

- Check the tire pressure (→ page 402).

• Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage.
- Check the valve caps.
- Visually inspect the tire tread depth and the tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is 18 in (3 mm) and for winter tires 16 in (4 mm).

Close-up of a car tire tread pattern with blue arrow and triangle annotation (no readable text or symbols)

Six marks show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tire tread depth of approximately 116 in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

Notes on snow chains

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrectly installed snow chains

If you have installed snow chains on the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components.

▶ Never install snow chains on the front wheels.
Only install snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs.

NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to mounted snow chains

If you mount snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage components of the vehicle body or chassis.

▶ Only mount snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles.

Observe the following notes when using snow chains:

• Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center.
• For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard.
• Comply with the installation instructions of the snow chain manufacturer.
• If snow chains are installed, the maximum permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h).
• Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed.
• Vehicles with level control: if snow chains are installed, only drive at raised vehicle level ( page 262).
• Vehicles with rear axle steering: if snow chains are installed, only drive with snow chain mode active ( page 401).

You can deactivate ESP ^® to pull away (→ page 227). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.

Activating or deactivating snow chain mode

Multimedia system:

▶ Activate or deactivate Snow Chain Mode.

When the function is active, the vehicle behaves as if snow chains were installed. For example, the maximum steering movement of the rear wheels is limited and the turning circle is thus increased.

Additionally, parts of the driving and driving safety systems are not available when snow chain mode is active.

Tire pressure

Notes on tire pressure

WARNING Risk of accident due to insufficient or excessive tire pressure

Underinflated or overinflated tires pose in particular the following risks:

• The tires can burst.
- The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
- The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.

Comply with the recommended tire pressures and check the tire pressure of all tires, including the spare wheel, regularly:

- Monthly

- When the load changes

• Before embarking on a longer journey

• If operating conditions change, e.g. off-road driving
  Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary.

Tire pressure which is too high or too low can:

• Shorten the service life of the tires.
• Cause increased tire damage.
• Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning.

WARNING Risk of accident due to too low a tire pressure

Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the braking properties and the handling characteristics.

▶ Avoid excessively low tire pressure.

Tire pressure which is too low can cause: • Tire defects as a result of overheating

• Impaired handling characteristics
- Irregular wear
- Increased fuel consumption

WARNING Risk of accident due to too high a tire pressure

Tires with excessively high pressure can burst. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the braking properties and the handling characteristics.

▶ Avoid excessively high tire pressures.

Tire pressure which is too high can cause:

• Increased braking distance
  • Impaired handling characteristics
• Irregular wear
  • Impaired driving comfort
• Susceptibility to damage

WARNING Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tires

The wheels, valves or tires could be damaged. Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires bursting.

Examine the tires for foreign objects.
▶ Check whether the tire has a puncture or the valve has a leak.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

You can find information on the recommended tire pressures for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels:

• Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar of your vehicle (→ page 407).
• Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (→ page 403).

Observe the maximum tire pressure ( page 413).

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not

permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure.

Only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires:

• The vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
• The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure.

Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: you can also see the tire pressure in the driver's display ( page 406).

The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect the ride comfort.

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable accessories on tire valves

If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and

malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss.

Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve.

Tire pressure table

The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

① The data shown in the images is example data.

The tire pressure table shows the recommended tire pressure for all tires approved for this vehicle. The recommended tire pressures apply for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle.

If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for those tire sizes and their respective load condition.

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this.

Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall ( page 414).

• Tire and Loading Information placard (→ page 407)
  • Maximum tire pressures (→ page 413)

Checking the tire pressure manually

Read the tire pressure recommended for the current operating conditions from the tire and loading information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure.
Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked.
Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve.
Read the tire pressure.
If the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value.
If the tire pressure is higher than the recommended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge.
Screw the valve cap onto the valve.

Further related subjects:

• Notes on tire pressure (→ page 402)
• Tire pressure table (→ page 403)

- Tire and loading information placard (→ page 407)

Tire pressure monitoring system

Function of the tire pressure monitor

DANGER Risk of accident due to incorrect tire pressure

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when

the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

The system uses a tire pressure sensor to check the pressure and temperature of the tires fitted on the vehicle.

The tire pressure and tire temperature appear on the driver's display.

If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages (→ page 502) or the warning lamp on the driver's display (→ page 526).

The tire pressure monitor is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation.

In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference values by restarting the tire pressure monitor manually ( page 406).

System limits

The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations:

• incorrect reference values were taught in
• sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tire, for example
• there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source

- Checking the tire pressure with the tire pressure monitoring system

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on.

Driver's display:

Service
Press OK to confirm.

One of the following indicators will appear:

• Current tire pressure at each wheel:

• Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes.: current values are not yet known to the system. The pressure/temperature values for each tire will be displayed as soon as they are known to the system.
• Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being monitored.
  Compare the current tire pressure with the recommended tire pressure for the current operating condition ( page 403). Addition-

ally, observe the notes on cold tires ( page 402).

① The values shown on the driver's display may deviate from those of the tire pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tire pressure value indicated by a tire pressure gauge will be higher than those shown on the driver's display.

Bear in mind the following related topic:

• Notes on tire pressure (→ page 402)
Restarting the tire pressure monitoring system

Requirements

- The recommended tire pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on each of the four wheels ( page 402).

Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations:

• The tire pressure has changed.
- The wheels or tires have been changed or newly installed.

Driver's display:

Service

▶ Select Tire Pressure and confirm with OK.
Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the steering wheel.
The Use current pressures as new reference values? message is shown in the driver's display.
Select Yes and confirm the restart with OK. The Tire Pressure Monitor Restarted message is shown in the driver's display.

Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow ⏻ warning lamp goes out.

After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The current tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored.

If the tire pressure levels are not within the specified range, the Please Correct Tire Pressure message appears.

Bear in mind the following related topic:

• Notes on tire pressure (→ page 402)

Loading the vehicle

Notes on the Tire and Loading Information placard

WARNING Risk of accident from overloaded tires

Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteristics and lead to brake failure.

▶ Observe the load rating of the tires.
The load rating must be at least half the permissible axle load of the vehicle.
▶ Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.

The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.

Line drawing of a car interior showing the seat, dashboard, and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

① Tire and Loading Information placard

① The data shown in the illustration is example data.

The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the following information:

• Maximum number of seats ② according to the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle.

• Maximum permissible load ⓑ comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage.
- Recommended tire pressures ① for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Please also note:

• Information on permissible weights and loads on the vehicle identification plate ( page 432).
  • Information on tire pressure in the tire pressure table ( page 403).

Further related subjects:

• Determining the maximum permissible load ( page 408)
• Notes on tire pressure (→ page 402).

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pursuant to

the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".

(1): Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
(2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4): The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5): Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
① Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Even if you have calculated the total load carefully, you should still make sure that the maximum permissible gross weight and the maximum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate.

Have your loaded vehicle – including driver, occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle weighbridge.

The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate.

Further related subjects:

• Calculation example for determining the maximum load ( page 409)
• Tire and Loading Information placard (→ page 407)
  • Tire pressure table ( page 403)
  • Vehicle identification plate (→ page 432)

Calculation example for determining the maximum load

The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard ( page 407).

The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.

Step 1

Example 1 Example 2
Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)	1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

410 Wheels and tires

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2
Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)	5	1
Distribution of the occupants Front: 2	Rear: 3	Front: 1
Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)	Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)	Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg)
Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2
Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)	1500 lbs (680 kg) - 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg)	1500 lbs (680 kg) - 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg)

Tire labeling

Overview of tire labeling

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

② DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire Identification Number

Maximum tire load ( page 413)

Maximum tire pressure ( page 413)

⑤ Manufacturer

6 Tire characteristics (→ page 414)

7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index ( page 414)

9 Tire name

The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Tire Quality Grading

In accordance with the US Department of Transportation's "Uniform tire Quality Grading Standards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three performance factors:

① Tread wear grade

② Traction grade

3 Temperature grade

① The data shown in the illustration is example data.

The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated.

Tread wear grade

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1\1/2) times as

412 Wheels and tires

well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction grade

DANGER Risk of accident due to inadequate traction

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests.

▶ Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions.

NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin

Avoid wheelspin.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Temperature grade

WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.

▶ Observe the recommended tire pressure.
▶ Regularly check the pressure of all the tires.
Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced.

① The data shown in the illustration is example data.

The TIN is a unique identification number to identify tires and comprises the following:

• DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol marks ① indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation.
• Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ② contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (→ page 418).
• Tire size: identifier ③ describes the tire size.
• Tire type code: tire type code ④ can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire.
• Manufacturing date: manufacturing date provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008).

Information on the maximum tire load

i The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Maximum tire load ① is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (→ page 407).

Specifications for maximum tire pressure

① The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Never exceed maximum tire pressure ① specified for the tire. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure ( page 403).

414 Wheels and tires

Information on tire characteristics

① The data shown in the illustration is example data.
This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall ① and under tire tread ②.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index

WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tire load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model.
Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

① First letter(s)
② Nominal tire width in millimeters
Aspect ratio in %
4 Tire code
5 Rim diameter
6 Load-bearing index
7 Speed rating
Load index
① The data shown in the illustration is example data.

Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

First letter(s) 1:

• Without: passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards.
• "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US manufacturing standards.
• "LT": light truck tires according to US manufacturing standards.
• "T": compact emergency spare wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency.

Aspect ratio 3:

Ratio between tire height and tire width in percent (tire height divided by tire width).

Tire code ④ (tire type):

• "R" radial tire
• "D": bias ply tire
• "B": bias belted tires
• "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above 149 mph (240 km/h) (optional)

Rim diameter 5:

The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in).

Load-bearing index 6:

Numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corresponds to 1,356 lbs (615 kg)).

The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of your vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit.

See also:

• Maximum permissible load on the Tire and Loading Information placard ( page 407)
• Maximum tire load (→ page 413)
- Load index

Speed rating 7:

Specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire.

① An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h).

Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

416 Wheels and tires

Index Speed rating
ZR...Y1	up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(.Y)1	over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR1	over 149 mph (240 km/h)

• Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code ④ is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h).
• If your tire code ④ includes "ZR" and there is no speed rating ⑦, find out what the maximum speed is from the tire manufacturer.
• If load-bearing index ⑥ and speed rating ⑦ are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To find out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating
QM+S2	up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
TM+S2	up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
HM+S2	up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
VM+S2	up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

Winter tires bear the snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow.

Load index 8:

• No specification given: standard load (SL) tire
- "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or reinforced tire
• "Light Load": light load tire

- "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubber-coated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials.

Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehicle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard

1 "ZR" stated in the tire code.
2 Or "M+S" for winter tires.

to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is printed on the side wall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressure: the recommended tire pressure is the tire pressure specified for the tires mounted on the vehicle at the factory.

The tire and information placard contains the recommended tire pressure for cold tires, the maximum permissible load and the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

The tire pressure table contains the recommended tire pressure for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle.

Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not.

Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, any accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maximum load and the weight of optional equipment installed at the factory.

Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be printed on the side wall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity of the tire more precisely.

Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage.

Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressure: maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two.

PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure.

Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent.

Tire pressure: the pressure inside the tire which applies an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road.

Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim.

Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead.

Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.

Traction: traction is the grip resulting from friction between the tires and the road surface.

Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the

tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat positions in a vehicle.

Maximum permissible payload weight: nominal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires

WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect wheel and tire dimensions

If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the service brakes or components in the brake system and in the wheel suspension may be damaged.

▶ Always replace wheels and tires with ones that fulfill the specifications of the original part.

For wheels, pay attention to the following:

• Designation
• Type

For tires, pay attention to the following:

• Designation
• Manufacturer
• Type

WARNING Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tire load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating

Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model.
Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

NOTE Vehicle and tire damage caused by non-approved tire types and sizes

For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.

These tires are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP ^® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows:

• MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
• MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tires only for certain wheels)
- MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires)

Otherwise, certain properties, such as handling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely affected. Furthermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehicle.

Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea- ded tires

Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires.

For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed.

Do not use used tires if you have no information about their previous usage.

NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when driving over obstacles

Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tires being damaged when driving over obstacles increases.

Avoid obstacles or drive especially carefully.
▶ Reduce your speed when driving over curbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes.
▶ Avoid particularly high curbs.

NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes

Parking on curbs or in potholes can damage the wheels and tires.

Only park on as level a surface as possible.

▶ Avoid curbs and potholes when parking.

NOTE Damage to electronic component parts due to the use of tire-installing tools

Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system: There are electronic component parts in the wheel.

If tire-installing tools are positioned in the area of the valve, the electronic components could be damaged.

▶ Tire-installing tools should not be applied in the area of the valve.
Always have tires change at a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures

At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, causing permanent damage to the tires.

At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use M+S tires.

Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety.

Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about:

- Suitability

• Legal stipulations
  • Factory recommendations

WARNING Risk of accidents with sports tires

The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk of skidding or hydroplaning on wet roads is increased.

In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature.

Switch on ESP ^® and adapt your driving style accordingly.
▶ Use M+S tires at outside temperatures of less than 45^ F ( 7^ C).
▶ Only use tires suitable for the intended use.

Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires:

• Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial.
- Only use tires and wheels of the same type (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make.
- Only install wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right).

It is only permissible to install a different wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop.

• Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: all installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system.
• At temperatures below 45^ F ( 7^ C) use winter tires or all-season tires marked M+S for all wheels.

Winter tires provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.

• For M+S tires, only use tires with the same tread.
• Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tires installed.
  If the tire's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision.
• Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km).
• Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.
• When replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TREFIT kit after replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires.

For more information on wheels and tires, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

• Notes on tire pressure ( page 402)

• Tire and Loading Information placard (→ page 407)
• Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (→ page 414)
• Tire pressure table (→ page 403)
• Notes on the emergency spare wheel (→ page 428)

Notes on rotating wheels

WARNING Risk of injury through different wheel sizes

Rotating the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged.

Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions.

Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" ( page 418)

422 Wheels and tires

The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ:

• Front wheels wear more on the tire shoulder
- Rear wheels wear more in the center of the tire

Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).

On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained.

Notes on storing wheels

When storing wheels, observe the following notes:

• After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.
- Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease or fuel.

Overview of the tire-change tool kit

Apart from some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Required tire-changing tools may include, forexample:

• Jack
• Chock
• Lug wrench

The tire-change tool kit is located in tool bag on the trunk floor.

① Depending on the equipment, the tool bag may be in other positions on the trunk floor.
① When stowing the tool bag, make sure that it is adequately secured.

Top-down line drawing of a car interior with a highlighted component (no text or symbols)

The tool bag contains:

• Jack
• Gloves
• Lug wrench
• Alignment bolt
• Folding chock
• Ratchet for jack

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change

Requirements:

• The vehicle is not on a slope.

• The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground.
  • The required tire-change tool kit is available.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire-change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools.

▶ Apply the electric parking brake manually.
Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position.
Shift the transmission to position P.
▶ Vehicles with level control system: Set the normal vehicle level ( page 262).
▶ Switch off the vehicle.
Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started.
Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
Remove the hub cap if necessary ( page 423).
▶ Raise the vehicle ( page 423).

Removing and installing the wheel trim/hub caps

Requirements

- The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (→ page 422).

Aluminum hub cap

To remove:

Position socket ② from the tire-change tool kit on hub cap ①.
Position wheel wrench ③ on socket ②.
Using wheel wrench ③, turn hub cap ⑪ counter-clockwise and remove it.

To install:

▶ Follow the instructions above in reverse order.
i Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Requirements

• There are no persons in the vehicle.
• The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (→ page 422).
• The hub caps have been removed (→ page 423).

Important notes on using the jack:

• Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle.
• The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle.
• The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface.

424 Wheels and tires

- The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support point.

Diagram showing two mechanical linkage configurations with blue X marks indicating joint points (no text or symbols present)

Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:

• Never place your hands and/or feet under the vehicle.
• Never lie under the vehicle.
• Do not start the vehicle and do not release the electric parking brake.
• Do not open or close any doors or the trunk lid.

Diagram of a bicycle wheel with a blue arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws completely.

Side view of a sedan with two upward arrows indicating motion or pressure direction (no text or symbols)

Position of the jack support points

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack

If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised.

▶ Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle.

NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to the jack

If you do not position the jack at the jack support points provided for this purpose, you could damage your vehicle.

Only position the jack at the jack support points provided for this purpose.

Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible.

Position support ② of jack ④ on jack support point ①.
Turn ratchet wrench ③ clockwise until jack support ② sits completely on jack support point ① and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

Continue to turn ratchet wrench ③ until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.
Loosen and remove the wheel ( page 425).

Removing a wheel

Requirements

• The vehicle is raised.

When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

NOTE Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel

Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repositioning the wheel.

Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when removing and repositioning.

NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface.

Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.

Line drawing of a bicycle wheel with a numbered component, no text or symbols present

Screw centering pin ① into the thread instead of the wheel bolt.
Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts completely.

Remove the wheel.

Installing a new wheel

Requirements

- The wheel to be changed is removed and the centering pin is screwed in (→ page 425).

WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel

Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/wheel nuts to come loose.

▶ Never oil or grease the threads.
In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads replaced.
Do not continue driving.

Observe the information on the choice of tires ( page 418).

For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when installing.

NOTE Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel

Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repositioning the wheel.

Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when removing and repositioning.

Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the centering pin and push it on.

WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.

▶ Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (→ page 418).
For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question.

NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing in the first wheel bolt

If the wheel has too much play when screwing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged.

▶ Press the wheel firmly against the wheel hub when screwing in the first wheel bolt.

Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight.

Unscrew and remove the centering pin.
Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.
▶ Lower the vehicle ( page 427).

Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change

Requirements

• The new wheel has been installed ( page 426).

NOTE Risk of vehicle jack becoming trapped by the AIRMATIC system

If the AIRMATIC system has released air when raising the vehicle, the jack can become trapped when the vehicle is lowered.

Start the engine. This adapts the vehicle level.

Remove the jack from under the vehicle.

To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible and turn counter-clockwise.

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["4"]
    D --> E["5"]
    E --> A
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333

Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated ① to ⑤ with an initial maximum force of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm).
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated ① to ⑤ with the specified tightening torque of 111 lb-ft (150 Nm).

⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque

The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque.

▶ Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque.
If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening torque checked immediately.

Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary.

① The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.
▶ Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: restart the tire pressure monitoring system ( page 406).

Emergency spare wheel

Notes on the emergency spare wheel

WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions

The wheel or tire sizes and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle.

To prevent hazardous situations;

Drive carefully.
▶ Never install more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size.

Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly.
Do not deactivate ESP®.
Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.

① The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the trunk.

Observe the following notes on installing an emergency spare wheel:

• The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Do not install the emergency spare wheel with snow chains.
• Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear.

• Use the wheel bolts that are included with the emergency spare wheel.
  • Specified tightening torque: 96 lb-ft (130 Nm)

• Check the tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel when it is installed. Correct the pressure as necessary.
  The specified tire pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel.
  Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: if an emergency spare wheel is installed, the tire pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.

Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects:

• Notes on tire pressure ( page 402)
- Tire and Loading Information placard ( page 407)
- Tire pressure table (→ page 403)
• Notes on installing tires ( page 418)
- Installing an emergency spare wheel (→ page 422)

Notes on technical data

The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Vehicle electronics

Two-way radios

Notes on installing two-way radios

WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios

If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle.

You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios

If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in particular:

• The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior antenna.
• The exterior antenna is installed incorrectly or is not a low-reflection antenna.

This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle.

Have the low-reflection exterior antenna installed at a qualified specialist workshop.
When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior antenna.

NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use

The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed.

▶ Only use approved frequency bands.
▶ Observe the maximum permissible output power in these frequency bands.
▶ Only use approved antenna positions.

Top-down line drawing of a car with a blue circular marker labeled '1' pointing to the roof (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Vehicles without panoramic sliding sunroof

① Rear roof area

Installing an antenna is not permitted on vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof.

Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles - "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when

retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts.

If your vehicle has installing for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing.

Two-way radio transmission output

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table.

Frequency band and maximum transmission output

Frequency band Maximum transmission output
2-m- frequency band144 - 174 MHz	50 W
Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)380 - 460 MHz	10 W

Technical data

Frequency band Maximum transmission output

Two-way radio2G	2 W
Two-way radio3G/4G/5G	0.5 W

The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions:

• two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW
• two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA)
  • mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G)

There are no restrictions regarding the position of the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the following frequency bands:

• Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)
- 2G/3G/4G/5G

432 Technical data

Radio regulations

Regulatory radio identification and specific notes

Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory information" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet and in the app.

Further information and updates are available at the following web address:

https:// regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/us

Information about the specific absorption rate (SAR)

Information on the specific absorption rate (SAR) can be found under the key word "Regulatory

information" in the vehicle's Digital Operator's Manual, on the Internet and in the app.

Further information and updates are available at the following web address:

https:// regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/us

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview

Vehicle identification plate

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard, seatbelt, and dashboard panel (no text or symbols visible)

Vehicle identification plate (USA only)

Gross vehicle weight rating
② Maximum permissible front axle load
Maximum permissible rear axle load
4 Paint code
5 VIN (vehicle identification number)

Vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

① Gross vehicle weight rating
② Maximum permissible front axle load
Maximum permissible rear axle load
4 Paint code
5 VIN (vehicle identification number)

The gross vehicle weight rating is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle).

Never exceed the gross vehicle weight rating or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

VIN in the engine compartment

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

① VIN (vehicle identification number)

Additional plates

Plate with information about emissions testing, including confirmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California

② VIN (vehicle identification number)

Engine number (stamped onto the crankcase)

Operating fluids

Notes on operating fluids

WARNING Risk of injury due to harmful operating fluids

Operating fluids can be toxic.

When using, storing and disposing of operating fluids, observe the imprints on the respective original containers.

Always keep operating fluids in the sealed original container.

▶ Always keep children away from operating fluids.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of operating fluids

Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to the environment.

▶ Dispose of operating fluids in an environmentally responsible manner.

Operating fluids include the following:

• Fuels
• Lubricants
• Coolant
• Brake fluid
  • Windshield washer fluid
  • Climate control system refrigerant

Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.

The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container:

• MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
• MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

Further information on approved operating fluids:

- in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the designation

- At https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com

• At a qualified specialist workshop

WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel

Fuels are highly flammable.

▶ Fire, open flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided.

Before and during refueling, switch off the vehicle and, if installed, the stationary heater.

WARNING Risk of injury from fuels

Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health.

Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale fuel vapor.
▶ Keep children away from fuel.
Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process.

If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following:

Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water.
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately.
If you swallow fuel, seek medical attention immediately. Do not induce vomiting.
▶ Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel.

Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refueled with the following fuel types:

• premium-grade unleaded gasoline
• E85 fuel
- a mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade unleaded gasoline

Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identified by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may differ from the information in the Operator's Manual. The fuels that have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Fuel

Information on fuel quality for vehicles with a gasoline engine

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 434).

NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel

Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system.

Only refuel with low-sulfur spark-ignition engine fuel.

This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel.

Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
- diesel
• Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100
• Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100
• Gasoline with additives containing metal

If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel:

▶ Do not switch on the vehicle.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sulfur, it may produce unpleasant odors.

Vehicles with gasoline engine M256: when using 91 AKI/95 RON, there may be slight limitations in performance that have no further consequences.

Refuel using only fuel that has at least the octane number specified on the information label on the fuel filler flap ( page 211).

For maximum engine output: refuel using only premium-grade gasoline with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular gasoline with an octane number of at least 87 AKI/91 RON.

NOTE Premature wear through unleaded regular gasoline

Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the engine to wear more quickly and impair longevity and performance.

If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline with 87 AKI/91 RON:

Only fill the fuel tank to half full with unleaded regular gasoline and top up as soon as possible with unleaded premium grade gasoline.

▶ Do not drive at the maximum speed.
Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3000 rpm.

This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with a lower octane number.

Further information on fuel is available at the following locations:

• At a gas station
  • At a qualified specialist workshop
  • On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only)

Information on additives in gasoline (vehicles with gasoline engine)

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 434).

NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives

Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring.

Only add cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives.

In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Deposits could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center), mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indicated on the tank.

Tank content and fuel reserve

Total fuel tank capacity

Model

Mercedes-Maybach S 580	20.1 gal (76.0 liters)
Mercedes-Maybach S 680

Fuel tank reserve

Model

Mercedes-Maybach S580	2.1 gal (8.0 liters)
Mercedes-Maybach S680

Engine oil

Notes on engine oil

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 434).

NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or additives

Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifications necessary for the prescribed service intervals.
Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed.
Do not use additives.
Have the engine oil changed after the prescribed intervals.

Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Engine oil quality and filling capacity
Engine oil specifications

Model MB-Freigabe or MB-
	Approval
Mercedes-Maybach S 580	229.52
	229.61*
Mercedes-Maybach S 680	229.52*

* recommended for lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes)
To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifications marked in the table with the lowest SAE viscosity class. Possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes must be observed.
Mercedes-Maybach S 680: only use engine oils of viscosity class SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40.
The following values refer to an oil change, including the oil filter.

Engine oil filling capacity

Model Capacity
Mercedes-Maybach S 580	9.0 US qt (8.5 liters)
Mercedes-Maybach S 680	10.6 US qt (10.0 liters)

Notes on brake fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 434).

⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake system

The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard.

This causes the braking effect to be impaired.
Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.

Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.

Coolant

Notes on coolant

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 434).

WARNING - Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze

If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite.

▶ Allow the engine to cool down before adding antifreeze.
▶ Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening.
Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle.

NOTE Damage caused by incorrect coolant

▶ Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required antifreeze protection. Information on coolant is available at the following locations:
• In the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Operating Fluids 320.1

- At https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com

• At a qualified specialist workshop

! NOTE Overheating at high outside temperatures

If an inappropriate coolant is used, the cooling system is not sufficiently protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures.

Only use coolant approved for Mercedes-Benz.

Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids 320.1.

Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the cooling system:

• A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to about -35°F (-37°C))
• A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49°F (-45°C))

Coolant filling capacity

coolant

Model Capacity
Mercedes-Maybach S 580	16.1 US qt (15.2 liters)
Mercedes-Maybach S 680	16.9 US qt (16.0 liters)

Notes on windshield washer fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 434).

WARNING - Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate

Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system.

Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening.

NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid

Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting.

Only use windshield washer fluid which is also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.

NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids

Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other windshield washer fluids.

Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously.

Recommended windshield washer fluid:

- Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit

• Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit

For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze container.

Mix washing water with windshield washer fluid all year round.

Refrigerant

Notes on refrigerant

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( page 434).

NOTE Damage due to incorrect refrigerant If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the climate control system may be damaged.

▶ USA: use only R-134a refrigerant. ▶ Canada: use only R-1234yf refrigerant.

NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant compressor oil

Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a different refrigerant compressor oil.

Work on the climate control system may be carried out only at a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations as well as SAE standard J639 must be adhered to.

The information label for the climate control system regarding the refrigerant type and the refrigerant compressor oil (PAG oil) is located on the inside of the hood.

① Hazard and service warning symbols
② Refrigerant filling capacity
Applicable standards
4 PAG oil part number
GWP (global warming potential) of the refrigerant used
6 Refrigerant type

Hazard and service warning symbols
② Refrigerant filling capacity
3 Applicable standards
PAG oil part number
5 GWP (global warming potential) of the refrigerant used
6 Refrigerant type

Symbols 1 indicate the following:

• Possible dangers
  • Having maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop

Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Refrigerant filling capacity

Model
Mercedes-Maybach S 580	USA: 27.9 ± 0.4 oz (790 ± 10 g)Canada:
Mercedes-Maybach S 680	USA: 27.9 ± 0.4 oz (790 ± 10 g)Canada:

Filling capacity for PAG oil

Model
Mercedes-Maybach S 580	USA: 2.8 ± 0.4 oz{80 ± 10 g}Canada:
Mercedes-Maybach S 680	USA: 2.8 ± 0.4 oz{80 ± 10 g}Canada:

Vehicle data

Information regarding the vehicle data

The vehicle data specified may vary as a result of the following factors:

Factors:

• Tires
• Load
• Condition of the suspension
• Optional equipment

442 Technical data

In addition, the following applies to the specified vehicle data:

• Items of optional equipment increase the curb weight and reduce the payload.
• Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( page 432).

Mercedes-Maybach S 580Mercedes-Maybach S 680
Wheelbase 133.7 in	(3396 mm)
Turning radius 44.0 ft	(13.4 m)

Vehicle dimensions

Vehicle dimensions
Mercedes-Maybach S 580
Mercedes-Maybach S 680
Vehicle length 215.3 in	(5469 mm)
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors	83.0 in (2109 mm)
Vehicle height 59.5 in	(1510 mm)

Weights and loads

Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

Roof load

Model Maximum roof load
Mercedes-Maybach S 580
Mercedes-Maybach S 680

Display messages

Introduction

Information about display messages

Display messages appear on the driver's display. Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the symbols on the driver's display. The driver's display shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone.

Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in the Operator's Manual.

For some display messages, symbols will also be shown:

• Further information
• × Hide display message

With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Pressing ① displays further information on the central display. Press the × symbol to hide the display message.

Display messages to be acknowledged can be hidden by pressing the back button or with the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory.

Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible.

High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The driver's display will show these display messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified.

Calling up saved display messages

Driver's display:

Service

The Message Memory: XXmessage appears on the driver's display.

▶ Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control.
To exit the display: press the ← back button.

Occupant safety

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Restraint System Malfunction Service Required	* The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 45).⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint systemComponents in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident.▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Front Left Malfunction Service Required (Example)	* The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 45).⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint systemComponents in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident.▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Left Window Airbag Malfunction Service Required (Example)	* The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 45).⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window curtain airbagThe window curtain airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.▶ Have the window curtain airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Push rear-left seat belt extender back manually.See Operator's Manual (example)	* The corresponding seat belt extender is malfunctioning.▶ Slide the seat belt extender back into its original position manually.▶ If the malfunction occurs again, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual	* The front passenger air bag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbagIf the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function.A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.▶ Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.▶ Check the status of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff (→ page 47).▶ If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual	* The front passenger air bag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations:• even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat• even when the front passenger seat is not occupiedThe system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabledIf you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.The child could be struck by the airbag.▶ Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.▶ Check the status of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff (→ page 47).▶ If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Occupant PresenceReminder Inoperative	* The occupant presence reminder is malfunctioning▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do Not Leave People orAnimals in the Vehicle	* The occupant presence reminder suspects that there are persons or animals in the rear passenger compartment ofthe vehicle.▶ Do not leave any persons or animals behind when leaving the vehicle.

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Obtain a New Key	* Have the key replaced.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Replace Key Battery	* The key battery is discharged.▶ Replace the battery (→ page 81).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Key Not Detected (red display message)

* The key is currently undetected.

▶ Change the location of the key in the vehicle.
Try to start the vehicle.
If the key is still not detected, place it in the slot for starting with the key (→ page 194).
▶ Start the vehicle.

* The key can no longer be detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle.

If the key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the vehicle:

• You can no longer start the vehicle.
• You cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
  ▶ Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.

If the key is in the vehicle and is still not detected:

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key ( page 194).

The key battery is weak or discharged.

▶ Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( page 79).
Replace the key battery, if necessary ( page 81).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key.▶ Wait until processing is complete.
Initializing Key Please Wait
	* A warning tone will also sound. This message reminds you to take your key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Don't Forget Your Key
Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual	* Key detection is malfunctioning.▶ Change the location of the key in the vehicle.▶ Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (→ page 194).

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Check Left Low Beam (example)	* The corresponding light source is malfunctioning.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.1 LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the light are faulty.
Malfunction See Operator's Manual	* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Automatic Driving Lights Inoperative	* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Switch On Headlights	* You are driving without low-beam headlamps.▶ Turn the light switch to the [IMAGE] or AUTO position.
Switch Off Lights	* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.▶ Turn the light switch to the AUTO position.
DIGITAL LIGHT Functions Limited	* The DIGITAL LIGHT system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work even without the functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT system.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
MULTIBEAM LED Functions Limited	* The MULTIBEAM LED system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work, but without the functions of the MULTIBEAM LED system.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 167).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▸ Drive on.▸ Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive Highbeam Assist is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.▸ Drive onor▸ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▸ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.▸ Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 168).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Now Available display message will appear.▸ Drive on.▸ Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inoperative	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.▸ Drive on.or▸ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. ▶ Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Hazard Warning Light Mal-function	* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Drive system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Reduced Drive System Performance See Operator's Manual	* The drive system switches to emergency operation mode due to a malfunction. ▶ Drive on carefully. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	* The driver's display is inoperative due to a failed software update.The display message will be shown every time the engine is started.⚠ WARNING Risk of accident if the driver display failsIf the driver display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected.The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
	If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified special-ist workshop.If the driver's display fails, you may not recognize function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired (→ page 319).▶ Have the vehicle checked by a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Cannot Start Vehicle See Operator's Manual	* The vehicle cannot be started.▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on.▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.* Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: the state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle.▶ Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.▶ Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charging power to the jump-start connection point of the 12 V battery (→ page 387).The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.
Vehicle Ready to Drive Shutdown Occurs When Locked or After a Few Minutes	* You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state.▶ Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you.▶ If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12-V battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (starting assistance).
Vehicle Ready to Drive Shutdown Occurs When Locked or Automatically in XX Mins	* You are about to leave the vehicle and the engine is running.The vehicle will switch off automatically in 20 minutes.▶ To prevent the vehicle from switching off automatically, confirm the message in the central display of the multimedia system.* You are in the vehicle. Park position P is engaged and the engine is running.After a certain time of being at a standstill, this display message will appear in the driver's display. The vehicle will then be automatically switched off after a total parked time of 20 minutes.▶ To prevent the vehicle from switching off automatically, confirm the message in the central display of the multimedia system.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Head-up Display Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual	* The head-up display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes are: · malfunctions in the power supply· signal interference▶ Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again.▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Head-up Display Inoperative	* The head-up display has an internal error.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Head-up Display Brightness Currently Reduced See Operator's Manual	* The brightness of the head-up display is reduced. Possible causes: · Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision· Faulty exterior brightness signals▶ Switch on the windshield wipers.▶ Clean the windshield if necessary.▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Steering Malfunction Drive Carefully Service Required

Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual

Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual

* A power steering malfunction has occurred. Steering characteristics may be impaired as a result.

▶ Drive on carefully.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.

WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics

If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.

If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
▶ Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired.

WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.

▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Rear Axle Steering Currently Malfunctioning	* The rear axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning circle may become wider. ▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.If the display message does not disappear: ▶ Drive on carefully. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Service Required	* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.The rear axle has no steering capability.The steering wheel may be at an angle when you drive in a straight line. ▶ Adapt your speed and drive on carefully. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately	* The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.The rear axle has no steering capability.The steering wheel may be tilted considerably when you drive in a straight line.Depending on the steering wheel's tilted position, the steering wheel will also vibrate and a continuous warning tone will sound.▲ WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impairedIf the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.▸ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	▸ When stopping, bear the enlarged vehicle width in mind.
Snow Chain Mode Maxi-mum Speed Exceeded	* The maximum permissible speed for snow chain mode has been exceeded. ▶ Drive more slowly.
Ambient Lighting Warning Support Inoperative	* The ambient lighting may not provide full visual warning support. ▶ Lock the vehicle and unlock it again after a few minutes. ▶ If the display message appears regularly, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
	* At least one door is open. ▶ Close all doors.
Hood Unlatched Pull Lever Again to Open	* The hood is not fully unlocked. ▲ WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. ▶ Never release the hood when driving.▶ Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
	▶ To open the hood fully, pull the handle again (→ page 361).
Hood Not Locked CloseBefore Starting Trip	* The hood is not locked.⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlockedThe hood may open and block your view.▶ Never release the hood when driving.▶ Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
	▶ Close the hood (→ page 361).
Stop Immediately Close Hood Completely	* The hood is not locked.⚠ WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlockedThe hood may open and block your view.▶ Never release the hood when driving.▶ Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Close the hood (→ page 361).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

* The hood is open.

WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked

The hood may open and block your view.

▶ Never release the hood when driving.
Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Close the hood.

* The trunk lid is open.

DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning

Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.

Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid.
▶ Never drive with the trunk lid open.

Close the trunk lid.

462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	* The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. ▶ Add washer fluid (→ page 365).
Add Washer Fluid
	* Intensive cleaning of the windshield has been activated (→ page 173).
Intensive Cleaning Activated for 30 Seconds
Windshield Wiper Malfunction	* The windshield wiper is malfunctioning. ▶ Restart the vehicle. If the display message still appears: ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

To Switch Off Vehicle Press and Hold Start/Stop Button for at Least 3 Seconds or Press 3 Times

Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual

Coolant Stop Switch Off Vehicle

* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.

Information about switching off the vehicle while driving ( page 194).

* The coolant level is too low.

NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant

▶ Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.

▶ Add coolant (→ page 365).

Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

* The coolant is too hot.

▶ Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.
- You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.

▶ Wait until the engine has cooled down.
Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.

Fuel Reserve

* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.

Refuel.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Fuel Filler Cap Open

* The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.

▶ Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Shift to P Only When Vehicle Is Stationary	* It is possible to select the park position [P] only if the vehicle is stationary. ▶ Depress the brake pedal to stop. ▶ Shift the transmission to park position [P] when the vehicle is stationary.
Depress Brake to Shift from P	* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position [P] and into another transmission position. ▶ Depress the brake pedal. ▶ Select transmission position [D], [R] or neutral [N].
To Deselect P or N Depress Brake and Start Vehicle	* You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position [P] or neutral [N] and into another transmission position. ▶ Depress the brake pedal. ▶ Start the vehicle.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Change the transmission position.
Depress Brake to Shift to D or R	* You have attempted to select transmission positionDorR.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Select transmission positionDorR.
Depress Brake to Shift to R	* You have attempted to select transmission positionR.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Select transmission positionR.
Service Required Apply Parking Brake to Park	* A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park positionP.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Until then, always select park positionPmanually before you switch off the vehicle.▶ Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Driver's Door Open Position P Not Selected	* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission positionD,Ror neutralNis selected.The vehicle may roll away.▶ Select park positionPwhen switching off the vehicle.
Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Apply Parking Brake When Parking	* The transmission is malfunctioning. Park positionPcannot be selected.▶ Park the vehicle safely.▶ Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.▶ On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving.
Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activated Manually No Automatic Change to P	* While the vehicle was at a standstill or driving at very low speed, neutralNwas engaged with the engine running or the vehicle switched on.
	! NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to rolling awayWhen the vehicle is switched off or the driver's door is opened, automatic engagement of park positionPis deactivated.The vehicle may roll away.▶ Be ready to brake.▶ Do not leave the vehicle unattended.
	▶ Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.▶ Engage park positionPwhen the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.▶ To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission positionDorR.
N Automatically Activated Please Shift to Transmis-sion Position Again	* NeutralNwas automatically engaged when the vehicle was rolling or being driven.1 When you open the driver's door in neutralN, park positionPwill be engaged automatically.▶ Engage park positionPwhen the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.▶ To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission positionDorR.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Reversing Not Possible Service Required	* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position [R].▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Malfunction Stop	* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral [N] automatically.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Depress the brake pedal.▶ Engage park position [P].▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Service Required Do Not Change Transmission Position	* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.▶ If transmission position [D] is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.▶ For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Drive Malfunction Stop Restart Vehicle	* The transmission is malfunctioning.▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.▶ Restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message still appears:▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Drive Malfunction Stop Contact Dealer	* The transmission is malfunctioning. ▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location and do not continue driving. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Drive Overheated Drive Carefully	* The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be temporarily impaired. ▶ Drive at low engine speed. ▶ Avoid sporty driving. ▶ Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears.
Auxiliary Battery Malfunc-tion (white display message)	* There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ▶ Until then, always select park position P manually before you switch off the vehicle. ▶ Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Auxiliary Battery Malfunc-tion (red display message)	* There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ▶ Until then, always select park position P manually before you switch off the vehicle. ▶ Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Brakes

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

(USA only)

(Canada only)

Parking Brake See Operator's Manual

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To apply:

▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on.
Apply the electric parking brake manually ( page 220).

If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp and the red PARK (USA only) or (O) (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To release:

▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on.
Release the electric parking brake manually ( page 220).

or

Release the electric parking brake automatically ( page 220).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp is lit and the red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.

▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on.

To apply:

Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually ( page 220).

To release:

Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash:

Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

* The yellow (P) indicator lamp is lit and the red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

If the state of charge is too low:

▶ Charge the 12 V battery.

472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

To apply:

▶ Apply the electric parking brake manually.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release:

If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually ( page 220).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

(USA only)

(Canada only) Release Parking Brake

(USA only)

(Canada only) Switch on Vehicle to Release the Parking Brake

* The red PARK indicator lamp (USA only) or (P) indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing.
The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:
- A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (→ page 220).
- You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (→ page 220).
▶ Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.
Release the electric parking brake manually.

* The red PARK (USA only) or (P) (Canada only) indicator lamp is lit.

You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched off.

▶ Switch on the vehicle.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	* A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated.A horn may also sound at regular intervals.You cannot start the vehicle system.
(USA only)
	▶ Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears.You cannot start the vehicle system again.
(Canada only)
Brake Immediately
	* There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
(USA only)	⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid levelIf the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Do not add brake fluid.
(Canada only)
Check Brake Fluid Level

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual

* The brakepads have reached the wear limit.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving and driving safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

* ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable.

The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning

The wheels may lock during braking and ESP ^® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

▶ Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).

If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.

Inoperative See Operator's Manual

Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

* ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.

⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP ^30 are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP ^® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

▶ Drive on carefully.
Have ABS and ESP ^® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

* ESP® is temporarily unavailable.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning ^10

If ESP ^® is malfunctioning, ESP ^® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.
▶ Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
Inoperative See Operator's Manual	* ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioningIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.
Inoperative See Operator's Manual	* ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioningIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Inoperative See Operator's Manual

Off

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!

* EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.

Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.

WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP ^® are malfunctioning

The wheels may block during braking and ESP ^® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.

The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.

Drive on carefully.
Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled.

▶ Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function ( page 227).

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (→ page 229).

If necessary, take a break.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
ATTENTION ASSIST Nodding Off Take a Break!	* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indicators of microsleep (→ page 229).A warning tone will also sound.▶ Take a break immediately.▶ Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual	* Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Continue driving in compliance with traffic regulations.
Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative	* Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Continue driving in compliance with traffic regulations.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction Do Not Exceed 50 mph	* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
	NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements
	Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.▶ Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph	* E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.
	NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements
	▶ Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.▶ If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.
	Max. Speed 50 mph (80 km/h).▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
STOP Vehicle Level Too Low	* You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low.▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.▶ Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
	If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIRMATIC is malfunctioning:▶ No faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
	NOTE The tires on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movementsAvoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds.If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.
	Set a higher vehicle level (→ page 262).Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.
Lowering	* The vehicle level will lower for the following reasons:You have selected a different drive program.You have exceeded the speed limit.You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button.
Rising	* Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Vehicle Rising Please Wait	* The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level.▶ Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
Do Not Exceed 12mph	* AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent.The current level is too high. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.▶ Do not exceed 12 mph (20 km/h).▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Compressor Is Cooling	* Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor first needs to cool down in order to set the selected vehicle level.When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle will continue rising to the selected vehicle level.▶ Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
Slow Down	* You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level.▶ Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again.
E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL Function Limited See Operator's Manual	* At least one main function of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system is malfunctioning.The system is outside the operating temperature range or the on-board electrical system voltage is too low.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
	NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behavior is restricted. The vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering.Drive on carefully.Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend.Avoid sudden steering movements.Drive on carefully.Reduce speed considerably before taking a curve.Avoid sudden steering movements.
Malfunction Do Not Exceed 50 mph	* At least one main function of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system is malfunctioning.The system is deactivated.
	NOTE The vehicle's suspension and damping behavior has changed significantly, the vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering.Reduce vehicle speed. Drive on carefully.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▸ Reduce the vehicle speed considerably before taking a curve.▸ Avoid sudden steering movements.
	▸ Continue driving carefully and do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).▸ If possible, stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again.▸ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Malfunction Stop	* There is a serious malfunction affecting the hydraulics of the E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL system.The system is deactivated.
	! NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics have changed significantly.▸ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
	▸ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.▸ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driver assistance systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
--- mph	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled.▶ Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (→ page 234).
Suspended	* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (→ page 231).
Off	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (→ page 234).
Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 231).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▶ Drive on carefully.or

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Distance Assist Inoperative	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.▶ Drive on carefully.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Distance Assist Now Available	* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.▶ Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (→ page 234).
Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual	* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available:Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionEvasive Steering AssistPRE-SAFE® PLUSVehicles with Blind Spot Assist: PRE-SAFE® PLUS is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 246).▸ Drive on carefully.As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.or▸ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual	* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available:Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic functionEvasive Steering AssistPRE-SAFE® PLUS▸ Drive on carefully.or▸ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual	* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 239).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.Drive onCheck the tire pressure if necessary.
Active Steering Assist Inoperative	* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.► Drive onor► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (→ page 239).You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.► Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops	* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to several emergency stops having been performed.► Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions.► Switch the vehicle off and switch it back onActive Steering Assist is available once more.
Initiating Emergency Stop	* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (→ page 239).► Put your hands on the steering wheel.Information on canceling an emergency stop (→ page 241).
Active Emergency Stop Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual	* Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 241).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▶ Drive onor▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Emergency Stop Assist Inoperative	* Active Emergency Stop Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Change Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual	* Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 242).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▶ Drive on.or▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Lane Change Assist Inoperative	* Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning.► Drive on.or► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Automatic Lane Change Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual	* Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 242).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.► Drive onor► If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Automatic Lane Change Inoperative	* Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning.► Drive onor► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual	* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 231).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▶ Drive on.
Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual	* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning.Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.▶ Drive on.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual	* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 255).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Drive on.or▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.

492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Blind Spot Assist Inoperative	* Blind Spot Assist or the exit warning is malfunctioning.► Drive on.or► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual	* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 255).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.► Drive on.or► If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative	* Active Blind Spot Assist or the exit warning is malfunctioning.► Drive on.or► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 258).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.▶ Drive on.
Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping Assist Limited Range of Functions See Operator's Manual	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is available but restricted.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Temporarily Unavailable Sensors Dirty

* Front and corner radar sensors (hereafter "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes are:

• The sensors are dirty
- Heavy rain or snow
- Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally.

Drive on carefully.

Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off.

If the display message does not disappear:

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
▶ Clean all sensor covers from outside (→ page 223).
▶ Restart the vehicle.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Camera View Reduced See Operator's Manual

* The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes are:

• Dirt on the windshield in the field of vision of the multifunction camera
  • Heavy rain, snow or fog
• Fogging up of the windshield from inside or outside: in certain weather conditions, fog can form on the inside or outside of the windshield during cold times of year in particular.

This fog on the windshield will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary.

Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally.

Drive on carefully.

In order to remove the fog from the outside, carry out a single wipe of the windshield ( page 173).
In order to remove the fog from the inside, press _max (→ page 183).

Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off.

If the display message does not disappear after a longer drive of around 15 minutes:

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Clean the windshield, especially in the position of the multifunction camera ( page 223).
▶ Restart the vehicle.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
The camera view of the driver is currently obstructed Affected functions: See operator's manual	* The view of the driver camera is reduced. Possible causes are: Objects or stickers are projecting into the driver camera's field of vision.The driver camera is dirty.Keep the driver camera's field of vision free.Clean the driver camera if necessary. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior relating to the display (→ page 372).
Change the steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen.	* The driver camera cannot capture your line of sight.Change the steering wheel and seat position until six dots are visible on the top edge of the screen.The display message will appear again if the driver camera is again unable to detect your line of sight after 30 minutes.The display message will no longer appear if you confirm the display message and the driver camera cannot detect your line of sight during the entire journey.
Driver Camera Inoperative See Operator's Manual	* The driver camera is malfunctioning.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual	* The PRE-SAFE®functions are malfunctioning.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE Pulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual	* The PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE PLUS Inoperative See Operator's Manual	* There is a malfunction in the PRE-SAFE® PLUS system. ▶ Drive on or ▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. ▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking assistance systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
PARKTRONIC InoperativeSee Operator's Manual	* Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual	* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.or▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Parking Assist Limited Availability of Maneuvering Assistance See Operator's Manual	* Active Parking Assist's maneuvering assistant is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.▶ Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (→ page 371).▶ If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

12 V On-board Electrical System Service Required

Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual

* The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the condition of charge is too low.

NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving

Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
▶ Switch off the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Switch on vehicle to charge the 12 V battery	* The vehicle is off and the condition of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.► Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.► Drive for 30–60 mins.or► Charge the 12 V battery when stationary (→ page 387).
Stop Vehicle To Charge the 12 V Battery Do Not Switch Off Vehicle	* The state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.► Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.► Leave the vehicle running► If the display message disappears: drive on.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual	* The 48 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.► Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.► Switch off the vehicle.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	* The vehicle is off and the condition of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.► Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.► Drive for 30–60 mins.or► Charge the 12 V battery when stationary (→ page 387).
	* The state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.► Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.► Leave the vehicle running► If the display message disappears: drive on.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
	* The 48 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.► Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.► Switch off the vehicle.► Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Battery Overheated Stop! Everyone Get Out! Outdoors if Possible

48 V Battery See Operator's Manual

Please Wait Charging 48 V Battery...

* The 48 V battery is overheating. There is a risk of fire.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.
① Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.
Do not continue driving.
If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the fire service immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a fire.

* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions.

Comfort functions, such as the climate control system, may be restricted.

It is possible to continue driving.

If the display message remains active continuously, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the vehicle while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance.

The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, the Starting Possible Again display message will be shown on the driver's display.

▶ Start the vehicle.

502 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle.
	If the Starting Possible Again display message does not appear after a few minutes:▶ Try to start the vehicle.▶ If the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Starting Possible Again	▪ The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter.▶ Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.

Tire pressure monitor

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Tire Pressure Monitor Currently Unavailable	* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensor are being received. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.The tire pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified.▶ Drive on.
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative	* The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioningThe tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires.Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative Tire Pressure Sensors Missing	* The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated.Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
Wheel Sensor(s) Missing	* There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor in at least one wheel. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tire.Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Check Tires	* The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound.
	WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressureThe tires can burst.The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly.The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.You could then lose control of the vehicle.Observe the recommended tire pressures.Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.
	Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.Check the tire pressure (→ page 402) and the tires.
Please Correct Tire Pres-sure	* The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great.Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary.When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (→ page 406).
Warning Tire Malfunction	* The pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tireThe tires can overheat and be damaged.The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.You could then lose control of the vehicle.▸ Do not drive with a flat tire.▸ Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible speed with a flat MOExtended tire.▸ Observe the notes on flat tires.
	Notes on flat tires (→ page 377).▸ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.▸ Check the tires.
Tires Overheated	* At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tiresOverheated tires can burst.▸ Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.
Reduce Speed	* At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow.⚠ WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tiresOverheated tires can burst.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
	▶ Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

Engine oil

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶Solutions
	* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
Check Engine Oil Level At Next Refueling (Add 1 Quart)	NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oilAvoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.
	When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (→ page 364).Notes on engine oil (→ page 437).
	* The engine oil level is too high.
Engine Oil Level Reduce Oil Level	NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oilAvoid long journeys with excess engine oil.Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Engine Oil Level Stop Switch Off Vehicle

Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Vehicle

* The engine oil level is too low.

NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil

▶ Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (→ page 364).
▶ Check the engine oil level.

Notes on engine oil ( page 437).

* The oil pressure is too low.

NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure

▶ Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure.

▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.
▶ Switch off the vehicle.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured

* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps

Overview of indicator and warning lamps

Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the vehicle has been started or during a journey.

Driver's display Driver's display with driver camera

Indicator and warning lamps

Occupant safety

Restraint system ( page 510)

Seat belt ( page 510)

Occupant presence reminder (white) (→ page 510)

Occupant presence reminder (yellow) (→ page 510)

Drive system

Reduced power ( page 512)

Vehicle

Power steering (yellow) (→ page 512)

Power steering (red) (→ page 512)

Rear axle steering (yellow) (→ page 512)

Rear axle steering (red) (→ page 512)

Engine

Coolant temperature ( page 514)

Engine diagnosis ( page 514)

Vehicles with a gasoline engine: engine operating temperature ( page 514)

Electrical malfunction (→ page 514)

Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator ( page 514)

Braking

Electric parking brake (yellow) (→ page 518)

PARK USA: electric parking brake (red) (→ page 518)

(P) Canada: electric parking brake (red) (→ page 518)

RBS USA: Recuperative Brake System ( page 518)

(1) Canada: brakes (yellow)(→ page 518)

BRAKE USA: brakes (red) (→ page 518)

(D) Canada: brakes (red) (→ page 518)

Driving and driving safety systems

ABS (→ page 521)

ESP ^® (→ page 521)

OFF ESP ^② OFF ( page 521)

ATTENTION ASSIST (→ page 521)

Traffic Sign Assist ( page 521)

Distance warning ( page 521)

Active Brake Assist ( page 521)

Active Brake Assist (→ page 521)

Active Brake Assist (→ page 521)

AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL (→ page 521)

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (→ page 526)

Tire pressure monitoring system

(1) Tire pressure monitoring system ( page 526)

Exterior lighting

Standing lights (→ page 161)

Low beam (→ page 161)

High beam (→ page 162)

Turn signal lights ( page 162)

0‡ Rear fog light (→ page 161)

Symbols on the central display

Drive Away Assist (→ page 283)

Rear cross traffic warning ( page 284)

510 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Maneuvering brake function ( page 285)

Occupant safety

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Restraint system warning lamp	* The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on.The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 45).⚠ WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint systemComponents in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident.▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Seat belt warning lamp flashes	* The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.▶ Fasten your seat belt (→ page 45).There are objects on the front passenger seat.▶ Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
Seat belt warning lamp lights up	* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds once the vehicle has started.In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound.The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.▶ Fasten your seat belt (→ page 45).If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
Occupant presence reminder warning lamp (white)	* The white occupant presence reminder warning lamp is lit.The occupant presence reminder is deactivated.▶ Switch on the occupant presence reminder, see (→ page 78).
Occupant presence reminder warning lamp (yellow)	* The yellow occupant presence reminder warning lamp is lit.The occupant presence reminder is malfunctioning▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.

512 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Drive system

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Reduced warning lamp power

* The yellow reduced-power warning lamp is on. Drive system power output is reduced.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

Vehicle

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Power steering warning lamp (yellow)

* The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

Power steering warning lamp (red)

* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Rear axle steering warning lamp (yellow)

Rear axle steering warning lamp (red)

WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.

▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

* The yellow rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.
Note the messages on the driver's display.

* The red rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning.

WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired

If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized.

▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

514 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

Engine

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Coolant warning lamp (red)

* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.

Possible causes are:

• The temperature sensor is malfunctioning
• The coolant level is too low
• The air supply to the radiator is obstructed
• The radiator fan is faulty
• The engine coolant pump is faulty

If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

A WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood

If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur:

• You may come into contact with hot gases.
• You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids.
  Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down.
  In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.

▶ Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. Do not continue driving.
Note the messages on the driver's display.

If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale:

Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.
Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red area.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
Coolant warning lamp (yellow)	* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.Possible causes are:The temperature sensor is malfunctioningThe charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faultyThe radiator shutters are blocked or defectiveAvoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Check Engine warning lamp	* The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up.Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
Electrical malfunction warning lamp	* The red electrical malfunction warning lamp is lit.There is a malfunction in the electrics.Note the messages on the driver's display.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Engine operating temperature warning lamp

Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes

Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up

*Vehicles with a gasoline engine: after a cold start, the blue engine operating temperature warning lamp is on. Engine output and engine torque are reduced.

Take this into consideration in your driving style.

* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.

Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly:

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.

Refuel.

518 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Brakes

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only)

Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only)

Electric parking brake indicator lamp (yellow)

* The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction. ▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

RBS warning lamp (USA only)

Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only)

*The yellow RBS warning lamp (USA only) or the yellow (I) brake warning lamp (Canada only) is lit while the vehicle is running.

WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction

If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.

▶ Drive on carefully.
▶ Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

The Hill Start Assist may be malfunctioning.

Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.
If the driver's display shows a display message, observe it.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Brakes warning lamp (USA only)

Brakes warning lamp (Canada only)

* The red brake warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.

Possible causes are:

- The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected.

• There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning

If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.

▶ Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level

If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.

▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not add brake fluid.

Driving and driving safety systems

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
ABS warning lamp	* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.ABS is malfunctioning.If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.
	⚠ WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioningThe wheels may lock during braking.The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.▶ Drive on carefully.▶ Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
ESP® warning lamp flashes	* The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (→ page 226).▶ Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

522 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
ESP® warning lamp lights up	* The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. ▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioningIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. ▶ Drive on carefully. ▶ Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
ESP® OFF warning lamp	* The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
	⚠ WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivatedESP® does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. ▶ Drive on carefully. ▶ Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.▶ Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
	▶ Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (→ page 226).
ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp	* The ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp is lit.ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Traffic Sign Assist warning lamp	* The Traffic Sign Assist warning lamp is lit.Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.
Distance warning lamp	* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.▶ Be prepared to brake immediately.▶ Increase the distance.Function of Active Brake Assist (→ page 246).
Active Brake Assist warning lamp	* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted.▶ Note the messages on the driver's display.
Active Brake Assist warning lamp	* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.The system is switched off or the range of functions has been automatically restricted.This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated.▶ Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (→ page 246).
Active Brake Assist warning lamp	* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.After you drive off, the system's range of functions will be restricted due to the teach-in process.Depending on the ambient conditions, the teach-in process may take a few minutes.▶ Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (→ page 246).

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Suspension warning lamp (yellow)

Suspension warning lamp (red)

* The yellow AIRMATIC warning lamp is lit.
The yellow AIRMATIC / E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit.
A malfunction has occurred in AIRMATIC.
A malfunction has occurred in AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL.
Note the messages on the driver's display.

* The red AIRMATIC / E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL warning lamp is lit.

A malfunction has occurred in AIRMATIC/E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL.

NOTE The vehicle's driving characteristics will have changed significantly.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Note the messages on the driver's display.

Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

526 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system warning lamp

*The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure monitor

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes

*The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.

WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning

The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires.

Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.

▶ Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up

* The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires.

WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure

• The tires can burst.
• The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
• The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.

You could then lose control of the vehicle.

▶ Observe the recommended tire pressures.
Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.

▶ Check the tire pressure and the tires.

1, 2, 3 ...

(SmartKey) battery.... 81

3D driver's display, 3D instrument cluster Function/notes.... 290

4MATIC....211

48 V on-board electrical system Displays in the driver's display.... 296 Operating safety.... 29

A

A/C function Activating/deactivating (MBUX).... 182 Activating/deactivating (operating unit).... 181

ABS 225

Acceleration Kickdown....210 Optimized acceleration....197

Accident prevention.... 283

Accident, emergency call.... 349

Activating/deactivating the acoustic lock- ing verification signal.... 80

Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating.... 258

Brake application.... 257

Exit warning.... 255

Function.... 255

Active Brake Assist

Function 246

Setting 250

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

Activating/deactivating.... 234

Active Emergency Stop Assist...... 241

Active Lane Change Assist.... 242

Active Speed Limit Assist...... 236

Calling up a speed.... 234

Function 231

Increases/decreases the speed.... 234

Route-based speed adaptation.... 236

Storing a speed.... 234

Active Emergency Stop Assist.... 241

Active headlamps.... 164

Active Lane Change Assist

Activating/deactivating.... 245

Function 242

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating.... 261

Function 258

Setting the sensitivity.... 261

Active light function.... 164

Active Parking Assist

Automatic braking function.... 279

Cross traffic warning.... 284

Drive Away Assist.... 283

Exiting a parking space.... 278

Function 274

Maneuvering brake function.... 285

Memory Parking Assist...... 285

Parking 276

Pausing....278

Remote Parking Assist.... 279

Active Service System PLUS.... 359

Active Speed Limit Assist.... 236

Active Steering Assist

Activating/deactivating.... 241

Active Emergency Stop Assist...... 241

Active Lane Change Assist.... 242

Function.... 239

Active Stop-and-Go Assist.... 238

Adaptive cruise control.... 236

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Activating/deactivating.... 168

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Activating/deactivating.... 170

Additives Engine oil....437 Fuel....436

After-sales service.... 359

Air bag Belt air bag....60 Center air bag (driver's backrest)....61 Cushionbag....61 Front air bag....61 Inflating....54 Overview....61 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....47 REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps....49 Warning lamp....45

Air conditioning menu Air distribution....182 Calling up....181 Climate control....182 Footwell temperature....183

Fragrance system....184 Front air conditioning....181 Ionization....184 Rear passenger compartment climate control....183

Air distribution Adjusting.... 179, 182

Air freshener system.... 184

Air inlet 366

Air pressure.... 402

Air suspension.... 261

Air vents Adjusting.... 189 Glove box.... 191

Air/water duct 366

Airbag Rear airbag....61

Airflow Adjusting.... 179

AIRMATIC Setting the vehicle level.... 262 Vehicle levels.... 261

Alarm system.... 110

All-wheel drive.... 211

Alternative route.... 332

Ambient lighting.... 171

AMG TRACK PACE Configuring....326 Drag Race....325 Function....323 Telemetry display....326 Track Race....323

Animals.... 56

Anti-collision Drive Away Assist.... 283 Anti-lock braking system.... 225 Anti-theft alarm system.... 110 Anti-theft protection Immobilizer.... 109

Apps, Mercedes me Mercedes me calls.... 342 Mercedes me connect.... 345 Remote Parking Assist.... 279

Assistance system.... 224

530 Index

ASSYST PLUS

Battery disconnection periods.... 360

Service interval display.... 359

Service requirements...... 359

ATA

Deactivating the alarm.... 110

Function.... 110

Interior protection.... 112

Interior protection function.... 111

Tow-away alarm function.... 110

Tow-away protection.... 111

ATTENTION ASSIST

Function.... 229

Setting.... 231

Attention assistant.... 229

Augmented reality

Head-up display.... 293

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center..... 33

Authorized workshop.... 33

Automatic car wash 366

Automatic car wash mode.... 368

Automatic climate control.... 182

Automatic distance control.... 231

Automatic driving lights.... 162

Automatic emergency call.... 350

Automatic engine start/stop.... 201

Automatic front passenger air bag shutoff

Function.... 50

Information (child restraint system on

the front passenger seat).... 69

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp...... 47

Automatic Lane Change

Active Lane Change Assist.... 242

Automatic lateral support adjustment.... 129

Automatic measures after an accident.... 54

Automatic mirror folding function.... 178

Automatic seat adjustment.... 128

Automatic transmission

DIRECT SELECT lever.... 207

Drive programs.... 205

DYNAMIC SELECT button.... 205

Engages neutral...... 208

Engaging drive position.... 209

Engaging reverse gear.... 208

Kickdown 210

Manual gear shifting.... 209

Selecting park position.... 208

Steering wheel paddle shifters.... 209

Switching gears.... 207

Transmission position display.... 207

Transmission positions.... 207

Autonomous braking.... 246

B

Bad weather light.... 165

Bag hook.... 150

BAS....225

Basic information.... 42

Battery (12 V battery)

Charging.... 387

Notes 383

Notes (starting assistance and charg-

ing)....385

Replacing.... 389

Starting assistance.... 387

Battery (48 V)

Notes.... 384

Battery (starter battery)

charging, Remote Online.... 195

Belt

Fastening 45

Notes on wearing correctly.... 44

Releasing....60

To adjust the height.... 45

Belt air bag

Function....60

Inflating.... 54

Straightening out a seat belt strap.... 60

Blind Spot Assist

Function.... 255

Bluetooth®

Connecting a mobile phone.... 341

Brake Assist

Active Brake Assist.... 246

Brake Assist System 225

Brake Assist System.... 225

Brake disks.... 196

Brake fluid 438

Brake force distribution.... 227

Brake pads....196

Brakes

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).... 225

Active Brake Assist.... 246

BAS (Brake Assist System).... 225

Driving tips.... 197

EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu-

tion)....227

Electric parking brake.... 219

Handbrake 219

HOLD function.... 227

Limited braking effect (salt-treated

roads).... 197

New/replaced brake pads/brake discs.. 196

Notes on breaking in a new vehicle..... 196

Parking brake 219

Post-collision brake.... 54

Braking assistance

Active Brake Assist.... 246

Brake Assist System.... 225

Breakdown

Changing a wheel.... 422

Flat tire.... 377

Overview of aids.... 22

Tow-starting.... 395

Towing methods.... 390

Transporting the vehicle.... 392

Breakdown (Roadside Assistance).... 28

C

Calling the customer center for

Mercedes-Benz 342

Calls

Mercedes me.... 342

Telephone menu.... 341

Using overhead control panel.... 342

Camera

360° camera.... 266

Activating using GPS (reversing cam-

era)....270

Button....270

Care.... 371

Cleaning.... 371

Driver camera.... 313

Function.... 266

Information 223

Managing activation points.... 270

Opening the camera cover (rear view

camera)....270

ROAD SURFACE SCAN 264

Select view.... 270

Car key....79

532 Index

Car wash

Automatic car wash.... 366

Power washer 368

Washing by hand 369

Car-to-X-Communication

Display on map.... 334

Care

Air/water duct.... 366

Automatic car wash.... 366

Camera 371

Decorative foil.... 370

Display 372

Exterior lighting 371

Head-up display.... 372

Headliner 372

Paint 369

Plastic trim.... 372

Power washer 368

Real wood/trim elements.... 372

Seat belts.... 372

Steering wheel 372

Vehicle interior 372

Vehicle parts.... 371

Washing by hand 369

Wheels/rims 371

Caring for plastic trim.... 372

Caring for rims.... 371

Center air bag (driver, front passenger) Inflating....54

Center air bag (driver's backrest).... 61

Center air bag (driver's seat backrest) Information.... 61

Central display Operating.... 305

Central locking system Button....84 SmartKey....80

Change of address.... 29

Change of ownership 29

Changing a wheel Preparation.... 422 Raising the vehicle.... 423

Charging 12 V battery.... 387 USB port.... 143, 154 Wirelessly charging a mobile phone.... 157

Chauffeur mode

Moving the front passenger seat into the chauffeur position.... 121

Moving the front passenger seat into the normal position.... 123 Overview.... 120

Checking the coolant level.... 365

Child safety lock Rear door....76 Side windows (rear passenger compartment)....78

Child seat Adjusting the vehicle seat.... 71

Basic instructions.... 65

Front passenger seat.... 68

Installing ISOFIX....74 Notes on belt air bags....71

Overview of warning stickers.... 68

Rear airbag....70

Rearward-facing....71 Risks/dangers....66

Securing on the rear seat with the seat belt.... 76

Securing to the front passenger seat with the seat belt.... 76

The most important information in brief.... 64

Top Tether 75

Children

Avoiding dangers in the vehicle.... 66

Basic instructions.... 65

Special seat belt retractor.... 73

Chock....422

City lighting.... 165

Clean varnish.... 369

Cleaning

Air/water duct.... 366

Automatic car wash.... 366

Camera 371

Decorative foil.... 370

Paint 369

Power washer.... 368

Real wood/trim elements.... 372

Sensors.... 371

Vehicle interior 372

Vehicle parts.... 371

Washing by hand.... 369

Cleaning carpets.... 372

Cleaning seat covers.... 372

Climate control, Air conditioning system

Activating/deactivating.... 181

Activating/deactivating (rear operat-

ing unit).... 181

Activating/deactivating the A/C func-

Activating/deactivating the A/C func-

tion (MBUX).... 182

Adjusting.... 181

Air conditioning menu.... 181

Air distribution.... 179

Air vents (front).... 189

Air vents (rear passenger compart-

ment).... 190

Airflow....179

Automatic control.... 182

Defrosting a window.... 182

Defrosting windows.... 183

Demisting the windshield.... 179

Filling capacity for refrigerant and

PAG oil 441

Fine particle status display.... 181

Fragrance system.... 184, 185

Glove box air vent.... 191

Immediate pre-entry climate control..... 189

Inserting/removing the flacon (fra-

Pre-entry climate control for depar-

ture time....187

Rear operating unit.... 20

Rear passenger compartment operat-

ing unit.... 180

Rear window heating.... 179

Refrigerant.... 440

Residual heat.... 184

Switching air-recirculation mode

on/off....184

Synchronization function.... 183

Temperature....179

Ventilation with comfort opening.... 100

Windshield heater.... 186

COC papers, CERTIFICATE OF CONFORM-

ITY 430

Cockpit

Instrument panel....6

Collision detection (parked vehicle)

Setting.... 221

534 Index

Combination switch Lights....162 Windshield wipers....173

Commuter route.... 332

Components relevant to radio regulation Declaration of conformity.... 31

Content sharing menu.... 304

Control elements: 27

Convenience closing feature.... 101

Convenience opening.... 100

Coolant Capacity.... 439 Notes.... 438

Cooling....179

Copyright License....40

Copyrights Trademarks...... 40

Cornering light function.... 164

Correct use.... 33

Cover.... 102

Cross traffic (warning).... 284 Crosswind Assist.... 227

Cushion air bag (reclining rear seat) Inflating....54

Cushionbag, Reclining rear seat Information....61

Customer Assistance Center (CAC)...... 34

Customer Relations Department...... 34

D

Damage Limited protection.... 56

Damping system ADS PLUS AIRMATIC....261 E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL....263 Setting the vehicle level....262

Dashcam Notes......336 Selecting a USB device......337 Starting/stopping a video recording......337

Data processing in the vehicle.... 36

Data protection rights.... 39

Data storage Data protection rights....39 Electronic control units....36 Event Data Recorder....39 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect....39 Online services....38

Daytime running lamps, Daytime running lamp mode Activating/deactivating.... 170

Deactivating the alarm.... 110

Dealership.... 33

Declaration of conformity Components relevant to radio regulation.. 31

Decorative foil.... 370

Definitions Tires and loading.... 416

Defrost function.... 182

Deployed components Limited protection.... 56

Deployment situations.... 54

Destination entry.... 331

Detecting inattentiveness.... 229

Diagnostics connection.... 32

DIGITAL LIGHT

Activating/deactivating.... 166

Active headlamps.... 164

Adaptive Highbeam Assist.... 167

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus.... 168

Assistance functions.... 166

Bad weather light.... 165

City lighting.... 165

Cornering light function.... 164

Dynamic low beam.... 164

Extended range fog lamps.... 165

Highway mode.... 165

Overview.... 164

Topographical compensation.... 165

Digital Operator's Manual.... 24

Dinghy towing

Pulling/towing 289

DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission.... 207

Engages neutral.... 208

Engaging drive position.... 209

Engaging park position automatically..... 208

Engaging reverse gear.... 208

Function 207

Gearshift recommendation.... 210

Manual gearshifting.... 209

Selecting park position.... 208

Display

Care.... 372

Display (driver's display)

Overview of displays.... 296

Display (MBUX multimedia system)

Settings.... 295

Display message

Calling up on driver display.... 443

Notes 443

Display messages

[ ] --- mph.... 485

12 V On-board Electrical Sys-

48 V Battery See Operator's

Manual 501

Add Washer Fluid.... 462

ATTENTION ASSIST Nodding

Off Take a Break! 479

ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a

Break! 478

Automatic Driving Lights Inop-

erative....450

Battery Overheated Stop!

Everyone Get Out! Outdoors if Possible.. 501

BRAKE Brake Immediately.... 474

Camera View Reduced See

Operator's Manual 495

BRAKE Check Brake Fluid Level...... 474

Check Coolant Level See Oper-

ator's Manual 463

Check Engine Oil Level At Next

Refueling (Add 1 Quart)...... 506

Check Left Low Beam (example).. 450

Check Tires.... 503

Compressor Is Cooling...... 482

Coolant Stop Switch Off Vehicle... 463

Currently Unavailable See

Operator's Manual 475

Currently Unavailable See

Operator's Manual 476

Do Not Exceed 12mph....482

Do Not Leave People or Ani-

mals in the Vehicle 447

Don't Forget Your Key...... 449

Engine Oil Level Cannot Be

Measured.... 508

Engine Oil Level Reduce Oil

Level 506

Engine Oil Level Stop Switch

Off Vehicle 507

Engine Oil Pressure Stop

Switch Off Vehicle 507

Front Left Malfunction Service

Required (Example)...... 444

Fuel Filler Cap Open 465

Fuel Reserve 464

Hood Not Locked Close Before

Starting Trip.... 460

Hood Unlatched Pull Lever

Again to Open 459

Initializing Key Please Wait...... 449

Initiating Emergency Stop...... 488

Inoperative See Operator's

Manual 476

Inoperative See Operator's

Manual 477

EBD Inoperative See Operator's

Manual 478

SOS Inoperative 498

Intensive Cleaning Activated for

30 Seconds....462

Key Not Detected (red display

message)...... 448

Key Not Detected (white dis-

play message)...... 448

Left Window Airbag Malfunc-

tion Service Required (Example)...... 444

Lowering 481

Malfunction Do Not Exceed 50

mph 479,483

Malfunction Drive at Max. 50

mph 480

Malfunction See Operator's

Manual 450

Malfunction Stop...... 484

Obtain a New Key 447

Off 485

HOLD Off 478

PARK Parking Brake See Operator's

Manual 470

Please Correct Tire Pressure..... 504

Please Wait Charging 48 V Bat-

tery....501

Rear Axle Steering Currently

Malfunctioning....458

Rear Axle Steering Malfunction

Service Required 458

Rear Axle Steering Malfunction

Stop Immediately.... 458

Reduce Speed.... 505

PARK Release Parking Brake.... 473

Replace Key Battery.... 447

Restraint System Malfunction

Service Required 444

Rising 481

Slow Down 482

Steering Malfunction Drive

Carefully Service Required 457

Steering Malfunction Increased

Physical Effort See Operator's Manual.... 457

Steering Malfunction Stop

Immediately See Operator's Manual..... 457

Stop Immediately Close Hood

Completely 460

STOP Vehicle Level Too Low..... 480

Stop Vehicle See Operator's

Manual 499

Stop Vehicle See Operator's

Manual....500

Stop Vehicle To Charge the 12

V Battery Do Not Switch Off Vehicle..... 500

Suspended 485

Switch Off Lights.... 451

Switch On Headlights.... 451

Switch on vehicle to charge the

12 V battery.... 500

PARK Switch on Vehicle to Release

the Parking Brake 473

Temporarily Unavailable Sen-

sors Dirty....494

Tires Overheated.... 505

Vehicle Rising Please Wait...... 482

Warning Tire Malfunction.... 504

Wheel Sensor(s) Missing.... 503

Active Blind Spot Assist Currently

Unavailable See Operator's Manual..... 492

Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative...... 492

Active Brake Assist Functions Cur-

rently Limited See Operator's Manual..... 486

Active Brake Assist Functions Limited

See Operator's Manual.... 487

Active Distance Assist Currently

Unavailable See Operator's Manual..... 485

Active Distance Assist Inoperative...... 486

Active Distance Assist Now Available..... 486

Active Emergency Stop Assist Cur-

rently Unavailable See Operator's

Manual 489

Active Emergency Stop Assist Inoper-

ative.... 489

Active Lane Change Assist Currently

Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... 489

Active Lane Change Assist Inoperative... 490

Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently

Unavailable See Operator's Manual..... 493

Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative... 493

Active Lane Keeping Assist Limited

Range of Functions See Operator's

Manual 493

Active Parking Assist and

PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera-

tor's Manual.... 498

Active Parking Assist Limited Availa-

bility of Maneuvering Assistance See

Operator's Manual 498

Active Steering Assist Currently

Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer-

gency Stops....488

Active Steering Assist Currently

Unavailable See Operator's Manual..... 487

Active Steering Assist Inoperative...... 488

Active Stop & Go Assist Currently

Unavailable See Operator's Manual..... 491

Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative

See Operator's Manual.... 491

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently

Unavailable See Operator's Manual..... 451

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative.... 452

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Cur-

rently Unavailable See Operator's

Manual 452

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inop-

erative....452

Ambient Lighting Warning Support

Inoperative.... 459

Automatic Lane Change Currently

Unavailable See Operator's Manual..... 490

Automatic Lane Change Inoperative..... 490

Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (red dis-

play message)...... 469

Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (white

display message)...... 469

Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila-

ble See Operator's Manual.... 491

Blind Spot Assist Inoperative.... 492

Cannot Start Vehicle See Operator's

Manual 454

Change the steering wheel/ seat

position until 6 dots are visible on the

upper edge of the screen.... 496

Check Brake Pads See Operator's

Manual 475

Depress Brake to Shift from P.... 465

Depress Brake to Shift to D or R...... 466

Depress Brake to Shift to R.... 466

DIGITAL LIGHT Functions Limited.... 451

Drive Malfunction Stop Contact Dealer... 469

Drive Malfunction Stop Restart Vehicle... 468

Drive Overheated Drive Carefully...... 469

Driver Camera Inoperative See Opera-

tor's Manual 496

Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual 445
Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator's Manual 446
Hazard Warning Light Malfunction...... 453
Head-up Display Brightness Currently
Reduced See Operator's Manual...... 456
Head-up Display Currently Unavaila-
ble See Operator's Manual 456
Head-up Display Inoperative.... 456
MULTIBEAM LED Functions Limited...... 451
N Automatically Activated Please Shift
to Transmission Position Again 467
Occupant Presence Reminder Inoper-
ative 447
PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera-
tor's Manual 497
Place the Key in the Marked Space
See Operator's Manual.... 449

PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's
Manual 496
PRE-SAFE PLUS Inoperative See
Operator's Manual 497
PRE-SAFE Pulse Side Inoperative See
Operator's Manual 497
Push rear-left seat belt extender back
manually. See Operator's Man-
ual (example)...... 445
Reduced Drive System Performance
See Operator's Manual 453
Reversing Not Possible Service
Required 468
Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Apply
Parking Brake When Parking 466
Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Driver's
Door Open Position P Not Selected...... 466
Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activa-
ted Manually No Automatic Change to
P 467

Service Required Apply Parking Brake
to Park 466
Service Required Do Not Change
Transmission Position 468
Shift to P Only When Vehicle Is Sta-
tionary 465
Snow Chain Mode Maximum Speed
Exceeded 459
Starting Possible Again 502
The camera view of the driver is cur-
rently obstructed Affected functions:
See operator's manual.... 496
Tire Pressure Monitor Currently
Unavailable 502
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative...... 502
Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative Tire
Pressure Sensors Missing 503
To Deselect P or N Depress Brake and
Start Vehicle 465

To Switch Off Vehicle Press and Hold

Start/Stop Button for at Least 3 Sec-

onds or Press 3 Times.... 463

Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavaila-

ble See Operator's Manual.... 479

Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative.... 479

Transmission Malfunction Stop...... 468

Vehicle Ready to Drive Shutdown

Occurs When Locked or After a Few

Minutes....455

Vehicle Ready to Drive Shutdown

Occurs When Locked or Automatically

in XX Mins 455

Windshield Wiper Malfunction...... 462

Displaying road names/house numbers..... 332

Distance control.... 231

Distance warning.... 246

DISTRONIC.... 231

Door, Convenience doors, Rear doors Child safety lock (rear door).... 76

Emergency key....91

Extending/retracting door handles..... 84

Opening (from the inside).... 83

Opening/closing the convenience doors.. 87

Power closing function.... 90

Setting convenience doors.... 90

Unlocking (inside).... 83

Door handles

Extending/retracting....84

Door operating unit

Function seat.... 18

Door operating unit (rear passenger com-

partment)....20

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)...... 412

Drag Race 325

Drinking and driving.... 197

Drinks holder, Cup holder.... 153

Drive Away Assist.... 283

Drive position.... 209

Drive program display.... 206

Drive programs

Selecting.... 206

Driver camera

Function.... 313

Switching on/off.... 314

Driver's display, Instrument cluster

48 V on-board electrical system.... 296

Head-up display.... 292

Menus.... 291

Notes 290

Operating.... 290

Adjusting electrically.... 114

Easy entry and exit feature.... 134

Seat heating.... 130

Driving safety system

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)...... 225

Active Brake Assist 246

Active Lane Change Assist.... 242

Active Steering Assist.... 239

ATTENTION ASSIST 229

BAS (Brake Assist System).... 225

Blind Spot Assist / Active Blind Spot

Assist.... 255

Cameras.... 223

EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu-

tion).... 227

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)...... 226

Hill Start Assist.... 229

HOLD function.... 227

Overview 224

Radar and ultrasonic sensors.... 223

STEER CONTROL.... 227

Traffic Sign Assist.... 250

Your responsibility.... 223

Driving system.... 224

Driving tips

Drinking and driving.... 197

General driving tips.... 197

Notes on breaking in a new vehicle..... 196

Optimized acceleration.... 196

Rear axle steering.... 201

Drowsiness detection.... 229

Duplicate key.... 83

Dynamic handling control system.... 226

Dynamic low beam

Overview.... 164

DYNAMIC SELECT

Calling up the fuel consumption indi-

cator....207

Configuring drive program I.... 206

Displaying engine data.... 206

Displaying vehicle data.... 206

Drive program display.... 206

Drive programs.... 205

Function.... 205

Selecting the drive program.... 206

E

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL

Electrohydraulic suspension.... 263

ROAD SURFACE SCAN 264

Setting the vehicle level.... 265

Suspension.... 263

Vehicle levels.... 263

E10....435

Easy entry feature

Adjusting.... 136

Easy exit feature

Adjusting.... 136

EASY-PACK trunk box

Care.... 372

Installing/removing.... 152

Setting.... 150

EBD, Electronic Brakeforce Distribution..... 227

ECO Assist

48 V on-board electrical system...... 203

ECO display 203

ECO start/stop button

Automatic engine start/stop...... 202

ECO start/stop function

Automatic engine start.... 201

Automatic engine stop.... 201

Function.... 201

Switching off/on.... 202

Electric parking brake

Applying automatically.... 219

Emergency braking.... 220

Manually applying/releasing.... 220

Releasing automatically.... 220

Electrical fuses.... 395

Electrohydraulic chassis.... 263

Electrohydraulic suspension.... 263

542 Index

Electronic Stability Program.... 226

Emergency First-aid kit (soft sided).... 377 Overview of aids.... 22 Reflective safety vest.... 375 Warning triangle.... 376

Emergency braking Active Brake Assist....246 Brake Assist System....225 Carrying out....220 Electric parking brake/handbrake....219

Emergency key Door....91 Trunk lid....98

Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle.... 194

Emergency release Trunk lid (from inside).... 98

Emergency stop assistant.... 241

Emergency Tensioning Devices Inflating.... 54

Engine Emergency operation mode.... 194

Emergency start.... 395 Engine number.... 432 Jump-starting.... 385 Parking (start/stop button).... 214

Engine data Displaying....206 DYNAMIC SELECT....206

Engine number 432

Engine oil, Oil Additives....437 Capacity....438 Checking the oil level using the driver display....363 MB-Freigabe / MB-Approval....438 Quality....438 Refilling....364

Environmentally friendly driving.... 25 ESC, Electronic Stability Control.... 226

ESP ^® Activating/deactivating.....227 Crosswind Assist.....227 Function.....226

Event Data Recorder.... 39

Exit warning Blind Spot Assist / Active Blind Spot Assist..... 255 MBUX Interior Assistant..... 310

Exiting a parking space Active Parking Assist.... 274 Drive Away Assist.... 283 PARKTRONIC.... 270

Exterior lighting Care.... 371

Exterior mirrors Parking position.... 177

F

Factory settings MBUX reset function.... 322

Fatigue detection.... 229

Favorites.... 316

Film coverings On camera/sensors.... 223

Fine particle status display.... 181

First aid First-aid kit (soft sided).... 377

First-aid kit (soft sided).... 377

Fitting accessories Limited protection.... 56

Flacon.... 185

Flat tire Changing a wheel....422 MOExtended....378 Notes....377 TREFIT kit....379

Flat towing Pulling/towing.... 289

Floor mats.... 159

Fog lamp.... 162

Fog light (extended range).... 165

Foil covering Radar and ultrasonic sensors.... 223

Folding table.... 146

Footrest Rear front passenger seat.... 122

Footwell temperature.... 183

Fragrance.... 184

Fragrance system Activating/deactivating....184 Adjusting....185 Inserting/removing the flacon....185 Perfume vial....185

Free software.... 40

Frequencies Two-way radio.... 431

Front air bag Inflating....54

Front headlamps.... 161

Front passenger air bag Disabling/enabling.... 48

Front passenger air bag shutoff, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Information (child restraint system on the front passenger seat)....69

Front passenger seat Adjusting electrically.... 114 Adjusting from driver's seat.... 116 Adjusting from the rear passenger compartment.... 117

Fuel Additives....436 E10....435 Gasoline....435 Gasoline quality....435 Refilling....211 Reserve....437 Sulfur content....435 Tank capacity....437

Fuel consumption indicator.... 207

Fuel reserve.... 437

Fully reclined position.... 119

Function in the event of an accident.... 55

Function seat.... 18

Function seat (rear passenger compartment)....20

Fuses Cockpit....398 Engine compartment....396 Fuse assignment diagram....395 Notes....395 Passenger footwell....398 Trunk....398

G

Garage door opener

Clearing the memory.... 219

Opening/closing a door 218

Problem.... 218

Garage door openers

Programming buttons.... 216

Synchronizing the rolling code.... 218

Gasoline 435

Gearshift

DIRECT SELECT lever.... 207

Manual.... 209

General driving tips.... 197

Genuine parts.... 25

Glide mode.... 210

Glove box

Air vent....191

Locking/unlocking.... 145

Grab handles.... 113

H

Handbrake.... 219

Handling characteristics

Unusual....400

HANDS-FREE ACCESS....96

Handset.... 147

Hazard warning lights.... 163

Hazard warnings

Car-to-X-Communication.... 334

Head restraint

Attaching/removing the additional

cushion (front)...... 125

Attaching/removing the additional

cushion (rear passenger compartment).. 126

Folding into position/folding back

manually (rear passenger compart-

ment).... 127

Lowering/folding into place from the

front (rear passenger compartment)...... 125

Luxury head restraint (front)...... 124

Luxury head restraint (rear passenger

compartment).... 125

Neck warmer.... 126

Head-up display

Augmented reality 293

Care 372

Function 292

Memory function.... 137

Operating.... 294

Selecting (with augmented reality)...... 295

Switching on/off.... 295

Headlamp flashing.... 162

Headlamp range control.... 165

Headlamps.... 161

Heating

Activating/deactivating.... 181

Center console.... 180

Climate control.... 179

Panel heating.... 132

Rear window.... 179

Seat 130

Steering wheel 134

Windshield.... 186

Help call

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system.. 349

High beam.... 162

Highway mode.... 165

Hill Start Assist.... 229

HOLD function Function....227 Switching on/off....228

Home screen Central display.... 304 Hood Opening/closing.... 361

Identification plate Engine....432 Refrigerant....440 Vehicle....432 Immediate pre-entry climate control....189 Immobilizer....109 Incorrect behavior by vehicle occupants Limited protection....56

Indicator/warning lamps Driver's display....508 PASSENGER AIR BAG....47 Individual drive program Configuring....206 Inside rearview mirror....176

Installing Snow chains.... 401 Tires/wheels.... 426

Instrument panel Cockpit......6 Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating......166

Interior lighting Adjusting.....171 Ambient lighting.....171 MBUX reading light.....310 Switch-off delay time.....173

Interior protection.... 112 Internet Mercedes me connect.... 345 Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot.... 320 Web browser.... 347

Ionization.... 184 ISOFIX child seat anchor Installing.... 74

Jack Storage location.... 422 Jump-start connection.... 387

K Key Problem....83 Replacement key....83

KEYLESS-GO Deactivating....80 Locking/unlocking the vehicle....85 Problem....86 Unlocking setting....80

Kickdown....210 Knee bag....61

L Lane Change Assist....242 Lane Keeping Assist....258 Lane recognition Active Lane Change Assist....242

Active Lane Keeping Assist.... 258

Lane scan.... 264

Language

Notes 322

Setting.... 322

Level control

AIRMATIC....261

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL 263

License plate (front) 31

License plate assembly (front).... 31

Light switch.... 161

Lighting

Dynamic low beam.... 164

Interior lighting.... 171

Lights

Active headlamps.... 164

Adaptive Highbeam Assist...... 167

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus.... 168

Assistance functions.... 166

Automatic driving lights.... 162

Bad weather light.... 165

City lighting.... 165

Combination switch.... 162

Cornering light function.... 164

DIGITAL LIGHT 164

Dynamic low beam.... 164

Fog light (extended range).... 165

Hazard warning lights.... 163

High beam.... 162

Highway mode.... 165

Interior lighting.... 171

Locator lighting.... 170

Reading lamp.... 171

Rear fog light.... 162

Responsibility for lighting systems...... 161

Switch-off delay time.... 170

Switching the Intelligent Light System

on/off.... 166

Topographical compensation.... 165

Turn signals.... 162

Limited Warranty.... 35

Live Traffic Information 334

Load index

Tires.... 414

Load-bearing capacity

Tires.... 414

Loading

Bag hook.... 150

Definitions.... 416

Loading guidelines.... 141

Loading information table.... 407

Loads.... 141

Locator lighting.... 170

Locking/unlocking

Automatic locking (MMS) 86

Doors (from the inside).... 83

Emergency key....91

KEYLESS-GO....85

Loud sound

PRE-SAFE ^® Sound.... 51

Low-beam headlamps

Activating/deactivating.... 161

Lubricants.... 434

Luggage

Net hooks.... 147

Luggage rack.... 141

Lumbar support.... 118

M

MAGIC VISION CONTROL Windshield wiper.... 174

Maintaining safe distance Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC...... 234

Maintaining the headliner.... 372

Maintaining the steering wheel.... 372

Maintenance Vehicle.... 28

Maintenance Management Notes......360 Transferred data......360

Malfunction Restraint system.... 45

Malfunction message Driver's display.... 443

Maneuvering Drive Away Assist.... 283 Maneuvering brake function.... 285

Maneuvering assistant Activating/deactivating.... 285 Cross traffic warning.... 284

Drive Away Assist.... 283 Maneuvering brake function.... 285

Maneuvering brake function.... 285

Maneuvering support.... 284

Manual gearshifting Activating/deactivating.... 210

Map Displaying online map contents...... 334 Displaying weather information...... 334 Moving...... 334 Selecting the map orientation...... 334 Setting the map scale...... 334

Map functions.... 334

Massage program.... 130

Massage programs.... 129, 130

Maximum full-stop braking.... 225

Maximum load rating 413

Maximum permissible load Calculation example.... 409 Determining.... 408

Maximum tire pressure.... 413

MBUX Dashcam.... 336

MBUX Interior Assistant Camera & parking....313 Driver camera....313 Exit warning....310 Favorites....312 Overview....307 Preselection outside mirrors....312 Reading light....310 Search light....310 Using the favorites pose....312

MBUX multimedia system Activating/deactivating standby mode... 222 Air conditioning menu.... 181 Calling up the zero layer.... 302 Configuring display settings.... 295 Drive programs.... 206 Factory setting.... 322 Home screen.... 304 Language settings.... 306 MBUX Interior Assistant.... 307 Media.... 352 Mercedes me & Apps.... 347 Notes.... 298

Operating the zero layer.... 302

Overview 298

Set collision detection.... 221

Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 238

Snow chain mode.... 401

Standby mode function.... 222

Steering wheel heater / seat heating..... 134

Telephone.... 338

Touchscreen.... 305

Zero layer.... 299

MBUX reading light.... 310

MBUX search light 310

MBUX Voice Assistant

Function.... 306

Voice prompting.... 307

Mechanical key Inserting/removing.... 81

Media Overview of functions/symbols...... 352

Medical aids.... 34

Memory function Head-up display....137 Outside mirrors....137 Seat....137

Steering wheel.... 137

Memory function (rear passenger compartment)

Passenger seat and rear seat.... 139

Rear seat.... 138

Memory Parking Assist

Exiting a parking space.... 288

Function 285

Parking.... 287

Recording.... 286

Menus (driver's display) Notes...... 291

Mercedes me App Activating on-demand features.... 27

Mercedes me Apps.... 347

Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment...... 344

Calling the Mercedes-Benz customer center after automatic accident/

breakdown detection.... 343

Calls via the overhead control panel..... 342

Information.... 342

Mercedes-Benz customer center...... 342

Transferred data 344

Mercedes me connect Accident/Breakdown Management.... 346 Information.... 345 Transferred data.... 347

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system, Emergency call

Automatic emergency call.... 350

Data transfer.... 351

Information.... 349

Manual emergency call.... 350

Overview.... 349

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts.... 25

Message memory 443

Mirrors Mirror folding function.... 178 Outside mirrors.... 175 Rearview mirror.... 176

Mobile phone Authorizing, Remote Parking Assist.... 282 Notes on wireless charging.... 157 Wireless charging (front).... 158 Wireless charging (rear passenger compartment).... 20, 159

Model series.... 432

Modification

Limited protection.... 56

MOExtended tires, Run-flat tires.... 378

MULTIBEAM LED

Active headlamps.... 164

Adaptive Highbeam Assist.... 167

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus.... 168

Bad weather light.... 165

City lighting.... 165

Cornering light function.... 164

Extended range fog lamps.... 165

Highway mode.... 165

Topographical compensation.... 165

Multifunction camera

ROAD SURFACE SCAN 264

Multimedia system

Enabling/disabling the rear airbag...... 50

N

Navigation

Activating.... 328

Destination entry.... 331

Notes.... 328

Overview.... 328

Neck warmer.... 126

Neutral....208

Nodding off.... 229

Non-operational time

Activating/deactivating standby mode... 222

Notes on breaking in a new vehicle.... 196

Q

Objects in the vehicle interior

Limited protection.... 56

Occupant presence reminder

Activating/deactivating.... 78

Function....78

Occupant safety

Air bag....61

Basic information.... 42

Child seat.... 65

Information on the child restraint sys-

tem....50

Information on the correct seat position... 43

Occupant presence reminder.... 78

Pets in the vehicle.... 56

PRE-SAFE ^② 51

On-board diagnostics interface.... 32

On-board electronics

Two-way radios.... 430

On-demand feature.... 27

Online services.... 38

Open Source Software.... 40

Opening the trunk lid using your foot

HANDS-FREE ACCESS.... 96

Opening/closing a door 218

Opening/closing a garage door.... 218

Operating fluids

Additives.... 436

Brake fluid 438

coolant 438

Engine oil 437

Gasoline 435

Notes......434

Refrigerant (air conditioning system)..... 440

Windshield washer fluid...... 439

Operating safety

48 V on-board electrical system.... 29

Operator's manual.... 26

550 Index

Operator's Manual digital.... 24

Outside mirrors

Automatic anti-glare mode.... 176

Automatic mirror folding function..... 178

Blind Spot Assist / Active Blind Spot

Assist.... 255

Folding in/out.... 175

Memory function.... 137

Preselection MBUX.... 312

Setting.... 175

Warning lamp 255

Overhead control panel.... 16

P

Paddle shifters

Steering wheel paddle shifters..... 209

Paint code 432

Panel heating....132

Panic alarm, Alarm

Activating/deactivating....80

Parcel net hooks.... 147

Park position

DIRECT SELECT lever.... 207

Parking

Active Parking Assist.... 274

PARKTRONIC....270

Parking Assist

Active Parking Assist.... 274

Memory Parking Assist.... 285

PARKTRONIC....270

Remote Parking Assist.... 279

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

Activating/deactivating.... 273

Adjusting warning tones.... 273

Function 270

Parking assistance systems

Active Parking Assist.... 274

Drive Away Assist.... 283

Maneuvering brake function.... 285

Memory Parking Assist.... 285

PARKTRONIC....270

Remote Parking Assist.... 279

Parking brake.... 219

Parking for an extended period.... 222

Parking lamps.... 161

Parking lights.... 161

Parking position

Exterior mirrors....177

Storing the position of the front-

passenger outside mirror using

reverse gear....177

PARKTRONIC....270

PASSENGER AIR BAG

Status display, front passenger air bag..... 47

Payload

Calculation example.... 409

Determining the maximum.... 408

Permitted towing methods

Overview.... 389

Personalization....314

Pets in the vehicle....56

Post-collision brake.... 54

Power closing function

Door....90

Trunk lid....93

Power supply

Start/stop button.... 193

Switching on (start/stop button).... 193

Power washer.... 368

Pre-entry climate control

activating/deactivating for departure

time....188

At time of departure.... 187

For departure time.... 188

immediate.... 189

PRE-SAFE®, Anticipatory occupant protection

Function....51

PRE-SAFE® Sound.... 51

Reverting measures.... 52

PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side

Function....52

Inflating....54

PRE-SAFE® PLUS

Backing up measures.... 52

Function.... 52

Preventative occupant protection system

51,52

Profile 314

Programs.... 205

Protection

Limited 56

Protection against collision

Maneuvering brake function.... 285

Protection of the environment

Driving style.... 25

Pulling away

Drive Away Assist.... 283

Hill Start Assist.... 229

Optimized acceleration.... 197

0

QR code rescue card.... 35

Qualified specialist workshop.... 33

R

Radar and ultrasonic sensors.... 223

Radio....354

Radio regulations

Regulatory radio identification.... 432

Rain closing function

Sliding sunroof.... 105

Rain sensor

Sliding sunroof....105

Windshield wipers.... 173

Reading lamp

Interior lighting.... 171

Rear air bag, Points to remember when

the rear seat is occupied

Inflating.... 54

Information.... 62

REAR SEAT AIR BAG indicator lamps..... 49

Rear airbag

Activating/deactivating.... 50

Rear axle steering.... 201

Rear door (child safety lock)

Securing....76

Rear fog light.... 162

Rear passenger compartment climate

control....183

Rear passenger compartment seat belt

Status display.... 46

Rear seat

Footrest....122

Fully reclined position.... 119

Reclining rear seat.... 118

REAR SEAT AIR BAG

Status display.... 49

552 Index

Rear view camera

Opening the camera cover.... 270

Rear window

Roller sunblind.... 108

Rear window heating.... 179

Rearview mirror

Automatic anti-glare mode.... 176

Rearward-facing child seat

Information....71

Reflective safety vest.... 375

Refrigerant.... 440

Refrigerator box

Removing/installing.... 156

Refueling

Fuel 211

Refueling the vehicle.... 211

Regulatory radio information

Specific absorption rate.... 432

Remote Online

Charging the starter battery.... 195

Cooling/heating the vehicle interior..... 195

Starting the vehicle.... 195

Remote Parking Assist

Authorizing a mobile phone.... 282

Function.... 279

Operating.... 280

Replacement key....83

Reporting safety defects.... 35

Reserve

Fuel 437

Resetting

MBUX reset function.... 322

Residual heat.... 184

Responsibility

Driving safety systems.... 223

Restraint system

Basic information.... 42

Basic instructions for children.... 65

Deployment situations.... 54

Functionality.... 45

Information on function.... 55

Information on the correct seat position... 43

Limited protection.... 56

Malfunction.... 45

Protection.... 43

Self-test 45

Warning lamp.... 45

Reverse gear

DIRECT SELECT lever.... 207

Reversing camera

Activating via GPS.... 270

Managing activation points.... 270

ROAD SURFACE SCAN.... 264

Roadside Assistance (breakdown)...... 28

Roll away protection.... 227

Roller sunblind

Electric.... 107

Rear window.... 108

Sliding sunroof.... 102

Roof load.... 442

Route

Alternative route.... 332

Calculating.... 332

Commuter route.... 332

Navigation 328

Selecting a type.... 332

Route guidance with augmented reality

Activating.... 332

Activating/deactivating the traffic

light view.... 254

Displaying road names/house num-

bers 332

Head-up display.... 293

Switching video on or off 332

Route-based speed adaptation

Function.... 236

Setting 238

Run-flat characteristics.... 378

S

Safety system.... 224

Satellite radio

Logging in.... 357

Setting music and sport alerts...... 357

Seat, Front seat

Adjusting electrically.... 114

Adjusting the front passenger seat

from the rear passenger compartment... 117

Automatic adjustment.... 128

Automatic lateral support adjustment..... 129

Center air bag (driver's backrest)...... 61

Configuring settings.... 128

Correct driver's seat position.... 113

Footrest (rear passenger compart-

ment).... 122

Fully reclined position.... 119

Lumbar support.... 118

Massage programs.... 129

Memory function.... 137

Neck warmer.... 126

Panel heating.... 132

Reclining rear seat.... 118

Resetting settings (massage programs).. 130

Settings.... 18

Side impact air bag.... 61

Workout programs.... 129

Seat (rear passenger compartment)

Settings.... 20

Seat belt

Automatic tightening.... 53

Rear passenger compartment seat

belt status display.... 46

Straightening out a belt air bag.... 60

Warning lamp 46

Seat belt adjustment

Activating/deactivating.... 53

Function.... 53

Seat belt extender.... 53

Seat belt warning.... 46

Seat belts

Activating/deactivating seat belt

adjustment.... 53

Belt air bag.... 60

Care.... 372

Fastening 45

Notes on wearing correctly.... 44

Releasing....60

Seat belt extender.... 53

To adjust the height.... 45

Seat heating

Activating/deactivating.... 130

Seat height.... 114

Seat ventilation.... 20, 132

Selecting a gear.... 209

Selector lever 207

Self-test

Automatic front passenger air bag shu

toff....47

Restraint system 45

554 Index

Sensors

Cleaning.... 371

Information.... 223

Service.... 359

Service center.... 33

Shortening the braking distance

Brake Assist System 225

Side impact air bag.... 61

Side windows

Child safety lock (rear passenger

compartment)....78

Closing with SmartKey.... 101

Convenience closing feature.... 101

Convenience opening.... 100

Electric roller sunblind.... 107

Opening with the SmartKey...... 100

Opening/closing....99

Problem.... 101

Size designation

Tires.... 414

Skid chains.... 401

Sliding sunroof, Panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel

Automatic functions.... 105

Closing with SmartKey.... 101

Opening with the SmartKey.... 100

Opening/closing.... 102

Problem.... 106

Rain closing function.... 105

SmartKey

Acoustic locking verification signal...... 80

Battery....81

Deactivating a function.... 80

Function....79

Key ring attachment.... 81

Mechanical key 81

Panic alarm....80

Power consumption.... 80

Unlocking setting.... 80

Smartphone Integration, iPhone ^®

Android Auto.... 348

Apple CarPlay ^® 348

Snow chain mode.... 401

Snow chains.... 401

Socket

12 V (rear passenger compartment)..... 154

Software update.... 319

SOS button.... 342

Sound

Menu 358

PRE-SAFE ^® Sound.... 51

Wheels/tires.... 400

Sound settings.... 358

Spare parts.... 25

Spare wheel, Emergency spare wheel...... 428

Special seat belt retractor.... 73

Specialist workshop.... 33

Specific absorption rate (SAR).... 432

speed

Save, cruise control.... 234

Index 555

Save, DISTRONIC.... 234

Speed adaptation, Route-based.... 236

Speed control Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC...... 231

Speed rating Tires.... 414

Start-off assist Drive Away Assist.... 283 Hill Start Assist.... 229 Optimized acceleration.... 196

Start/stop button Parking the vehicle....214 Starting the vehicle....194 Switching on the power supply / vehicle....193

Start/stop function.... 201

Starter battery charging, Remote Online.... 195

Starting Remote Online....195 Start/stop button....194

Starting assistance.... 387

Starting the engine Emergency operation mode.... 194 Remote Online.... 195 Start/stop button.... 194

Starting-off aid Drive Away Assist....283 Hill Start Assist....229 Optimized acceleration....196

Status display Front passenger air bag.... 47 Rear passenger compartment seat belt.... 46

Status display, rear air bag.... 49

Steer Assist Active Steering Assist.... 239 STEER CONTROL.... 227

STEER CONTROL.... 227

Steering Rear axle steering.... 201

Steering wheel Adjusting electrically.... 133 Driver's air bag.... 61 Memory function.... 137 Steering wheel heater.... 134

Steering wheel adjustments.... 133 Steering wheel heater.... 134

Steering wheel heating Decoupling from the seat heating..... 134

Steering wheel paddle shifters.... 209 Stop and go ECO start/stop function.... 202

Stopping Parking the vehicle.... 214

Stowage areas.... 143

Stowage compartment Parcel net hooks.... 147

Stowage space Center console (front).... 144 Front armrest.... 144 Handset (rear passenger compartment).... 147

Stowage spaces Armrest....143 Center console (front)....143 Door....143 Glove box....143

Substances hazardous to health.... 29

556 Index

Sulfur content 435

Suspension

Adjusting the vehicle level (E-ACTIVE

BODY CONTROL).... 265

AIRMATIC....261

E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL.... 263

Setting the suspension level (AIR

MATIC)....262

Switch-off delay time

Exterior....170

Interior....173

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off..... 184

System settings

MBUX reset function.... 322

Overview 318

1

Tank capacity

Fuel 437

Reserve 437

Tank filler cap / flap.... 211

Technical data

Information.... 430

Radio regulations.... 432

Roof load 442

Specific absorption rate (SAR).... 432

Vehicle dimensions.... 442

Telediagnosis

Diagnostic data.... 360

Telediagnostics

Transferred data.... 361

Telemetry display.

Telephone, Smartphone

Authorizing a mobile phone, Remote

Parking Assist.... 282

Bluetooth ^® 341

Connecting a mobile phone.... 341

Menu 341

Notes.... 338

Notes on wireless charging (mobile

phone)....157

Operating modes.... 341

Secure Simple Pairing.... 341

Telephone menu overview.... 340

Wireless charging (mobile phone, rear

passenger compartment).... 159

Wirelessly charging a(mobile phone,

front)....158

Telephony operating modes

Bluetooth ^36 telephony.... 341

Temperature

Adjusting.... 179

Temperature grade

THERMOTRONIC

Air conditioning control panel.... 179

Through-loading feature

Locking....149

Opening.... 148

TIN (Tire Identification Number).... 412

Tire and Loading Information placard.... 407

Tire characteristics.... 414

Tire information table.... 407

Tire labeling

Characteristics.... 414

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... 412

Load index.... 414

Load-bearing capacity.... 414

Maximum tire load.... 413

Maximum tire pressure.... 413

Index 557

Size designation.... 414

Speed rating.... 414

Temperature grade...... 411

Tire Quality Grading 411

Traction grade 411

I read wear grade.... 411

Tire pressure

Checking.... 406

Checking manually.... 404

Maximum...... 413

Notes.... 402

Tire pressure table.... 403

TREFIT kit.... 379

Tire pressure monitor

Function 405

Tire pressure monitoring system

Restarting 406

Tire pressure table.... 403

Tire Quality Grading 411

Tire sealant.... 379

Tire tread.... 400

Tire-change tool 422

Tire-change tool kit.... 422

TREFIT kit, Tire inflation compressor

Storage location.... 378

Tires

Breakdown 377

Characteristics...... 414

Checking.... 400

Checking the temperature.... 406

Checking the tire pressure manually..... 404

Definitions.... 416

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... 412

Installing.... 426

Labeling.... 411

Load index 414

Load-bearing capacity.... 414

Maximum pressure.... 413

Maximum tire load.... 413

MOExtended 378

Noise....400

Notes on installing.... 418

Removing 425

Removing/installing hub cap.... 423

Replacing.... 418, 422

Rotating.... 421

Selecting.... 418

Size designation.... 414

Snow chains.... 401

Speed rating 414

Storing 422

Temperature grade...... 411

Tire and Loading Information placard..... 407

Tire pressure table.... 403

Tire Quality Grading...... 411

TIREFIT kit.... 379

Traction grade...... 411

Tread wear grade 411

Unusual handling characteristics...... 400

Toll system

Debiting toll fees.... 328

Windshield 178

Top Tether....75

Topographical compensation, Predictive

headlamp range control.... 165

Touch Control

Driver's display.... 290

MBUX.... 305

Touch-sensitive controls 27

Touchscreen.... 305

Tow bar system

Towing away 289

Tow-away protection.... 111

Tow-starting.... 395

Towing

Towing methods.... 389

Towing eye

Storage location.... 394

Towing methods

Both axles on the ground.... 390

Overview.... 389

Track Race 323

Traction grade.... 411

Traffic information.... 334

Traffic Jam Assistant.... 238

Traffic light view

Activating/deactivating.... 254

Information.... 254

Traffic light warning/display 250

Traffic Sign Assist

Function.... 250

Setting.... 254

Trailer drawbar, Pulling/towing.... 289

Transmission position display.... 207

Transmission positions

DIRECT SELECT lever.... 207

Transporting

Vehicle 392

Tread wear grade.... 411

Trunk

Installing/removing the EASY-PACK

comfort box....152

Setting the EASY-PACK comfort box..... 150

Trunk lid

Closing....93

Emergency release (from inside).... 98

HANDS-FREE ACCESS.... 96

Limiter....99

Opening....92

Power closing function.... 93

Switching the separate locking fea-

ture on/off....97

Unlocking with emergency key.... 98

Tuneln Internet Radio 356

Turn signal indicator.... 162

Turn signals.... 162

Two-way radios

Frequencies.... 431

Installation.... 430

Transmission output 431

U

Unfastening....60

Unlocking setting.... 80

Updates.... 319

USB port

Rear passenger compartment...... 154

Stowage compartments (front).... 143

User profiles

Adding a user.... 316

Note.... 314

Selecting options.... 316

V

Vehicle, Switching on the ignition

48 V on-board electrical system.... 29

Activating, Remote Online.... 195

Activating/deactivating standby mode... 222

Correct use.... 33

Data storage.... 36

Diagnostics connection.... 32

Emergency key....91

Equipment.... 26

KEYLESS-GO 85

Limited Warranty 35

lock automatically (MMS)...... 86

Locking/unlocking (emergency key)...... 91

Locking/unlocking (from inside).... 84

Lowering.... 427

Maintenance.... 28

Medical aids.... 34

Parking 214

Parking for an extended period.... 222

Problem notification.... 34

Pulling.... 289

QR code rescue card.... 35

Raising 423

Set collision detection.... 221

Standby mode function.... 222

Starting (start/stop button).... 194

starting, emergency operation mode..... 194

Stopping 214

Switching off (start/stop button)...... 214

Switching on (start/stop button).... 193

Towing away.... 389

Transporting.... 392

Ventilating / comfort opening...... 100

Vehicle cameras 223

Vehicle data

Display, MBUX.... 206

Displaying, DYNAMIC SELECT.... 206

Notes...... 441

Roof load 442

Turning circle.... 442

Vehicle height 442

Vehicle length.... 442

Vehicle width.... 442

Wheelbase 442

Vehicle dimensions.

Vehicle emergency start.... 395

Vehicle equipment.... 26

Vehicle identification number...... 432

Vehicle identification plate

Model series.... 432

Paint code 432

VIN 432

Vehicle interior

Cooling/heating (Remote Online)...... 195

Vehicle key....79

Vehicle level

AIRMATIC....261

Setting (AIRMATIC) 262

Setting (E-ACTIVE BODY CONTROL)..... 265

Vehicle operation outside the USA or Can-

ada....28

Vehicle sensors.... 223

Vehicle start

Emergency operation mode.... 194

Remote Online.... 195

Start/stop button.... 194

Vehicle tool kit

TREFIT kit.... 378

Towing eye 394

Ventilating.... 100

Ventilation.... 189

Vents

Air vents.... 189

VIN

Engine compartment 432

Identification plate.... 432

Seat 432

Vision

Defrosting windows.... 183

Windshield heater.... 186

Voice assistant

Voice prompting.... 307

W

Warning system.... 110

Warning triangle.... 376

Warning/indicator lamp

ABS warning lamp.... 521

Active Brake Assist warning

lamp 524

ATTENTION ASSIST warning

lamp 523

(1) Brakes warning lamp (Canada

only)....520

BRAKE Brakes warning lamp (USA on)

(1) Brakes warning lamp (yellow)

(Canada only).... 519

Check Engine warning lamp...... 516

Coolant warning lamp (red)...... 514

Coolant warning lamp (yellow)..... 516

Distance warning lamp.... 523

Electric parking brake indicator

lamp(red)(Canada only)....518

PARK Electric parking brake indicator

lamp(red)(USA only) 518

Electric parking brake indicator

lamp (yellow) 518

Electrical malfunction warning

lamp.... 516

Engine operating temperature

warning lamp.... 517

ESP ^ OFF warning lamp.... 522

ESP ^30 warning lamp flashes..... 521

ESP ^30 warning lamp lights up..... 522

Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes...... 517

Fuel reserve warning lamp

lights up.... 517

Mercedes-Benz emergency call

system warning lamp.... 526

Occupant presence reminder

warning lamp (white).... 511

Occupant presence reminder

warning lamp (yellow).... 511

Power steering warning lamp

(red) 512

Power steering warning lamp

(yellow).... 512

RBS RBS warning lamp (USA only)...... 519

Rear axle steering warning

lamp(red) 513

! Rear axle steering warning

lamp (yellow) 513

Reduced warning lamp power..... 512

Restraint system warning lamp..... 510

Seat belt warning lamp flashes..... 510

Seat belt warning lamp lights up... 511

Suspension warning lamp (red).... 525

Suspension warning lamp (yellow) 525

☐ Tire pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp flashes.... 526

☐ Tire pressure monitoring sys- tem warning lamp lights up.... 527

Traffic Sign Assist warning lamp... 523 REAR SEAT AIR BAG.... 49

Warning/indicator lamps Driver's display.... 508 PASSENGER AIR BAG.... 47

Washer fluid Topping up.... 365 Windshield washer fluid.... 439

Washing by hand.... 369 Water tank.... 366

Wear Limited protection.... 56

Weather information.... 334 Web browser.... 347 Weight information.... 432

Wheel change Installing a new wheel.... 426 Lowering the vehicle.... 427 Removing a wheel.... 425 Removing/installing hub caps.... 423 Wheel rotation.... 421

Wheels Breakdown....377 Care....371 Checking....400 Checking the tire pressure manually....404 Checking the tire temperature....406 Definitions....416 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)....412 Installing....426 Load index....414 Load-bearing capacity....414 Maximum tire load....413 Maximum tire pressure....413 MOExtended....378 Noise....400 Notes on installing....418 Removing....425 Removing/installing hub cap....423 Replacing....418, 422

Rotating....421 Selecting....418 Size designation....414 Snow chains....401 Speed rating....414 Storing....422 Temperature grade....411 Tire and Loading Information placard....407 Tire characteristics....414 Tire labeling....411 Tire pressure....402 Tire pressure monitor....405 Tire Quality Grading....411 TIREFIT kit....379 Traction grade....411 Tread wear grade....411 Unusual handling characteristics....400

Wi-Fi Setting up a hotspot.... 320
Window Rear window.... 108 Roller sunblind.... 108
Window curtain air bag.... 61

562 Index

Windows

Care.... 371

Convenience opening.... 100

De-icing....182

Opening with the SmartKey...... 100

Opening/closing....99

Removing mist.... 183

Windshield

De-icing....182

Demisting.... 179

Infrared reflective.... 178

Radio waves.... 178

Replacing the wiper blades with

MAGIC VISION CONTROL.... 174

Toll system.... 178

Windshield heater, Windshield heating..... 186

Windshield washer fluid 439

Windshield washer system.... 365

Windshield wiper

Replacing the wiper blades with MAGIC VISION CONTROL.... 174

Windshield wipers

Activating/deactivating.... 173

Winter operation

Activating/deactivating snow chain

mode.... 401

Snow chains.... 401

Wiper blades

Care.... 371

Replacing with MAGIC VISION CON-

TROL....174

Wipers.... 173

Wireless charging

Mobile phone (front).... 158

Mobile phone (rear passenger com-

partment).... 159

Overview.... 157

Workout programs.... 129

Workshop.... 33

Z

Zero layer

Function.... 299

Overview.... 300